818507-M ELITE Service and Parts Manual

MR CONTRAST DELIVERY SYSTEM
A 60 ml
10/15 30 ml
/20 ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
A 60 ml
10/15 30 ml
/20 ml
B 50
60 ml ml
125 ml
Installation, Service
and Parts Manual 818507-M
for Serial Numbered injectors ending in ‘G’.
I—INTRODUCTION ii
CONTACT INFORMATION
Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC
1034 S Brentwood Blvd.
Suite 800
Richmond Heights, MO 63117 USA
1-314-376-4901
1-855-266-4944
LF.PMQuality@guerbet.com
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
818507-M 2020-05-05
iii
FOREWORD
Congratulations on the purchase of your OptiStar® Elite MR Contrast Delivery
I—Introduction
System. The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System represents our effort to
provide a quality product to support better health care throughout the world.
Regardless of how well equipment is designed, misuse or abuse will deny
its owner the expected quality of service. Misuse or abuse may occur
unintentionally because the proper method of operating the equipment is
unknown. Read this manual carefully before operating the OptiStar Elite MR
Contrast Delivery System. Retain this manual for future reference.
Contact your local Guerbet distributer for more information.
RECORDING REFERENCE NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBERS

The reference number (Ref. No.) and serial numbers (S/N) must be supplied
when requesting replacement parts or optional accessories. For convenience,
record the requested information below:
Ref. No. ________________________________(located on Power control)

Power Control S/N ___________________________
Powerhead S/N ___________________________
Console S/N ___________________________
Power Supply S/N ___________________________
Date of Installation / /
Installing Company___________________________________________
Address_____________________________________________________
Phone No. ___________________________________________________
Software version numbers may be accessed via the System Info key on the
Results screen
Console_____________________________________________________
Powerpack___________________________________________________
818507-M 2020-05-05
iv
PATENT INFORMATION
U.S. patents protecting this product are listed at this website: www.guerbet.com/patents
I—Introduction
MEANINGS OF SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL

Please regard any message that follows the word Danger, Warning or
Caution!
DANGER!
Hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING!
Hazards which could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Hazards which could result in equipment or property damage.
818507-M 2020-05-05
v
MEANINGS OF SYMBOLS USED ON THE INJECTOR

Symbol Definition
I—Introduction
Console Connection identifier
Powerhead Connection identifier
Power Control identifier
Power Supply identifier (P/N 814600 / P/N 814450)
Hand start switch connection identifier
System OFF/ON (only for the Console)
Power OFF/ON
Ram movement/injector status identifier:

A-side Light and B-side Light OFF = Injector Disabled
A-side Light and B-side Light ON = Injector Enabled
A-side Light ON ; B-side Light Flashing = Patency Check Ready
A-side Light Flashing ; B-side Light OFF = A-side Ram moving
A-side Light OFF ; B-side Light Flashing = B-side Ram moving
Check to ensure air is removed from syringe and tubing

before injecting.
Start Injection
P Start Patency Check Injection
Stop Injection
Fluid Detect
Pinch Point possible. Keep fingers away from this area.
Refer to instruction manual
(01) 1074619000XXXX
(21) 123ABCdefG
UDI (Unique Device Identification)
818507-M 2020-05-05
vi
Symbol Definition
I—Introduction
Equipment sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge.

DO NOT TOUCH exposed connectors.
MR Unsafe--an item that is known to pose hazards in all

MR MR environments.
MR Conditional--an item that has been demonstrated to pose

no know hazards in a specified MR environment with specified
MR conditions of use.
MR Safe--an item that poses no known hazards in all

MR MR environments.
<300G Locate in an area with magneticfields less than or

equal to 300 Gauss.
! ATTENTION! Consult User's/Service Manual.
European Union’s Waste Electrical and

Electric Equipment (WEEE).
CAUTION! Risk of electrical shock. Do not remove cover.

Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
T 4AH , 250 V Fuse Rating (Voltage, Amperage, Type)
REF Reference
S/N Serial Number
P/N Part Number
V/A Volts Amps
[Reverse] key. Retracts the Powerhead Ram.
[Accelerator] key. Increases the speed of the ram when held

down with [Forward] or [Reverse] key.
[Forward] key. Advances the Powerhead Ram.
818507-M 2020-05-05
vii
CLASSIFICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH EN60601

TYPE OF PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK
I—Introduction
Class I equipment
DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK
Type CF applied part (Syringes and Tubing)
DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST INGRESS OF WATER

Ordinary Equipment
DEGREE OF SAFETY OF APPLICATION IN THE PRESENCE OF A FLAMMABLE

ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR OR WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anaesthetic mixture with air
or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
EMISSION STANDARD
The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System meets emission standard EN60601-1-2
Class A
UL/CSA CLASSIFICATION
OPTISTAR® ELITE MR CONTRAST DELIVERY SYSTEM
(MEDICAL EQUIPMENT)
WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRIC SHOCK,
FIRE AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY
33SL IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/AAMI ES 60601-1:2005,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60601-1 (2008), IEC 60601-1:2005,
UL 60601-1, IEC 60601-1:1998, A1:1991, A2:1995
818507-M 2020-05-05
viii
CE MARK INFORMATION
I—Introduction
0123
GUERBET
BP 57400
95943 Roissy CdG Cedex
France
(located at : 15 rue des Vanesses,
93420 Villepinte, France)
Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC, 2111 E. Galbraith Road, Cincinnati, OH 45237-1624 USA
818507-M 2020-05-05
ix
Table Of Contents
I—TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTACT INFORMATION................................................................................................................................II
FOREWORD......................................................................................................................................................... III
RECORDING REFERENCE NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBERS............................................................ III
PATENT INFORMATION..................................................................................................................................IV
U.S. PATENTS PROTECTING THIS PRODUCT ARE LISTED AT THIS WEBSITE: WWW.GUER-
BET.COM/PATENTS ..........................................................................................................................................IV
MEANINGS OF SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL..............................................................................IV
MEANINGS OF SYMBOLS USED ON THE INJECTOR............................................................................ V
CLASSIFICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH EN60601...........................................................................VII
TYPE OF PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK................................................................VII
DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK..........................................................VII
DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST INGRESS OF WATER......................................................VII
DEGREE OF SAFETY OF APPLICATION IN THE PRESENCE OF A FLAMMABLE ANAES-
THETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR OR WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE....................VII
EMISSION STANDARD.........................................................................................................................VII
UL/CSA CLASSIFICATION.............................................................................................................................VII
CE MARK INFORMATION............................................................................................................................ VIII
INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................1-1-1
1.1 INDICATIONS FOR USE.................................................................................................................... 1-1-1
1.2 SERVICE TECHNICIAN QUALIFICATIONS.................................................................................. 1-2-1
1.3 CONFIGURATION OF UNIT............................................................................................................. 1-3-1
1.3.1 CEILING SUSPENSION CONFIGURATION................................................................... 1-3-3
1.4 SAFETY FEATURES............................................................................................................................ 1-4-1
1.4.1 SELF-TESTING DESIGN....................................................................................................... 1-4-1
1.4.2 PATENCY CHECK® FEATURE ............................................................................................ 1-4-1
1.4.3 TIMING BOLUS® FEATURE.................................................................................................. 1-4-1
1.4.4 DRIP MODE FEATURE......................................................................................................... 1-4-1
1.4.5 ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED SYRINGE.............................................................................. 1-4-1
1.4.6 SYRINGE CLARITY................................................................................................................ 1-4-1
1.4.7 POSITIVE POSITIONING OF THE POWERHEAD........................................................ 1-4-1
1.4.8 HAND START SWITCH OPERATION............................................................................... 1-4-2
1.4.9 PHYSICAL STABILITY OF REMOTE STAND.................................................................. 1-4-2
818507-M 2020-05-05
x
1.5 SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................ 1-5-1

1.5.1 DIMENSIONS.......................................................................................................................... 1-5-1

1.5.2 WEIGHT.................................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
1.5.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................... 1-5-2
1.5.3.1 POWER CABLES (POWER SUPPLY)............................................................................. 1-5-2
1.5.3.2 POWER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1-5-2
1.5.4 ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE....................................................................................................... 1-5-3
1.5.5 ENVIRONMENTAL................................................................................................................ 1-5-3
1.5.6 COMPATIBLE SYRINGE SIZES........................................................................................... 1-5-5
1.5.7 PROGRAMMABLE FLOW RATE (A-SIDE)...................................................................... 1-5-5
1.5.8 PROGRAMMABLE FLOW RATE (B-SIDE)...................................................................... 1-5-5
1.5.9 PROGRAMMABLE VOLUME (A-SIDE)........................................................................... 1-5-5
1.5.10 PROGRAMMABLE VOLUME (B-SIDE)......................................................................... 1-5-5
1.5.11 PROGRAMMABLE PRESSURE LIMIT .......................................................................... 1-5-5
1.5.12 PROGRAMMABLE SCAN DELAY................................................................................... 1-5-6
1.5.13 PROGRAMMABLE INJECT DELAY................................................................................ 1-5-6
1.5.14 PROGRAMMABLE DRIP INJECTION PARAMETERS (B-SIDE)............................. 1-5-6
1.5.15 PROTOCOL MEMORY....................................................................................................... 1-5-6
1.5.16 INJECT RESULTS................................................................................................................. 1-5-6
1.6 CONSUMABLES.................................................................................................................................. 1-6-1
1.6.1 COMPATIBLE SYRINGE....................................................................................................... 1-6-2
1.6.2 LOW PRESSURE TUBING.................................................................................................... 1-6-2
1.6.3 MULTIPACK DISPOSABLES............................................................................................... 1-6-2
1.6.4 DOTAREM (GADOTERATE MEGLUMINE) PREFILLED SYRINGES......................... 1-6-3
1.6.5 PREFILLED SALINE SYRINGE............................................................................................ 1-6-3
1.7 ACCESSORIES AND COMPONENTS............................................................................................ 1-7-1
ACCESSORIES.................................................................................................................................... 1-7-1
COMPONENTS.................................................................................................................................. 1-7-2
818507-M 2020-05-05
xi
OVERVIEW OF SYSTEM FEATURES.............................................................2-1-1
2.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................................................... 2-1-1
2.2 POWERHEAD....................................................................................................................................... 2-1-2
2.3 CONSOLE.............................................................................................................................................. 2-1-3
2.4 REMOTE START................................................................................................................................... 2-1-3
2.5 POWER SYSTEM................................................................................................................................. 2-1-4
2.6 CEILING SUSPENSION..................................................................................................................... 2-1-5
BASIC OPERATION.......................................................................................3-1-1
3.1 TURNING THE SYSTEM ON............................................................................................................. 3-1-1
3.2 CONSOLE DISPLAY MODES OF OPERATION.......................................................................... 3-2-1
3.2.1 MAIN SCREEN........................................................................................................................ 3-2-1
3.2.2 MEMORY SCREEN, SYSTEM INFO SCREEN, RESULTS SCREEN AND [ENABLE] KEY............
3-2-1
3.3 DESCRIPTION OF SCREENS........................................................................................................... 3-3-1
3.3.1 MAIN SCREEN........................................................................................................................ 3-3-1
3.3.2 MEMORY SCREEN ............................................................................................................... 3-3-5
RETRIEVING A PROTOCOL FROM MEMORY.............................................................. 3-3-6
DELETING A PROTOCOL FROM MEMORY.................................................................. 3-3-7
STORING A PROTOCOL IN MEMORY............................................................................ 3-3-9
EDITING A PROTOCOL NAME.......................................................................................3-3-11
3.3.3 SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN..................................................................................3-3-13
SELECTABLE FEATURES...................................................................................................3-3-13
INFORMATION DISPLAYED............................................................................................3-3-13
3.3.4 INJECTION RESULTS SCREEN........................................................................................3-3-16
3.3.5 ENABLED SCREEN...............................................................................................................3-3-18
3.3.6 DRIP MODE SCREEN.........................................................................................................3-3-19
3.3.7 ACCESSING THE DRIP INFUSION PROGRESS SCREEN.........................................3-3-22
3.3.8 DRIP INFUSION COMPLETED SCREEN.......................................................................3-3-24
818507-M 2020-05-05
xii
MAINTENANCE AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURES.......................................4-1-1

4.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE........................................................................................................... 4-1-2

4.1.1 DAILY INSPECTION (REFER TO 4.7.1)............................................................................ 4-1-2
4.1.2 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT PROCEDURES................................................................. 4-1-2
4.2 POWERHEAD CHECKOUT PROCEDURES ................................................................................ 4-2-1
4.2.1 POWERHEAD CHECKOUT ITEMS REQUIRED............................................................. 4-2-1
4.2.2 POWERHEAD OVERVIEW.................................................................................................. 4-2-1
4.2.3 POWERHEAD OPERATIONS............................................................................................. 4-2-2
4.2.4 POWERHEAD STOP BUTTON CHECK........................................................................... 4-2-2
4.2.5 SYRINGE DETECTION CHECK.......................................................................................... 4-2-2
4.2.6 LIMIT SWITCH CHECK......................................................................................................... 4-2-3
4.2.7 RAM FACE CHECK................................................................................................................ 4-2-4
4.2.8 FLOW RATE/VOLUME CHECK PROCEDURE............................................................... 4-2-5
4.2.9 INJECTION PRESSURE CHECKS...................................................................................... 4-2-7
4.3 CONSOLE CHECKOUT PROCEDURES ....................................................................................... 4-3-1
4.3.1 CONSOLE OPERATIONS..................................................................................................... 4-3-1
4.3.2 REMOTE START OPERATIONS.......................................................................................... 4-3-2
4.4 GROUND CONTINUITY CHECKOUT PROCEDURES.............................................................. 4-4-1
4.4.1 GROUND CONTINUITY .................................................................................................... 4-4-1
4.4.2 ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE (CHASSIS OR ENCLOSURE)................................................ 4-4-2
4.4.3 GROUND IMPEDANCE........................................................................................................ 4-4-3
4.5 POWER CONTROL CHECKOUT PROCEDURES ....................................................................... 4-5-1
4.5.1 POWER CONTROL................................................................................................................ 4-5-1
4.5.2 GAUSS MEASURING METHOD........................................................................................ 4-5-2
4.6 CEILING SUSPENSION CHECKOUT PROCEDURES................................................................ 4-6-1
4.6.1 SUSPENSION ARM VISUAL AND OPERATIONAL CHECKS..................................... 4-6-1
4.7 CLEANING PROCEDURES............................................................................................................... 4-7-1
4.7.1 SYRINGE HOLDER................................................................................................................ 4-7-1
4.7.2 DOTACLIP / STARCLIP SYRINGE ADAPTER.................................................................. 4-7-1
4.7.3 POWERHEAD ........................................................................................................................ 4-7-1
4.7.4 CONSOLE................................................................................................................................. 4-7-1
4.7.5 POWER CONTROL................................................................................................................ 4-7-1
4.7.6 POWER SUPPLY..................................................................................................................... 4-7-1
4.7.7 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS.................................................................................... 4-7-1
818507-M 2020-05-05
xiii
TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................................5-1-1
5.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................................................................................ 5-1-1
5.1.1 OPTISTAR ELITE SERVICE KIT (OPTIONAL P/N 801210)........................................ 5-1-2
5.1.2 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES............................................................ 5-1-3
5.2 SYSTEM GENERATED MESSAGES................................................................................................ 5-2-1
5.2.1 ACTIVATING THE SYSTEM ERROR RESULTS LIBRARY..........................................5-2-15
FIELD REPLACEABLE PARTS.......................................................................6-1-1

6.1 GENERAL INFORMATION................................................................................................................ 6-1-2
6.1.1 RETAINING SCREWS............................................................................................................ 6-1-2
6.1.2 TERMINOLOGY...................................................................................................................... 6-1-2
6.1.3 REPLACEABLE PARTS.......................................................................................................... 6-1-2
6.2 CONSOLE.............................................................................................................................................. 6-2-1
6.2.1 CONSOLE REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS (814101)............................................... 6-2-2
6.2.2 CONSOLE REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS (814400)............................................... 6-2-7
6.2.3 CONSOLE COVER REMOVAL /INSTALLATION.........................................................6-2-13
6.2.4 CONSOLE CPU REMOVAL /INSTALLATION..............................................................6-2-14
6.2.5 DISPLAY SUBASSEMBLY REMOVAL /INSTALLATION............................................6-2-15
6.2.6 TOUCHSCREEN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..............................................................6-2-15
6.2.7 CONSOLE POWER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................6-2-16
6.2.8 CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................6-2-16
6.2.9 CONSOLE ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................6-2-17
818507-M 2020-05-05
xiv
6.3 POWERHEAD....................................................................................................................................... 6-3-1

6.3.1 POWERHEAD REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS........................................................... 6-3-2

6.3.1 POWERHEAD REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS (CONT’D)....................................... 6-3-3
6.3.2 POWERHEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION FROM CEILING SUSPENSION........6-3-11
6.3.3 POWERHEAD COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....................................................6-3-11
6.3.3.1 SYRINGE HOLDER NEST COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................6-3-11
6.3.3.2 BOTTOM BACK COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................6-3-11
6.3.3.3 TOP COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................6-3-12
6.3.3.4 BOTTOM FRONT COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..............................6-3-12
6.3.4 POWERHEAD BOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................6-3-12
6.3.5 POWERHEAD CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....................................................6-3-13
6.3.6 MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...............................................................................6-3-13
6.3.7 POWERHEAD END LIMIT SENSING BOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.........6-3-14
6.3.8 LOAD CELL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................................................6-3-15
6.3.9 END LIMIT HARNESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....................................................6-3-15
6.3.10 ENCODER HARNESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................6-3-16
6.3.11 SYRINGE SIZE SENSING BOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................6-3-16
6.3.12 DETENT SYRINGE HOLDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION......................................6-3-16
6.3.13 SYRINGE SIZE SENSING HARNESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................6-3-17
6.3.14 SYRINGE NEST HOLDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................6-3-17
6.3.15 SUPPORT ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..............................................................6-3-17
6.3.16 BEARING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................................6-3-18
REMOVAL..............................................................................................................................6-3-18
REASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................................6-3-18
818507-M 2020-05-05
xv
6.4 POWER CONTROL............................................................................................................................. 6-4-1
6.4.1 POWER CONTROL REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS................................................. 6-4-2
6.4.2 BACKPLATE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................ 6-4-7
6.4.3 DRIVER BOARD (802203-1) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........................................ 6-4-7
6.4.4 COMMUNICATION BOARD (802204-1) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ................. 6-4-8
6.4.5 CPU BOARD (814201-1S) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................. 6-4-8
6.4.6 POWER/REGULATOR BOARD (802202-1/814202-1) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.....6-4-9
6.4.7 INTERCONNECT BOARD (802207SR) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................... 6-4-9
6.4.8 POWERHEAD MOTOR HARNESS (802212)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..............................................................................................6-4-10
6.4.9 POWERHEAD COMMUNICATION HARNESS (802213SR)
6.4.10 CONSOLE COMMUNICATION HARNESS (802214SR)
6.4.11 POWER SWITCH (802215) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................6-4-11
6.5 POWER SUPPLY.................................................................................................................................. 6-5-1
6.5.1 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS...................................................... 6-5-2
6.5.2 POWER SUPPLY FUSE REPLACEMENT......................................................................... 6-5-4
6.5.3 REMOVAL OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT............................................................................. 6-5-4
6.5.4 DC POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT.............................................................................. 6-5-4
6.5.5 PC BOARD REPLACEMENT............................................................................................... 6-5-5
6.5.6 POWER ON/OFF SWITCH REPLACEMENT.................................................................. 6-5-5
6.5.7 LED ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT...................................................................................... 6-5-6
6.5.8 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS...................................................... 6-5-7
6.5.9 POWER SUPPLY FUSE REPLACEMENT......................................................................... 6-5-9
6.5.10 REMOVAL OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT.......................................................................... 6-5-9
6.5.11 DC POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT........................................................................... 6-5-9
6.5.12 PC BOARD REPLACEMENT...........................................................................................6-5-10
6.5.13 POWER ON/OFF SWITCH REPLACEMENT..............................................................6-5-10
6.6 REMOTE STAND.................................................................................................................................. 6-6-1
6.6.1 REMOTE STAND REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS..................................................... 6-6-1
6.7 FILTER..................................................................................................................................................... 6-7-1
6.7.1 FILTER ASSEMBLY................................................................................................................. 6-7-1
6.8 CEILING SUSPENSION..................................................................................................................... 6-8-1
6.8.1 CEILING SUSPENSION REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS......................................... 6-8-1
818507-M 2020-05-05
xvi
6.9 CABLES.................................................................................................................................................. 6-9-1

6.10 SERVICE KIT PARTS.......................................................................................................................6-10-1

6.10.1 LOAD CELL SERVICE KIT (P/N 802741S)..................................................................6-10-2
6.10.2 BUSHING REPLACEMENT SERVICE KIT (P/N 802742)........................................6-10-2
6.10.3 MOTOR REPLACEMENT SERVICE KIT (P/N 802743)............................................6-10-2
6.10.4 FASTENER SERVICE KIT (P/N 802744)......................................................................6-10-3
6.10.5 BEARING REPLACEMENT SERVICE KIT (P/N 802746)........................................6-10-4
6.10.6 POWERHEAD TOP COVER SERVICE KIT (P/N 814895S).....................................6-10-4
6.10.7 SYRINGE HOLDER SERVICE KIT (P/N 814748S)....................................................6-10-4
6.10.8 END LIMIT KIT (P/N 814302-1S)..................................................................................6-10-4
6.10.9 POWERHEAD CABLE/GASKET KIT (P/N 802303SR).............................................6-10-5
6.10.10 CONSOLE SWITCH KIT (P/N 802114SR).................................................................6-10-5
6.10.11 FILTER KIT (P/N 802614SR).........................................................................................6-10-5
6.10.12 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY (P/N 846116S).........................................................................6-10-5
6.10.13 HEAD COMMUNICATION HARNESS ASSEMBLY (P/N 802213SR)................6-10-5
6.10.14 POWER CONTROL INTERCONNECT ASSEMBLY (P/N 802207SR)................6-10-6
6.10.15 CONSOLE COMMUNICATION HARNESS ASSEMBLY (P/N 802214SR).......6-10-6
6.10.16 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT / UPGRADE SERVICE KIT (P/N 814604S)......... 6-10-6
6.10.17 POWER SUPPLY BOX SERVICE KIT (P/N 814600S)............................................6-10-6
6.10.19 LONG COLUMN ASSY SERVICE KIT (P/N 241412S)..........................................6-10-7
6.10.20 STANDARD COLUMN ASSY SERVICE KIT (P/N 241415S)...............................6-10-8
6.10.21 SPRING ARM WITH J-BOW ARM KIT (P/N 241428S)........................................6-10-8
6.10.22 PLASTIC COVERS, STANDARD COLUMN, KIT (P/N 241420S).......................6-10-8
6.10.23 PLASTIC COVERS, LONG COLUMN, KIT (P/N 241421S)..................................6-10-9
6.10.24 PLASTIC COVERS, EXTENSION ARM KIT (P/N 241422S).................................6-10-9
6.10.25 PLASTIC COVERS, SPRING ARM KIT (P/N 241423S).........................................6-10-9
6.10.26 GROUND WIRES AND MOUNTING SCREWS KIT (P/N 241424S)............... 6-10-10
6.10.27 PCB ASSY, POWER BOARD KIT (P/N 814202-1S)........................................... 6-10-10
6.10.28 PCB ASSY, POWER CONTROL CPU KIT(P/N 814201-1S).............................. 6-10-10
6.10.29 HARDWARE KIT, MRI ANCHORAGE PLATE (P/N 241416S)......................... 6-10-11
6.10.30 HARDWARE KIT, MRI TRACK AND CARRIAGE ASSY (P/N 241417............ 6-10-11
6.10.31 HARDWARE KIT, MRI CARRIAGE ASSY (P/N 241418S)................................. 6-10-11
6.10.32 HARDWARE KIT, MRI CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS (P/N 241419S). 6-10-12
6.10.33 HARDWARE KIT, J-BOW AND EXTENSION ARM (P/N 241425S)................ 6-10-12
818507-M 2020-05-05
xvii
6.10.34 HARDWARE KIT, END OF EXTENSION ARM (P/N 241426S)........................ 6-10-12
6.10.35 UNIVERSAL CONSOLE CPU PCB SERVICE KIT (P/N 846101-1S)................ 6-10-13
6.10.36 UNIVERSAL CONSOLE TOUCHSCREEN SERVICE KIT (P/N 814104S)....... 6-10-13
6.10.37 OPTISTAR ELITE CONSOLE SERVICE KIT (P/N 814400S)............................... 6-10-13
6.10.38 OPTISTAR ELITE CONSOLE DISPLAY UPGRADE KIT (P/N 814401S)......... 6-10-13
6.11 GENDER CONNECTORS..............................................................................................................6-11-1
THEORY OF OPERATION..............................................................................7-1-1
7.3 POWER SUPPLY.................................................................................................................................. 7-3-1
7.4 POWER CONTROL............................................................................................................................. 7-4-1
7.4.1 POWER BOARD AND REGULATOR BOARD................................................................ 7-4-5
7.4.2 COMMUNICATION BOARD............................................................................................... 7-4-7
7.4.3 DRIVER BOARD..................................................................................................................... 7-4-9
7.4.4 CPU BOARD..........................................................................................................................7-4-11
7.5 POWERHEAD....................................................................................................................................... 7-5-1
7.5.1 POWERHEAD MAIN BOARD............................................................................................. 7-5-1
7.5.2. END LIMIT SENSING BOARD........................................................................................... 7-5-2
7.5.3 SYRINGE SIZE BOARD......................................................................................................... 7-5-2
7.6 CONSOLE OVERVIEW....................................................................................................................... 7-6-1
7.6.1 CONSOLE CPU....................................................................................................................... 7-6-1
7.6.2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS.................................................................................................... 7-6-2
CALIBRATION...............................................................................................8-1-1
8.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................................................................................ 8-1-1
8.1.1 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT NEEDED:............................................................................... 8-1-1
8.1.2 FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION....................................................................................... 8-1-2
8.1.3 CALIBRATION SET-UP......................................................................................................... 8-1-3
8.1.4 INITIALIZATION OF THE POWER CONTROL CPU RAM:......................................... 8-1-4
8.1.5 ENTERING THE CALIBRATION MODE :......................................................................... 8-1-5
8.1.6 TEST DISPLAY AND TEST SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS:................................................. 8-1-5
8.1.7 TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY OVERVIEW........................................................................... 8-1-6
8.1.8 TEST DISPLAY OVERVIEW................................................................................................. 8-1-6
8.1.9 MODE DESCRIPTIONS........................................................................................................ 8-1-7
818507-M 2020-05-05
xviii
8.2 LIMIT SWITCH CALIBRATION (MODE 0):................................................................................... 8-2-1

8.2.1 SETUP....................................................................................................................................... 8-2-1

8.2.2 FOREWORD LIMIT SWITCH CHECK & ADJUSTMENT (A)...................................... 8-2-2
8.2.3 REVERSE LIMIT SWITCH CHECK (A).............................................................................. 8-2-3
8.2.4 FORWARD LIMIT SWITCH CHECK & ADJUSTMENT (RAM B)............................... 8-2-3
8.2.5 REVERSE LIMIT SWITCH CHECK (RAM B).................................................................... 8-2-3
8.3 PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS: (MODE 1)....................................................................................... 8-3-1
8.3.1 RAM FACE CHECK................................................................................................................ 8-3-1
8.3.2 SETUP....................................................................................................................................... 8-3-2
8.3.3 SIDE “A” 60 ML SYRINGE:.................................................................................................... 8-3-3
8.3.4 SIDE “B” 60 ML SYRINGE:................................................................................................... 8-3-4
8.3.5 SIDE “B” 125 ML SYRINGE:................................................................................................. 8-3-4
8.3.6 SIDE “A” 20 ML SYRINGES.................................................................................................. 8-3-5
8.3.7 SIDE “A” 30 ML SYRINGE..................................................................................................... 8-3-5
8.3.8 SIDE “B” 50 ML SYRINGE.................................................................................................... 8-3-6
8.4 ADDITIONAL CHECKS (FACTORY ADJUSTED)....................................................................... 8-4-1
8.4.1 SYRINGE SIZE FACTOR CHECK, (POWER CONSUMPTION) :................................ 8-4-1
8.5 EXIT CALIBRATION MODE:............................................................................................................. 8-5-1
SYSTEM INFORMATION...............................................................................9-1-1
9.1 ACTIVATING SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN....................................................................... 9-1-2
9.1.1 SETTING DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS..................................................................................... 9-1-3
9.1.2 CHANGE PRESSURE UNITS............................................................................................... 9-1-3
9.1.3 SET BEEPER VOLUME.......................................................................................................... 9-1-3
9.1.4 CHANGING LANGUAGES.................................................................................................. 9-1-3
9.1.5 SET DATE AND TIME............................................................................................................ 9-1-3
9.1.6 VIEW ALARM HISTORY....................................................................................................... 9-1-3
9.2 SERVICE MODE................................................................................................................................... 9-1-4
9.2.1 SCREEN CALIBRATION....................................................................................................... 9-1-4
9.2.2 ERASE ALARMS..................................................................................................................... 9-1-4
818507-M 2020-05-05
xix
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD AND UPGRADE................................................10-1-1
10.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................10-1-1
10.1.1 SOFTWARE TRANSFER FROM CD..............................................................................10-1-2
10.1.2 PROG32Z AND PROGCFZ SOFTWARE INSTALLATION .....................................10-1-2
10.2 DOWNLOAD AND UPGRADE PROCEDURES......................................................................10-2-1
10.2.1 INJECTOR PROTOCOL CHECKING PROCEDURE...................................................10-2-2
10.2.2 CONSOLE DOWNLOAD..................................................................................................10-2-3
10.2.3 POWER CONTROL DOWNLOAD................................................................................10-2-6
SCHEMATICS...............................................................................................11-1-1
OVERVIEW..................................................................................................................................................11-1-1
POWER CONTROL CPU SCHEMATIC 814201-2-C (1 OF 7)......................................................11-2-1
POWER SCHEMATIC 802202-2-F......................................................................................................11-2-8
REGULATOR SCHEMATIC 814202-2-A............................................................................................11-2-9
DRIVER BOARD SCHEMATIC 802203-2-F................................................................................... 11-2-10
COMMUNICATION BOARD SCHEMATIC 802204-2-B............................................................ 11-2-11
INTERCONNECT CPU BOARD SCHEMATIC 802205-2-B........................................................ 11-2-12
INTERCONNECT DRIVER BOARD SCHEMATIC 802206-2-B................................................. 11-2-13
CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 802101-2-M (1 OF 5)...............................................................................11-3-1
CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 846101-2-G (1 OF 5)................................................................................11-3-6
CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 846101-2-G (5 OF 5)............................................................................. 11-3-10
CONSOLE INTERFACE SCHEMATIC 802102-2-E (1 OF 1)...................................................... 11-3-11
818507-M 2020-05-05
xx
POWERHEAD SCHEMATIC 814301-2-B (1 OF 4).........................................................................11-4-1


END LIMIT SENSING SCHEMATIC 814302-2-B.............................................................................11-4-5
SYRINGE SIZE SENSING SCHEMATIC 802313-2-B......................................................................11-4-6
POWER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC 802451-2-C.....................................................................................11-5-1
POWER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC 814460-2-A.....................................................................................11-5-2
HAND BUTTON 802620/802622.......................................................................................................11-6-1
POWERHEAD CABLE 802303SR-A...................................................................................................11-7-1
DATA CABLE 801224..............................................................................................................................11-7-2
CONSOLE CABLE 814465.....................................................................................................................11-7-3
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.....................................................................A-1
RECEIVING INSPECTION.............................................................................................................................A-3
CONFIGURATION OF REMOTE STAND UNIT.......................................................................................A-6
CONFIGURATION OF CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM....................................................................A-6
MEANING OF MR SYMBOLS......................................................................................................................A-7
MR SAFE..................................................................................................................................................A-7
MR CONDITIONAL...............................................................................................................................A-7
MR UNSAFE............................................................................................................................................A-7
REMOTE STAND ASSEMBLY/POWERHEAD INSTALLATION..........................................................A-9
CEILING SUSPENSION INSTALLATION..................................................................................................A-9
POWERHEAD INSTALLATION FOR THE REMOTE STAND............................................................ A-10
818507-M 2020-05-05
xxi
POWERHEAD INSTALLATION FOR CEILING SUSPENSION......................................................... A-10
ATTACHMENT OF THE POWERHEAD TO THE CEILING SUSPENSION.......................... A-10
REMOVAL OF THE SUPPORT ARM............................................................................................. A-11
ATTACHMENT OF POWERHEAD TO J-BOW ARM................................................................. A-12
CABLE ROUTING OF POWERHEAD CABLE TO CEILING SUSPENSION......................... A-13
SECURING THE CABLE TO THE J-BOW ASSEMBLY............................................................... A-14
SECURING THE CABLE TO THE SPRING ARM......................................................................... A-16
SECURING THE CABLE TO A FIXED COLUMN CEILING SUSPENSION.......................... A-17
SECURING THE CABLE TO A TRACK ASSEMBLY SYSTEM.................................................. A-18
REMOVAL OF THE POWERHEAD CABLE.................................................................................. A-21
FILTER LOCATION FOR CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS.................................................. A-21
POWERHEAD SYRINGE ADAPTER INSTALLATION............................................................... A-21
CONSOLE INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................ A-22
POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION............................................................................................................ A-23
FILTER INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................... A-25
FILTER MOUNTED TO SHIELDED WALL.................................................................................... A-25
FILTER MOUNTED VIA PENETRATION PANEL........................................................................ A-26
FILTER DIMENSIONS.................................................................................................................................. A-27
POWER CONTROL ..................................................................................................................................... A-28
INSTALLATION OF COMMUNICATION CABLE BRACKETS................................................ A-28
MOUNTING TO STAND................................................................................................................... A-29
POWER CONTROL PLACEMENT AND ORIENTATION GUIDELINES......................................... A-30
POWER CONTROL PLACEMENT FOR CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS...................... A-31
GAUSS MEASURING METHOD.............................................................................................................. A-32
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................... A-32
POWER CABLES (POWER SUPPLY)....................................................................................................... A-32
POWER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................... A-33
CABLE CONNECTIONS............................................................................................................................. A-33
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT..................................................................................................................... A-39
CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS................................................................................................ A-39
818507-M 2020-05-05
xxii
SERVICE CHECKLIST....................................................................................... B-1

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY GUIDANCE....................................... C-1

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY TABLES.................................................................................... C-2
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-1-1
1 INTRODUCTION
1—OVERVIEW
The purpose of this manual is to provide instructions for installation, service
and calibration of the OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System. For further
information about operation and daily maintenance of the unit, refer to the
OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System Operator’s Manual.
1.1 INDICATIONS FOR USE

The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System is a contrast delivery system and
is designed to inject MR contrast media and flushing solutions into a patient’s
vascular system to obtain diagnostic images when used with Magnetic Reso-
nance Imaging equipment.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-1-2
1—OVERVIEW
This page intentionally left blank.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-2-1
1.2 SERVICE TECHNICIAN QUALIFICATIONS

The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System should be installed, serviced
and calibrated ONLY by qualified personnel who are completely familiar with
the unit, have read and understood this Installation, Service and Parts Manual,
and are otherwise trained in the service of equipment and procedures of this
1—OVERVIEW
type. Failure to follow these guidelines could result in serious injury to the ser-
vice technician.
WARNING!
Federal (USA) law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a phy-
sician. (21CFR 801.109(6)(1).
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-2-2
1—OVERVIEW
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-3-1
1.3 CONFIGURATION OF UNIT

The OptiStar Elite is specially designed to be used in conjunction with
MRI equipment. The unit consists of the components shown in Figure 1-3-1 and
Figure 1-3-2.
1—OVERVIEW
The console, filter, and the power supply are not designed to be placed in the
MRI area and must be set up in a separate viewing room.
The power control, powerhead, remote stand or ceiling suspension system
have been specifically designed so that they may remain in the MRI area
throughout the procedure without interference.
NOTE: Refer to section 1.5.5 Environmental for further information concerning

component location.
WARNING!
No modification of this equipment is allowed.
The console A contains a touch-sensitive display screen which provides the

ability to change the injection parameters, store protocols and retrieve proto-
cols. Information about the console is found in Chapter 3—Console Screens.
A hand start switch B , a remote control device which attaches to the rear
of the console, is included so that the injection process may be started and
stopped from outside the MRI area.
The powerhead C is specifically designed from materials which will not affect
nor be affected by the magnetic fields of the MR scanner. Note, however, the
Powerhead Cable Connector (connects into the Power Control) is MR condi-
tional. Information about the Powerhead is found in Chapter 4—Description of
the Powerhead.
The remote stand D allows easy placement of the powerhead for operator and
patient convenience. See Figure 1-3-1.
The power system consists of one Power Control E 1 , one Power Supply (with
mounting bracket) E 2 and one EFI/RFI Filter E 3 . Both the Power Control and
the Communication Cable (from the filter to the Power Control) are MR Condi-
tional. More information about the power system is found in Chapter 2—Power
ON / Power OFF.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-3-2
MR MR
MR
Control and E 3
Equipment Rooms C
1—OVERVIEW
A
60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
E1
D
B
E2 Dividing
P/N 814600 Wall
E2
P/N 814450
Magnet Room
AC Outlet
Figure 1-3-1 Overview of System with Remote Stand

component location and safety conditions.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-3-3
1.3.1 CEILING SUSPENSION CONFIGURATION
Suspension Systems F allow the OptiStar Elite powerhead to be flexibly

mounted at a distance from the patient location. See Figure 1-3-2.
1—OVERVIEW
MR F
MR
Control and E 3
Equipment Rooms
A MR
E1 C
A 60 ml
10/15/2 30 ml
0 ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
B
E2 Dividing
Réf. 814600 Wall
E2
Réf. 814450
Magnet Room
AC Outlet
Figure 1-3-2 Overview of System with Ceiling Suspension System

component location and safety conditions.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-3-4
1—OVERVIEW
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-4-1
1.4 SAFETY FEATURES

The OptiStar Elite has been designed to ensure the safety of both patient and
operator. Specific safety features include:
1.4.1 SELF-TESTING DESIGN
1—OVERVIEW
When the OptiStar Elite is switched ON, it automatically performs a series of
power-up tests to monitor the system status. If a problem is detected, an error
code message will appear in the system display. Also, during the enable pro-
cess and during an injection, all necessary functions are constantly checked. If
a fault is detected, the system will automatically shut down and an error code
message will be displayed. Refer to Chapter 5—System Generated Messages and
Alarms for error code messages.
1.4.2 PATENCY CHECK® FEATURE
Prior to the delivery of the main injection, a Patency Check — an injection of a
small volume of saline — can be performed to determine the integrity of the
I.V. site.
1.4.3 TIMING BOLUS® FEATURE
Prior to the delivery of the main injection, a Timing Bolus injection — an
injection of a small volume of contrast typically followed by an injection of a
small volume of saline — can be delivered to the patient to determine the
optimal scan delay needed to capture the contrast agent in the area of interest.
1.4.4 DRIP MODE FEATURE
Prior to the delivery of the main injection, a Drip Mode injection — multiple
injections of a small volume of saline — can be delivered to the patient to keep
the fluid path open during patient set up and between injections of contrast.
1.4.5 ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED SYRINGE
All syringes are electrically isolated from any electrical contact with the injector.
1.4.6 SYRINGE CLARITY
Semitransparent syringes are used on the OptiStar Elite. If small air bubbles are
present, they can be seen by visual inspection.
1.4.7 POSITIVE POSITIONING OF THE POWERHEAD
A preset friction device in the powerhead holds the syringe in the desired posi-
tion during injection.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-4-2
1.4.8 HAND START SWITCH OPERATION

Use of the hand start switch allows the operator to start and stop injections
from within the view/control room.
1.4.9 PHYSICAL STABILITY OF REMOTE STAND
1—OVERVIEW
The weighted base of the remote stand along with large casters reduces the
possibility of tipping and increases its ability to roll over small cords. Looping
the cables over the cable hanger helps keep the cables away from the wheels.
WARNING!
To prevent operator injury, note that injector cables laying on the floor
could possibly cause a trip hazard.
WARNING!
Maintain a constant hold on the remote stand when moving over door
thresholds, injector cables or other obstacles on the floor to help pre-
vent the injector from tipping over.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-5-1
1.5 SPECIFICATIONS
1.5.1 DIMENSIONS
• Console 12.25” W X 8.5” H X 2.5” D
(311.15 mm W X 215.9 mm H X 63.5 mm D)
1—OVERVIEW
• Console Base 9.5” W X 2.5” H X 7” D
(241.3 mm W X 63.5 mm H X 177.8 mm D)
• Powerhead 7” W X 21.5” H X 5.5” D
(177.8 mm W X 546.1 mm H X 139.7 mm D)
• Remote Stand 27” Diameter (base) X 47.5” H
(685.8 mm diameter X 1206 mm H)
• Power Control 10” W X 4.25” H X 15.25” D
(254 mm W X 107.95 mm H X 387.35 mm D)
• Power Supply 10” W X 4” H X 9” D
P/N 814600 (267 mm W X 102 mm H X 228 mm D)
• Power Supply 10” W X 4.25” H X 9.5” D
P/N 814450 (254 mm W X 107.95 mm H X 241.3 mm D)
• Filter 4” W X 10.0” H X 3” D
(101.6 mm x 254.0 mm x 76.2 mm)
• Standard Ceiling 57.2” H X 65.2” L
Suspension System (1454 mm H X 1657 mm L)
• Long Ceiling 67.2” H X 65.2” L
Suspension System (1708 mm H X 1657 mm L)
• MRI Anchorage 14.50” SQ X 0.50” THK
(ceiling) Plate (368.3 mm SQ X 12.7 mm THK)
• MRI Track / 98” (8’2”) L X 15.0” W X 3.0” H
Carriage Assembly (2489 mm L X 381 mm W X 76.2 mm H)
1.5.2 WEIGHT
• Console 5.8 lb. (2.6 kg)
• Power Control 16 lb. (7.26 kg)
• Powerhead (w/arm and cable) 14.5 lb. (6.57 kg)
• Remote Stand 29 lb. (13.00 kg)
• Power Supply P/N 814600 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)
• Power Supply P/N 814450 11.5 lb. (5.21 kg)
• Filter 10 lb. (4.54 kg)
• Standard Ceiling Suspension System 61 lb. (27.7 kg)
• Long Ceiling Suspension System 65 lb. (29.5 kg)
• MRI Ceiling Plate 13 lb. (5.9 kg)
• MRI Track Assembly 52.5 lb. (23.8 kg)
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-5-2
1.5.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS

• Power Supply
Voltage 100-127 / 220-240 V~
Frequency 50/60 Hz
1—OVERVIEW
Current 4 Amp.
1.5.3.1 POWER CABLES (POWER SUPPLY)

• 115 VAC (120 VAC), Length 8 ft (2.44 m), Part Number 800918
• 220 VAC, Length 8 ft, (2.44 m) Part Number 800935
• Brazil, 250 VAC, Length 2.5 m (8.2 ft) Part Number 800180
WARNING!
If the supplied power cables cannot be used due to non compatibility with
country specific outlets, then the following power cable specifications must be
met. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to equipment or cause
personnel injury.
1.5.3.2 POWER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS

In addition to meeting all applicable electrical codes, substitute power cables
must meet the following specifications:
115 VAC (120 VAC)
• IEC 60320 C13 Connector
• 3 x 18 AWG Conductors
• Maximum length = 8 ft (2.44 m)
230 VAC
• 3 x 1.00 mm² AWG Conductors
Brazil, 250 VAC
• 3 x 1.00 mm² AWG Conductors
• Maximum length = 2.5 m (8.2 ft)
NOTE: Power cords for countries outside US, Canada, and EU may need to meet
other specific requirements.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-5-3
1.5.4 ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE

Chassis less than 500 microamps
WARNING!
1—OVERVIEW
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a sup-
ply mains with protective earth.
1.5.5 ENVIRONMENTAL
• Transport and Storage: -40° to +158° F (-40° to +70° C)
10% to 95% relative humidity
• Operation: 50° to +104° F (10° to +40°C)
30% to 75% relative humidity
• Biohazard Disposal: Dispose of biohazards in accordance with the require-
ments of your hospital, facility or local regulations.
• Disposal of the OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System at the end of its
useful life: To minimize the risk to the environment associated with the dispos-
al of this equipment, its disposal should be performed in compliance with local,
state and federal regulations. Disposal of accessories and consumables associ-
ated with this equipment should also be performed in compliance with local,
state and federal regulations.
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): The OptiStar Elite meets
EN60601-1-2 for level B conducted and radiated emissions and EMI immunity.
NOTE: If any anomalies in the injector performance are noticed, identify de-
vices within the immediate area that are capable of producing electromagnetic
interference and call a qualified service representative.
BTU Output: �� 510 BTU
WARNING!
Safety in Magnetic Resonance Environment: Refer to Figure 1-3-1.
OptiStar Elite Injector: The OptiStar Elite Injector is to be used with magnet
strengths of up to 3.0 T.
WARNING!
Collision with other equipment can cause structural failure of the suspension
arm, resulting in operator or patient injury. Visually inspect the J-Bow Arm, be
sure all fasteners are secure. Observe system for cracks or defects. Check the
suspension arm for movement. If defects are observed or adjustment is re-
quired, immediately contact your authorized service personnel.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-5-4
Remote Stand with Powerhead (NOT including Powerhead Cable Connector):

MR The Powerhead and Remote Stand are specifically designed from materials
which will not affect nor be affected by the magnetic fields of the MR scanner.
Note, however, the Powerhead Cable Connector (connects into the Power Con-
trol) is MR conditional.
1—OVERVIEW
Ceiling Suspension with Powerhead (NOT including Powerhead Cable Con-

MR
nector): The Powerhead and Ceiling Suspension are specifically designed from
materials which will not affect nor be affected by the magnetic fields of the MR
scanner. Note, however, the Powerhead Cable Connector (connects into the
Power Control) is MR conditional.
Powerhead Cable Connector: The Powerhead Cable Connector is MR Con-
MR ditional. During installation and removal, the Powerhead Cable Connector
should be carried with caution when within fields between 1,125 G and 2000G.
The Powerhead Cable Connector should not be carried into fields higher than
2000G. NOTE: During operation the Powerhead Cable Connector is securely
connected to the Power Control and is in an area less than or equal to 300G.
Power Control: The Power Control is MR Conditional. During installation and
MR removal, the Power Control should not be carried into fields higher than 2000G.
During injector operation, the Power Control must be located in an area with a
field less than or equal to 300G.
Communication Cable Connectors: The Communication Cable Connectors are
MR MR Conditional. During installation and removal, the communication cable
connectors should be carried with caution when within fields between 470G
and 3,200 G. The Communication Cable Connectors should not be carried into
fields greater than 3,200 G. NOTE: During operation the Communication Cable
Connectors are securely connected to the Power Control and Filter.
Console, Power Supply and Mounting Bracket, Hand Start Switch, and Filter:
MR The console, Power Supply and mounting bracket, hand start switch, and the
Filter are not designed to be placed in the MRI area and must be set up in a
separate viewing room.
DANGER!
Possible explosion hazard if used in the presence of flammable anesthetics.
CAUTION!
If fluid is spilled on the console or power control, remove the unit from opera-
tion and contact your authorized service personnel.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-5-5
1.5.6 COMPATIBLE SYRINGE SIZES

Refer to Section 1.6 Consumables for more information.
• 10 ml, 15 ml, 20 ml Dotarem prefills (used with supplied DOTAclip
adapter 802880/802930 or StarClip 814735) Refer to Figure 1-7-1.
1—OVERVIEW
• 30 ml
• 60 ml single-use, disposable syringe
• 50 and 125 ml
1.5.7 PROGRAMMABLE FLOW RATE (A-SIDE)
• 60 ml syringe: 0.1 - 10.0 ml/sec
• 10 ml, 15 ml, 20 ml, and 30 ml syringe: 0.1 - 8.0 ml/sec
1.5.8 PROGRAMMABLE FLOW RATE (B-SIDE)
• 50 ml and 125 ml syringe: 0.1 - 8.0 ml/sec
• 60 ml single-use, disposable syringe: 0.1 - 8.0 ml/sec
1.5.9 PROGRAMMABLE VOLUME (A-SIDE)
• 10 ml, 15 ml, and 20 ml syringe: 1 ml to 20 ml
• 30 ml and 60 ml syringe: 1 ml to installed syringe size
1.5.10 PROGRAMMABLE VOLUME (B-SIDE)
• 50 ml, 60 ml and 125 ml syringe: 1 ml to installed syringe size
1.5.11 PROGRAMMABLE PRESSURE LIMIT
A-Side B-Side PSI kPA
10,15,20 ml 50 ml 20 - 200 PSI 138 - 1380 kPA
10,15,20 ml 60 ml 20 - 150 PSI 138 - 1035 kPA
10,15,20 ml 125 ml 20 - 200 PSI 138 - 1380 kPA
30 ml 50 ml 20 - 200 PSI 138 - 1380 kPA
30 ml 60 ml 20 - 150 PSI 138 - 1035 kPA
30 ml 125 ml 20 - 200 PSI 138 - 1380 kPA
60 ml 50 ml 20 - 150 PSI 138 - 1035 kPA
60 ml 60 ml 20 - 150 PSI 138 - 1035 kPA
60 ml 125 ml 20 - 150 PSI 138 - 1035 kPA
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-5-6
1.5.12 PROGRAMMABLE SCAN DELAY

0 - 1:00 (1 minute: 0 seconds) in increments of 1 second
1.5.13 PROGRAMMABLE INJECT DELAY
0 - 5:00 (5 minutes: 0 seconds) in increments of 1 second
1—OVERVIEW
1.5.14 PROGRAMMABLE DRIP INJECTION PARAMETERS (B-SIDE)

• Flow Rate: 0.5 - 1.0 ml/sec in increments of 0.1 ml/sec
• Volume: 0.1 - 3.0 ml in increments of 0.1 ml
• Interval: 1 - 60 seconds in increments of 1 sec
1.5.15 PROTOCOL MEMORY
The OptiStar Elite can store up to 40 protocols in memory.
1.5.16 INJECT RESULTS
The OptiStar Elite stores the results of the last 48 injected protocols.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-6-1
1.6 CONSUMABLES
WARNING!
This device has been approved for use with only the consumables listed. Use
1—OVERVIEW
of other consumables could result in patient injury, operator injury, equipment
damage, and/or injector performance issues (i.e. incorrect volume delivery,
incorrect flow rate delivery, incorrect pressure, etc.).
DOTAREM (Gadoterate Meglumine) Injection

See DOTAREM Package Insert for full prescribing information.
Package Insert enclosed with drug.
WARNING
NEPHROGENIC SYSTEMIC FIBROSIS (NSF) RISK INCREASE--Gadolinium-
based contrast agents (GBCAs) increase the risk for NSF among patients
with impaired elimination of the drugs. Avoid use of GBCAs in these patients
unless the diagnostic information is essential and not available with non-
contrasted MRI or other modalities.
NSF may result in fatal or debilitating fibrosis affecting the skin, muscle and
internal organs.
• The risk for NSF appears highest among patients with:
o Chronic, severe kidney disease (GFR < 30 mL/min/1.73m2), or
o Acute kidney injury.
• Screen patients for acute kidney injury and other conditions that may
reduce renal function.
For patients at risk for chronically reduced renal function (for example,
age > 60 years, hypertension or diabetes), estimate the glomerular filtration
rate (GFR) through laboratory testing [see Warnings and Precautions in
Dotarem Package Insert].
• For patients at highest risk for NSF, do not exceed the recommended
DOTAREM dose and allow a sufficient period of time for elimination of
the drug from the body prior to any re- administration [see Warnings and
Precautions in Dotarem Package Insert].
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-6-2
1.6.1 COMPATIBLE SYRINGE

801801: 60 mL MR Syringe with Lateral Flow Needle
1.6.2 LOW PRESSURE TUBING
It is recommended that catheters, connectors and tubing used with the
1—OVERVIEW
OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System be rated to accommodate pressure

specification of the installed syringe(s). If such products are rated at a pressure
below specified (as indicated in section 1.5.11), it is the responsibility of the
user to select a pressure limit that is appropriate for the product. Setting of the
pressure limit ([PSI/KPA] key) is performed on the Main screen.
801106: Y-Tubing with Single Check Valve; 152 cm (60”),
(200 psi / 1379 kPa maximum pressure)
601195: Coiled Tubing; 152 cm (60”),
844010: Y-Tubing; 152 cm (60”),
1.6.3 MULTIPACK DISPOSABLES
801800: 60 mL MR Syringe (2) with Single Check Valve Y-Tubing and Filling
Spikes (200 psi / 1379 kPa maximum pressure)
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-6-3
1.6.4 DOTAREM (GADOTERATE MEGLUMINE) PREFILLED SYRINGES

• 10 ml Dotarem (gadoterate meglumine) Prefilled Syringe
See warning for Dotarem on page 1-6-2 and Dotarem Package Insert for full
prescribing information. Package insert enclosed with drug.
1—OVERVIEW
1.6.5 PREFILLED SALINE SYRINGE

• 50 ml Prefilled Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 0.9% Syringe (availability
dependent upon region)
• 125 ml Prefilled Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 0.9% Syringe (availability
dependent upon region)
To order, contact your local Guerbet Distributor.
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-6-4
1—OVERVIEW
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-7-1
1.7 ACCESSORIES AND COMPONENTS

A list of the accessories and components for use with the OptiStar Elite MR Con-
trast Delivery System is below.
NOTE: The use of accessories and components not complying with the equiva-
1—OVERVIEW
lent safety requirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced level of safe-
ty of the resulting system. Consideration relating to the choice shall include:
• use of the accessory and components in the patient vicinity
• evidence that the safety certification of the accessory and compo-
nent has been performed in accordance to the appropriate EN60601-
1 and/or EN60601-1-1 harmonized national standard.
ACCESSORIES
P/N 802545 OptiStar Mobile Mount Kit
P/N 802617 Kit, Power Supply Wall Mount
P/N 802620 Start Switch Assembly, 1.8 m
P/N 802622 Start Switch Assembly, 6 m
P/N 802725 Kit, CPU Stand
P/N 802850 Remote Stand Assembly
P/N 241405 Standard MRI Ceiling Suspension System
P/N 241413 Long MRI Ceiling Suspension System
P/N 241408 MRI Anchorage (ceiling) Plate
P/N 241410 MRI Track and Carriage Assembly
818507-M 2020-05-05
1-7-2
COMPONENTS
P/N 802614 Kit, Filter
P/N 802930 DOTAclip Syringe Adapter, 15/20 mL (Blue)
P/N 802880 DOTAclip Syringe Adapter, 15/20 mL (Orange)
1—OVERVIEW
P/N 802730 Syringe Adapter, 10/15/20 mL

P/N 814735 StarClip Syringe Adapter, 10/15/20 mL
802930 (Blue) DOTAclip 802880 (Orange) DOTAclip
802730 814735 (Orange) StarClip
Fig 1-7-1 DOTAclip Adapters
See Section 1-6 for the list of approved Consumables.
818507-M 2020-05-05
2-1-1
2 OVERVIEW OF SYSTEM
FEATURES
2.1 GENERAL
SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF
The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System consist of the components
listed in Figure 2-1-1:
Powerhead and
Power Control Remote Stand
A 60 ml
10/15/ 30 ml
20 ml
B 50
60 ml ml
125 ml
*Power Cable
(See Note)
Syringe StarClip
Adapter Syringe
DOTAclip (optional) Adapter
Syringe
Adapter (optional)
Power Supply
Console
EFI / RFI
Filter
Handswitch
Figure 2-1-1 System Components

NOTE: Power cables supplied with your system are determined by voltage
requirements as follows:
*For 115V (120V) models, use cable Part Number 800918
*For 230V models, use cable Part Number 800935
*Brazil, use cable Part Number 800180
818507-M 2020-05-05
2-1-2
2.2 POWERHEAD
The Powerhead is specially designed from materials which will not affect nor be
affected by the magnetic currents of the MR.
Injection Indicators
Reverse A & B Sides
Accelerator
A SIDE Button
SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF
Forward
Button
Stop
Button
Powerhead
Ram A
B SIDE
Air Check
Start
Button
DOTAclip
Syringe StarClip Syringe
Adapter Syringe Adapter
Syringe Adapter (optional)
Holder (optional)
Powerhead
Side A Syringe Ram B
Holder
Side B
Figure 2-2-1 Powerhead
818507-M 2020-05-05
2-1-3
2.3 CONSOLE
The Console contains a Touch Screen display, and buttons which provides ac-
cess to injection features. Connections are located at the back of the console
(Refer to Figure 2-3-1).
(Rear View)
SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF
Console Data
and Power
Connection J1
Remote Start
Connection J2
(Front View)
Touch
Sensitive
Display
Screen
System
ON/OFF Button
Figure 2-3-1 Console
2.4 REMOTE START

The Remote Start device which attaches to the rear of the console is included
so that the injection process may be started and stopped from outside the MRI
area.
818507-M 2020-05-05
2-1-4
2.5 POWER SYSTEM

The power system consists of one Power Supply.
CAUTION!
The Power Supply is not designed to be placed within the Magnet Room. It may
be located in the Equipment room or Control room.
SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF
ON/OFF Indicator
Power Supply Housing
P/N 814450
P/N 814600
Figure 2-5-1. Power Supply Overview
818507-M 2020-05-05
2-1-5
2.6 CEILING SUSPENSION

The Ceiling Suspension is specifically designed from materials which will not
affect nor be affected by the magnetic currents of the MR. See Figure 2-6-1
WARNING!
Collision with other equipment can cause structural failure of the suspension
SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF
arm, resulting in operator or patient injury. Visually inspect the J-Bow Arm, be
sure all fasteners are secure. Observe system for cracks or defects. Check the
suspension arm for movement. If defects are observed or adjustment is re-
quired, immediately contact your authorized service personnel.
COLUMN
SPRING
ARM
J-BOW
ARM
Figure 2-6-1. Ceiling Suspension Overview
818507-M 2020-05-05
2-1-6
SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-1-1
3 BASIC OPERATION
Operating the OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System requires knowledge

of the operator interfaces located on both the console and the powerhead. The
console contains a touch screen display in order to interact with the operator.
Through use of the
console’s touch screen display, the operator can:
3—CONSOLE
• enter protocol parameters
• save protocols
• delete protocols
• recall protocols
• review achieved parameters of delivered protocols
CAUTION!
Do not press on the touch screen with sharp or pointed items such as
fingernails, pens or pencils. Using items of this type may cause damage
to your screen, resulting in a nonworking unit. Do not allow objects,
such as pens and pencils to lay on the touch screen.
3.1 TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

Refer to Figure 3-1-1.
At the Console, push System ON/OFF key A to turn the Console ON.
NOTE: If no response from the console, refer to Operator’s Manual, Chapter 2—
Power ON/Power OFF.
On power-up, the unit displays the Initializing... Screen as shown in
Figure 3-1-2.
WARNING!
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected

to a supply mains with protective earth.
WARNING!
Unplug power cord to disconnect the power supply from supply mains.
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-1-2
A
3—CONSOLE
Figure 3-1-1 Location of the System ON/OFF key
Initializing . . .
Console: DV.04 Power Control: DV.04

c 2002, 2007
Figure 3-1-2 Initializing... Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-2-1
3.2 CONSOLE DISPLAY MODES OF OPERATION

3.2.1 MAIN SCREEN
Upon power-up, the Main screen, as shown in Figure 3-2-1, is automatically
displayed after initialization . All protocol information needed by the injector is
contained within the Main screen. To access the Main screen when displaying
the Results screen, System Info screen or Memory screen, press the [Main] key
located in the lower portion of the screen.
3.2.2 MEMORY SCREEN, SYSTEM INFO SCREEN, RESULTS SCREEN AND [ENABLE] KEY
3—CONSOLE
Located along the lower portion of the Main screen are the following
4 keys: [Memory], [System Info] [Results] and [Enable]. These keys allow access
to their respective screens.
Memory Screen — All stored protocols are located within the Memory screen.
Accessing this screen allows the operator to recall, store, rename and delete
protocols. To access the Memory screen, press the [Memory] key A located
on the lower portion of the Main screen. More information about the Memory
screen is contained within this chapter.
System Info Screen — Adjust the Display Brightness and Beeper Volume;
change the Pressure Units, Language, Date and Time; access Alarm History and
the ability to display [Patency Check], [Phase Delay], [Inject Delay] and [Scan
Delay] keys on the Main screen via the System Info screen. Also, additional ac-
cess to the Memory screen and the Results screen is located on the System Info
screen. To access the System Info screen, press the [System Info] key B located
on the lower portion of the Main screen. More information about the System
Info screen is contained within this chapter.
Results Screen — All information pertaining to the results of delivered injec-
tions is located within the Results screen. Also, additional access to the System
Info screen is located on the Results screen. To access the Results screen, press
the [Results] key C located on the lower portion of the Main screen. More
information about the Results screen is contained within this chapter.
Enable D — Pressing the [Enable] key “enables” the injector (displays the
[Start] key) for delivery of a protocol after pressing the [Yes] key to the prompt
“Have you checked for air and patency?”. More information about Delivering
Injections is contained in Chapter 5.
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-2-2
CHECK FOR AIR IN SYRINGE AND TUBING!

A: 60 60ml AB1
B: 60 60ml Duration 00:12
Phase Side Flow Volume Phase Delay
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 0.1 1 Max Vol

0 Inject Delay
2 B 0.1 1 Max Vol 00:00

Scan Delay
3 - 00:00
3—CONSOLE
4 Peak PSI
20
Timing Bolus
A B C D
Memory System Info Results Enable
Figure 3-2-1 Location of Keys on the Main Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-1
3.3 DESCRIPTION OF SCREENS

3.3.1 MAIN SCREEN
Refer to Figure 3-3-1 and Figure 3-3-2.
Operator Message Line A — This area displays important information to the
operator to ensure operator and patient safety.
A: Syringe Size B — This information indicates the size of the syringe currently
installed in the A-side of the powerhead. Note that A-side parameters are indi-
cated by the color blue.
3—CONSOLE
B: Syringe Size C — This information indicates the size of the syringe currently
installed in the B-side of the powerhead. Note that B-side parameters are indi-
cated by the color purple.
Protocol Name D — The name of the protocol currently displayed on the Main
screen is located in this area of the screen. An asterisk, “*” , located at the end of
the name indicates that the displayed parameters have been modified and no
longer match the originally stored parameters.
Phase E — Within a protocol, up to four phases can be input.
Side F — The letters in this column indicate the side from which the injec-
tor will be delivering. The side for Phase 1 is always set as [A]. Sides for Phase 2
through Phase 4 can toggle among the following symbols: [A], [B], [-]. Pressing
an [A] key will toggle the key to a [B] key, indicating injecting from the B-side.
Pressing a [B] key will toggle the key to a [-] key, indicating no injecting for and
past that phase. Pressing a [-] key will toggle the key to an [A] key, indicating
injecting from the A-side.
Flow G — The values entered in this column indicate rate of delivery of the contrast
medium and saline during each respective phase. Flow is expressed in ml/sec.
Volume H — The values entered in this column indicate the volume of con-
trast medium and saline to be delivered during each respective phase. If the
volume value highlights magenta intermittently, this indicates that the pro-
grammed volume exceeds syringe volume. Use the [Max Vol] key to automati-
cally reset the volume of the corresponding phase to the amount currently
available in the syringe or, manually lower the value until it ceases to highlight
magenta. Volume is expressed in ml.
Max Volume I — Pressing this key inputs the Maximum Volume available in
the syringe into its corresponding volume column.
Duration J — The value in this area indicates the duration of all proto-
col phases based on the entered volume and flow rate values and includes
Phase Delay. Duration does not include Timing Bolus. Duration is displayed in
minutes:seconds (00:00).
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-2
Phase Delay K — This key is displayed only if turned ON at the System Information
screen. Phase Delay is a countdown timer that delays the start of the next phase.
The next phase will start when the phase delay counter reaches
0 (zero). Phase Delay is expressed in seconds. Phase Delay can also be set to
pause the injection. Access the Pause feature by scrolling past either
the 600 (six-hundred) upper limit or by pressing the [Pause] key .
Inject Delay L — This key is displayed only if turned ON at the System Information
screen. Inject Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting down when the
Start command is activated. The injection is started when the Inject Delay coun-
ter reaches 00:00 (zero). If Inject Delay is greater than 00:00 (zero), Scan Delay is
3—CONSOLE
automatically set to 00:00 (zero). Inject Delay is expressed in minutes:seconds

(00:00). NOTE: Starting the injection from the powerhead will prevent the use of
the Inject Delay feature.
Scan Delay M — This key is displayed only if turned ON at the System Information
screen. Scan Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting down when the
Start command is activated. Ten seconds before expiration (00:10), 3 audible
beeps will be emitted by the injector; 5 seconds before expiration (00:05), 2
audible beeps; at expiration (00:00), one long tone will be emitted. If Scan Delay
is greater than 00:00 (zero), Inject Delay is automatically set to 00:00 (zero). Scan
Delay is expressed in minutes:seconds (00:00).
PSI / KPA N — The value set in this key indicates the maximum allowable pres-
sure that can occur during an injection. Pressure is expressed in either PSI or
KPA. Refer to section 3.3.3 System Information Screen for more information about
changing the unit of measure and refer to section 1.5.11 Programmable Pressure
Limit for pressure ranges.
Timing Bolus O — Pressing this key allows the operator to program a Timing
Bolus injection. A Timing Bolus injection — an injection of a small volume of con-
trast, typically followed by a small volume of saline — can be delivered to the pa-
tient to determine the optimal scan delay needed to capture the contrast agent
in the area of interest. Once the [Timing Bolus] key is pressed, the screen shown
in Figure 3-3-3 is displayed. Note the addition of “Test” R to the left of the first
and second phase. Upon completion of the Timing Bolus injection, the injector
will update to the ‘INJECTOR IS READY!’ screen in order to deliver the Main Proto-
col. NOTE: The default Timing Bolus flow rates will be equal to the protocol’s first
flow rates for the A and B sides. The default volumes will be 2 ml for the A side, 10
ml for the B side, and are user changeable. However, after completion of the Tim-
ing Bolus injection, the values are not changeable. Refer to Figure 3-3-3, R1 .
Change Parameter Values via the Slide Bar P — To change the value of a param-
eter, select the desired parameter by touching its key. The key will highlight Q
to indicate it is active and the slide bar will display at the bottom of the screen
as shown in Figure 3-3-2. Touch the slide bar at the value required, or use the left
and right double arrows to decrease or increase the value. Use the left and right
single arrows to decrease or increase the value in smaller increments.
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-3
A
B A: 60 60ml D AB1
C B: 60 60ml J Duration 00:12
E F G ml/sec H ml K sec
1 A 0.1 1 Max Vol

I 0 L Inject Delay
2 B 0.1 1 Max Vol 00:00

Scan Delay
3 - M
3—CONSOLE
00:00
4 PSI
N
20
O
Timing Bolus
Figure 3-3-1 Console Main Screen

A: 60 60ml AB1
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 0.1 1 Max Vol

0 Inject Delay
2 B
Q
0.1 1 Max Vol 00:00
Scan Delay
3 - 00:00
4 PSI
20
Timing Bolus
P
P P
.1 4.0 8.0
Figure 3-3-2 Console Main Screen with Active Slide Bar
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-4

A: 60 60ml AAB1
B:125 103ml Duration 00:15
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 8.0 13 0 Inject Delay
2 B 1.6 21 Max Vol 00:00

Scan Delay
3 - 00:00
4 Peak PSI
20
Timing Bolus
O

3—CONSOLE

A: 60 60ml AAB1
B:125 103ml Duration 00:15
ml/sec ml sec
R Test A 8.0 2 Inject Delay
Test B 1.6 10 Pause 00:00

Scan Delay
1 A 8.0 13 Max Vol
0 00:00
2 B 1.6 21 Max Vol
Peak PSI
3 - 20
4 Timing Bolus
INJECTOR IS READY!
A: 60 58ml AAB1
Start Protocol
ml/sec ml sec
R1 Test A 8.0 2 Inject Delay
Test B 1.6 10 Pause 00:00
1 A 8.0 13 Max Vol 0 Scan Delay

00:00
2 B 1.6 21 Max Vol
Peak PSI
3 - 20
4 Timing Bolus
Drip Disable
Figure 3-3-3 Console Main screen with Active Timing Bolus
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-5
3.3.2 MEMORY SCREEN
The [Memory] key A allows access to the Memory screen as shown in

Figure 3-3-4. The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System can store up to
40 (forty) protocols with a name length of up to 20 (twenty) characters. Press
the [Main] key B at any time to exit the Memory screen and display the Main
screen.

A: 60 60ml AAB1
3—CONSOLE
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 8.0 13 Max Vol 0 Inject Delay
2 A 1.6 8 Max Vol

0 00:00
1.6 8
Scan Delay
3 B Max Vol
00:00
4 - Peak PSI
20
Timing Bolus
Delete Edit Name Store
Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Phase Side ml/sec ml sec

1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1 Inject 00:00
AB1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 2.0 18 Inject 00:00
AB2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 Inject 00:00
AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 Inject 00:00
AB4 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 A 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB5 3 B 1.2 6 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 2 Inject 00:00
AB6 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 2 Inject 00:00
AB7 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 A 1.6 3 0 Inject 00:00
AB8 3 A 1.3 2 0 4 B 1.6 9 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8
0 2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
Page Value
B PSI 20
Main
1 2 3 4 5
Figure 3-3-4 Memory List Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-6
Retrieving a Protocol from Memory

1. Press the [Memory] key 1 to access the Memory screen.

2. Press on the desired protocol’s name key 2 . If the desired protocol name
A
is not displayed on Page 1, press the Page Number [2-5] 2 to display the
B
page on which the desired protocol is stored. Once the appropriate page is
displayed, press on protocol’s name key.
3. The protocol is immediately displayed on the screen 3 .
3—CONSOLE

3
A: 60 60ml AAB1
Phase Side Flow Volume Phase Delay A: 60 60ml A1
ml/sec ml sec
B: 60 60ml
1 A 8.0 13 0 Inject Delay
Phase Side Flow
Duration 00:03
Volume Phase Delay
2 A 1.6 8 Max Vol 00:00 ml/sec ml sec
3 B 1.6 8 Max Vol

Scan Delay 1 A 1.6 5 0 Inject Delay
00:00 2 00:00
4 - Peak PSI Scan Delay
3
20 00:00
4 Peak PSI
Timing Bolus
20
Timing Bolus
1 Memory System Info Results Enable

1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1 0 Inject 00:00
AB1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB4 3 4 Scan 00:00
2A AAB1
1 A
B
1.6
1.2
5
6
0
0
2
4
A 2.0 18 0
PSI
Inject
Scan
20
00:00
00:00
3
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 Inject 00:00
A1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 Inject 00:00
A2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 A 1.6 3 0 Inject 00:00
AAAB1 3 A 1.3 2 0 4 B 1.6 9 0 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8
1.6
13
8
0 2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
Page Value PSI 20
Main
1 2 3 4 5
2B
Figure 3-3-5 Retrieving a Protocol from Memory
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-7
Deleting a Protocol from Memory


2. If needed, press the appropriate Page Number [2-5] 2 to locate the desired
protocol.
3. Press the [Delete] key 3A then the Protocol’s name key 3 B .
4. Press the [Yes] key 4 located under “The selected Protocol will be deleted!
Do you want to continue?” prompt.
3—CONSOLE
5. The protocol is deleted 5 .
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-8

A: 60 60ml AAB1
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 8.0 13 Max Vol

0 Inject Delay
2 A 1.6 8 Max Vol 00:00

Scan Delay
3 B 1.6 8 Max Vol
00:00
4 - Peak PSI
20
Timing Bolus
A 5
A 6
3—CONSOLE
3A 1
Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Phase Side ml/sec ml
A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1
sec
0 Inject 00:00
AB1 3 4 Scan 00:00
Select the protocol to delete. PSI 20
1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB4 3 4 Scan 00:00
3B PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 A 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AAB1 3 B 1.2 6 0 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 Inject 00:00
A1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 Inject 00:00
A2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 A 1.6 3 0 Inject 00:00
AAAB1 3 A 1.3 2 0 4 B 1.6 9 0 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8
0 2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
Page Value PSI 20
Main
1 2 3 4 5
2
5
Delete Edit Name Store Cancel Delete Edit Name Store
Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Cancel
1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1 0 Inject 00:00 1 A 2.1 4 0 2
AB1 3 4 Scan 00:00 AB1 3 4
PSI 20
B 0.1 1 0 Inject 00:00
1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00 1 A 2.1 4 0 2 Scan 00:00
AB2 3 4 Scan 00:00 AB2 3 4 PSI 20
PSI 20
B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00 1 A 1.6 14 0 2 Scan 00:00
AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00 AB3 3 4 PSI 20
The selected protocol will be PSI 20
B 2.0 18 0 00:00
2 18 0 00:00 2 Inject
1 A deleted!
1.6 14 0 B 2.0 Inject 1 A 1.6 14 0 Scan 00:00
AB4 3 4 Scan 00:00 AB4 3 4 20
20 PSI
PSI
B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 A 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00 1 A 1.6 5 0 2
3Do you
B want 6to continue? Scan 00:00
AAB1 1.2 0 4 Scan 00:00 AAB1 3 B 1.2 6 0 4 20
20 PSI
PSI
A 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
4
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 Inject 00:00 1 A 1.6 5 0 2 Scan 00:00
A1 3 Yes 4 No Scan 00:00 A1 3 4 PSI 20
PSI 20
Inject 00:00
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 Inject 00:00 1 A 2.6 10 0 2 Scan 00:00
A2 3 4 Scan 00:00 A2 3 4 PSI 20
PSI 20
Inject 00:00
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 A 1.6 3 0 Inject 00:00 1 2 Scan 00:00
AAAB1 3 A 1.3 0 4 B 1.6 9 0 Scan 00:00 3 4 PSI 20
PSI 20
Inject
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8
0 2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8
0 2
4
Scan
Value Value PSI
Page PSI 20 Page
A 1.6 8 0 Inject 00:00
Scan 00:00
Main
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 PSI 20
Main
Figure 3-3-6 Deleting a Protocol from Memory
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-9
Storing a Protocol in Memory

1. Enter desired parameters on the Main screen. Press the [Memory] key 1 to
access the Memory screen.
2. Note the parameters entered in Step 1 are shown at the bottom of the
Memory screen next to the words ‘Current Value’. Press the desired Page
Number [2-5] onto which to store the protocol 2 .
3. Press the [Store] key 3 .
3—CONSOLE
4. Locate an empty key 4A . Note: If a non-empty key 4 B is selected, the key’s
stored protocol parameters will be overwritten with the parameters entered
in step 1.
5. Press the desired key onto which to store the protocol. The keyboard is dis-
played 5 to allow naming of the protocol.
6. After entering the desired protocol name, press the [Enter] key 6 on the
keyboard. Note that the injector will display the protocol in the next avail-
able empty slot.
7. The protocol parameters and name are stored 7 .
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-10
CHECK FOR AIR IN SYRINGE AND TUBING! 3

A: 60 60ml AAB1

Phase Side Flow Volume Phase Delay 1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1 0 Inject 00:00
ml/sec ml sec AB1 3 4 Scan 0
PSI 200:00
1 A 8.0 13 Max Vol
0 Inject Delay
AB2
1
3
A 2.1 4
Select memory location.
0 2
4
B 2.0 18 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
1.6 8
PSI
2 A Max Vol 00:00 1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject
20
00:00
AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00
Scan Delay
B 1.6 8
PSI 20
3 Max Vol
1 2 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
00:00 AB4 3
A 1.6 14 0
4
B
Scan 00:00
4 - PSI 20
4B
Peak PSI 1 A 1.6 5 0 2 A 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AAB1 3 B 1.2 6 0 4 Scan 00:00
20 2
PSI
Inject
20
1 A 1.6 5 0 00:00
A1 3 4 Scan 00:00
Timing Bolus PSI 20
4A
1 2 Inject 00:00
3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
.1 4.0 8.0 1 2 Inject 00:00
3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8
0
0
2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
Page Value PSI 20
3—CONSOLE
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 Main
Delete Edit Name Store Cancel

1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1 0 Inject 00:00
AB1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB2 3 4 Scan
PSI
00:00
20 5
1 A 1.6 14 AAAB1
0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
2
AB4
1
3
0 A 1 1.6 214 30 44
B 5 2.0
6 18 0
7 8Inject
Scan 900:00
00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 A 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AAB1 3 Q B W 1.2 E6 0R 4T Y U I O Scan P00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 Inject 00:00
A1 3 A S D F 4G H J K LScan - 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 Inject 00:00
3 Z X C V 4 B N M . Scan\ 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 A 1.6 3 0 Inject 00:00
3Caps AOn 1.3 Cancel
0 4 Space
B 1.6 9<- 0 Enter
Scan 00:00
PSI 20
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8.0
0 2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00 6
Page Value PSI 20
Main
1 2 3 4 5

1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1 0 Inject 00:00
AB1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB4 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 A 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AAB1 3 B 1.2 6 0 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 Inject 00:00
A1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
7 1 A 8.0 13 0 2 A 1.6 8.0 0 Inject 00:00

AAAB1 3 B 1.6 8.0 0 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 2 Inject 00:00
3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8
0
0
2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
Page Value PSI 20
Main
1 2 3 4 5
Figure 3-3-7 Storing a Protocol in Memory
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-11
Editing a Protocol Name


2. If needed, press the appropriate Page Number [2-5] 2 to locate the desired
protocol name to edit.
3. Press the [Edit Name] key 3A , then the [Protocol’s name] key 3 B . The key-
board with the protocol’s name appears 4 .
4. Using the keyboard, enter the new name. The [< -] key 5 can be used to
3—CONSOLE
clear the displayed name.
5. Press the [Enter] key 6 .
6. The Memory screen, along with the renamed protocol, is displayed 7 .
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-12

A: 60 60ml AAB1
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 8.0 13 Max Vol

0 Inject Delay
2 A 1.6 8 Max Vol 00:00

Scan Delay
3 B 1.6 8 Max Vol
00:00
4 - Peak PSI
20
Timing Bolus
.1 4.0 8.0
1
3—CONSOLE
3A Delete Edit Name Store

1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1 0 Inject 00:00
AB1 3 4 Scan 00:00
Select the protocol to rename. PSI 20
1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB4 3 4 Scan 00:00
3B AAB1
1 A
B
1.6
1.2
5
6
0
0
2
4
A 2.0 18 0
PSI
Inject
Scan
20
00:00
00:00
3
PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 Inject 00:00
A1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 Inject 00:00
A2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 A 1.6 3 0 Inject 00:00
AAAB1 3 A 1.3 0 4 B 1.6 9 0 Scan 00:00
PSI 20
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8
0 2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
Page Value PSI 20
Main
1 2 3 4 5
2
4 7
Delete Edit Name Store Cancel Delete Edit Name Store Cancel
Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Phase Side ml/sec ml sec
1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1 0 Inject 00:00 1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 0.1 1 0 Inject 00:00
AB1 3 4 Scan 00:00 AB1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20 PSI 20
1 A 2.1 4 Select
0 protocol
2 B to rename.
2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00 1 A 2.1 4 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB2 3 4 Scan 00:00 AB2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20 PSI 20
1 A 1.6 14 CCCD1
0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00 1 A 1.6 14 0 2 B 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00 AB3 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20 PSI 20
2 2
AB4
10
3
A 1 1.6 214 30 44
B 5 2.0
6 18 70 Inject
8Scan 900:00
00:00 AB4
1
3
A 1.6 14 0
4
B 2.0 18 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
PSI 20 PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 A 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00 1 A 1.6 5 0 2 A 2.0 18 0 Inject 00:00
AAB1 3Q B W 1.2 E6 0R 4T Y U I OScan P00:00 AAB1 3 B 1.2 6 0 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20 PSI 20
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 Inject 00:00 1 A 1.6 5 0 2 Inject 00:00
A1 3A S D F 4G H J K LScan - 00:00 A1 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20 PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 Inject 00:00 1 A 2.6 10 0 2 Inject 00:00
A2 3 Z X C V 4 B N M . Scan
\ 00:00 A2 3 4 Scan 00:00
PSI 20 PSI 20
1 A 2.6 10 0 2 A 1.6 3 0 Inject 00:00 1 A 2.6 10 0 2 A 1.6 3 0 Inject 00:00
AAAB1 3 CapsAOn 1.3 Cancel0 4 Space 9<- Enter CCCD1
6
B 1.6 Scan 00:00 3 A 1.3 0 4 B 1.6 9 0 Scan 00:00
5
PSI 20 PSI 20
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8.0
0 2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
Memory Current 1
3
A
B
8.0
1.6
13
8.0
0 2
4
A 1.6 8 0 Inject
Scan
00:00
00:00
Page Value PSI 20 Page Value PSI 20
Main 5 Main
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
Figure 3-3-8 Editing a Protocol Name
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-13
3.3.3 SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN

The System Information screen is accessed by pressing the [System Info] key A
located on the Main screen.
Selectable Features
Display Brightness B — Select Low or High
Pressure Units C — Select PSI or KPA
3—CONSOLE
Beeper Volume D — Selectable among Off, Low, Medium or High
Language E — Selectable languages include: English, German, Spanish,

French, Italian, Portuguese.
Date and Time F — Press the [Change Date] key F1 and/or the [Change Time]
key F2 to access the change arrows F3 (Refer to Figure 3-3-10). Modify the date
and time as desired. Press [Set Date] key F4 and/or the [Set Time] key F5 to set.
Patency Check G — Prior to the delivery of the main injection, a Patency

Check—an injection of a small volume of saline—can be performed to de-
termine the integrity of the I.V. site. Toggle its key to ON to allow delivery of a
Patency Check injection.
Phase Delay H — Phase Delay is a countdown timer that delays the start of
the next phase. Toggle its key to ON to display the [Phase Delay] key on the
Main screen.
Inject Delay I — Inject Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting

when the Start command is activated. The injection is started when the inject
delay counter reaches 0 (zero). Toggle its key to ON to display the [Inject Delay]
key on the Main screen. NOTE: Starting the injection from the powerhead will
prevent the use of the Inject Delay feature
Scan Delay J — Scan Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting when
the Start command is activated and stops when the counter reaches 0 (zero).
The scan start signal will initiate once the timer reaches 0 (zero). Toggle its key
to ON to display the [Scan Delay] key on the Main screen.
Information Displayed
Software Versions K — of the Console and Powerhead.
Service Mode L — Accessible to Service Personnel. Refer to Service Manual.
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-14
Alarm History M — A listing of the last 80 Alarms in descending order.

(NOTE: Factory set alarms created during testing may still be present in the
unit’s alarm history.) Use the [< >] keys M1 to display the 8 pages (Refer to Fig-
ure 3-3-11).

A: 60 60ml A1
3—CONSOLE
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 0.1 1 Max Vol

0 Inject Delay
2 - 00:00
Scan Delay
00:00
Peak PSI
20
Timing Bolus
.1 4.0 8.0
System Information
B Display Brightness Low High
C Pressure Units PSI
D Beeper Volume Off Low Med High
K Software Versions Console: V1.03 Power Control: V1.02
E Language English German Spanish French
Italian Portuguese
G Patency Check On
F1 F2 L
Change Date Change Time H Phase Delay On
Service Mode
I Inject Delay On
NOV 04 2004 10:07 M
Alarm History J Scan Delay On
Memory Main Results
Figure 3-3-9 Accessing the System Information Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-15
System Information
Display Brightness Low High Pressure Units PSI
Beeper Volume Off Low Med High
Software Versions Console: V1.03 Power Control: V1.02
3—CONSOLE
Language English German Spanish French
Italian Portuguese
Patency Check On
F4 F5
Set Date Set Time Phase Delay On
Service Mode
F3 Inject Delay On
NOV 04 2004 10:07
Alarm History Scan Delay On
Memory Main Result
Figure 3-3-10 Setting the Date and Time
Alarm History
31 OCT 14:29 Alarm 01-B004

11 OCT 09:40 Alarm 06-B001
10 OCT 13:52 Alarm 50-0001
08 OCT 15:45 Alarm 15-B002
08 OCT 15:34 Alarm 15-B001
08 OCT 15:30 Alarm 17-A002
08 OCT 15:25 Alarm 15-B001
08 OCT 15:23 Alarm 30-0001
08 OCT 15:21 Alarm 15-A004
08 OCT 14:20 Alarm 15-B001
M1 Page 1
< >
System Info
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-16
Figure 3-3-11 Alarm History Screen

3.3.4 INJECTION RESULTS SCREEN
The Injection Results screen is accessed by pressing the [Results] key A locat-
ed on the Main screen.
The Injection Results screen lists the results of the last 48 injections.
Each page B lists 8 injections C completed by date and time in descending
order D . Press the Page Previous [<] E 1 or Page Next [>] E 2 to list the injec-
3—CONSOLE
tions contained on the previous or next page respectively. The results include
the following information for each phase F :
Side G — side in use during the delivery of the phase
Flow Rate H — the achieved flow rate
Volume I — the achieved volume
Sec J — phase delay, in seconds, before the delivery of the next phase
PSI / KPA K — the achieved pressure. Note: An asterisk (*) located on the right
of the pressure results indicates that the injection was pressure limited. The af-
fected pressure value is also indicated by a yellow color.
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-17

A: 60 60ml A1
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 0.1 1 Max Vol

0 Inject Delay
2 - 00:00
Scan Delay
00:00
Peak PSI
20
Timing Bolus
.1 4.0 8.0
3—CONSOLE
B Page 1
Injection Results
C D F G H I J K
No. Date - Time Phase Side ml/sec ml sec Phase Side ml/sec ml sec PSI
1 A 2.6 10 2 Press A 7
1 02 NOV 06 10:17 3 4 Press B 20*
1 A 3.5 5 0 2 B 1.4 8 Press A 0

2 02 NOV 06 10:27 3 4 Press B 1
1 A 3.5 5 0 2 A 3.3 4 0 Press A 0

3 02 NOV 06 10:35 3 B 1.4 8 4 Press B 2
1 A 1.6 5 0 2 A 3.4 4 0 Press A 0

4 02 NOV 06 10:42 3 B 1.4 8 4 Press B 3
1 A 3.9 12 0 2 B 2.5 8 Press A 0

5 02 NOV 06 10:50 3 4 Press B 4
1 A 1.6 4 0 2 B 2.4 8 Press A 0

6 02 NOV 06 11:03 3 4 Press B 0
1 A 2.1 7 2 Press A 0
7 02 NOV 06 11:17 3 4 Press B 0
1 A 1.9 7 2 Press A 0
8 02 NOV 06 11:28 3 4 Press B 0
E1 E2
< >
System Info Main
Figure 3-3-12 Injection Results Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-18
3.3.5 ENABLED SCREEN

The Enabled screen is displayed after pressing the [Air Check] key
located on the powerhead or by pressing the [Enable] key on the console, then
pressing the [Yes] key* for the prompt “Have you checked for air and patency?”
WARNING!
3—CONSOLE
*The [Air Check] key { } on the powerhead and the [Yes] key on the con-
sole are not to be used in lieu of a visual check by the health care professional
administering the contrast media. It is meant as a reminder to the operator
to perform a visual check of the syringe(s) and connection tubing prior to the
delivery of an injection.
While the Enabled screen is displayed, [Side], [Flow] and [Volume] values can be
changed by the operator. The [Timing Bolus] key is active to allow the operator
to program a Timing Bolus injection.
PATENCY ON ... 10ml VOLUME

A: 60 60ml
Start Protocol
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 0.1 1 Max Vol 0 Inject Delay
2 B 0.1 1 Max Vol 00:00

Scan Delay
3 - 00:00
4 PSI
20
Timing Bolus
Drip Disable
Figure 3-3-13 Enabled Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-19
3.3.6 DRIP MODE SCREEN

The [Drip] key A , available to the operator only after the injector has been en-
abled, allows access to the Drip Mode. This mode allows the injector to deliver a
“drip” injection to keep the fluid path open during patient set up and between
injections of contrast.
3—CONSOLE
PATENCY ON ... 10ml VOLUME
A: 60 59ml
Start Protocol
ml/sec ml sec
1 A 3.0 12 Max Vol

0 Inject Delay
2 B 3.0 8 Max Vol 00:00

Scan Delay
3 - 00:00
4 PSI
20
Timing Bolus
Drip Disable
Drip Mode B Drip Volume Drip Time

40 ml 0:20:50
Hr:Min:Sec
49 Cancel
Start Drip
Flow Volume Interval

ml/sec ml sec
0.5 1.0 30
Figure 3-3-14 Drip Mode Screen.
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-20
Description of Parameter Keys/Information

Flow A — This value indicates the rate of delivery of the saline solution (B-side
syringe). Flow rate is expressed in ml/s and can be set from 0.5 to 1.0 ml/s.
Volume B — This value indicates the amount of saline delivered during each
3—CONSOLE
drip injection. Volume is expressed in ml and can be set from 0.1 to 3.0 ml.
Interval C — This value indicates the amount of time the injector pauses be-
tween each delivery of drip injections. Interval is expressed in seconds and can
be set from 1 to 60 sec.
[Start Drip] key D — Pressing this key will begin the drip injection and display
the Drip Infusion screen. Refer to Figure 3-3-11.
[Cancel] key E — Pressing this key will exit the Drip Mode screen and return to
the Main screen.
Change Parameter Values via the Slide Bar F — To change the value of a pa-
rameter, select the desired parameter by touching its key. The key will highlight
to indicate it is active and the slide bar will display at the bottom of the screen.
Touch the slide bar at the value required, or use the left and right single arrows
to decrease or increase the value.
Drip Time G — This value is calculated automatically by the injector by using

the Flow, Volume, Interval and Drip Volume values. Drip Time is a countdown
timer with an audible tone sounding at its expiration. Drip Time is expressed in
hours:minutes:seconds (Hr:Min:Sec).
Drip Volume H — This value is calculated automatically by rounding the differ-

ence between Remaining Volume and B-side programmed volume. A graphic
representation of the volume remaining in the syringe is displayed I .
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-21
H G
Drip Mode B I Drip Volume Drip Time
40 ml 0:20:50
Hr:Min:Sec
49 Cancel E
Start Drip D
3—CONSOLE
A ml/sec ml
B sec
C
0.5 1.0 30
F F F
.5 0.7 1.0
Figure 3-3-15 Description of Parameter Keys

and Information on the Drip Mode Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-22
3.3.7 ACCESSING THE DRIP INFUSION PROGRESS SCREEN

Pressing the [Start Drip] key A on the Drip Mode screen begins the drip in-
jection and displays the Drip Infusion screen. The Powerhead ram of syringe
B delivers a drip injection using the operator programmed flow rate and vol-
ume. Once the volume is delivered, the ram will pause until the operator pro-
grammed interval has expired, and then deliver another drip injection. This
cycle will continue until the Drip Volume is delivered.
3—CONSOLE
Drip Mode B Drip Volume Drip Time

40 ml 0:20:50
Hr:Min:Sec
49 Cancel
Start Drip
A
ml/sec ml sec
0.5 1.0 30
.5 0.7 1.0
Drip Infusion B Drip Volume Drip Time

38 ml 0:19:07
Hr:Min:Sec
Drip End 47 Stop and

return to:
Drip
Main
0.5 ml/sec 1.0 ml 30 sec
Figure 3-3-16 Drip Infusion Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-23
Description of Keys/Information
[Drip] key B — Pressing this key will stop the drip infusion, exit the Drip Infu-
sion screen and return to the Drip Mode screen.
[Main] key C — Pressing this key will stop the drip infusion, exit the Drip
Infusion screen and display the Enabled Main screen. NOTE: Also, pressing the
[Stop] key on the powerhead will exit the Drip Infusion screen and display
the Main screen. Pressing once on the hand start switch will exit the Drip Infu-
3—CONSOLE
sion screen and display the Drip Mode screen.
Programmed Flow, programmed Volume and programmed Interval D —

These operator programmed values are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Calculated Drip Volume and Drip Time E — These injector calculated values
are displayed in the upper right-hand corner.
Graphic representation of the volume remaining in the syringe and the end
of the drip injection F — This indicates the volume remaining in the syringe.
Also, the saline drop (located under the syringe symbol) flashes to indicate de-
livery of the drip injection.
E
Drip Infusion
B Drip Volume
54 ml
Drip Time
0:19:31
Hr:Min:Sec
Drip End Stop and

F 35 return to:
B
Drip
Main
C
D Flow Volume Interval
Figure 3-3-17 Description of Keys and Information on the Drip Infusion Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
3-3-24
3.3.8 DRIP INFUSION COMPLETED SCREEN

The Drip Infusion Completed Screen is displayed upon delivery of the Drip Vol-
ume. The [Main] key is available to immediately display the Main screen.
E
Drip Infusion
B Drip Volume Drip Time
3—CONSOLE
0 ml 0:00:00
Hr:Min:Sec
Drip End
9 Stop and
return to:
Main A
COMPLETED
D Flow Volume Interval
Figure 3-3-18 Drip Infusion Completed Screen
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-1-1
4 MAINTENANCE
AND CHECKOUT
PROCEDURES
This chapter contains maintenance procedures for the OptiStar Elite MR Con-
trast Delivery System. Guidelines for periodic inspections, testing, cleaning and
lubrication are included. Information about assembly and disassembly of the
4—MAINTENANCE
unit is contained in chapter 6.
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
A maintenance checklist is included in the Appendix B of this manual. Fill in
the necessary information on a copy of the checklist and return to your service
center.
WARNING!
The Operational Checkout Procedures for Preventive Maintenance
must be performed outside the magnet room. Refer to the Operational
Checkout Procedures A-36 Preventive Maintenance.
WARNING!
Preventive Maintenance on any unit must be performed by a Qualified
Technician who is completely familiar with the use and operation of the
Injector, trained by a LF instructor in the area of preventive maintenance
for the Injector and familiar with the content of the Operator’s manual
and the Installation and Service manual.
WARNING!
No modification of this equipment is allowed..
WARNING!
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-1-2
4.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Preventive Maintenance should be performed at least once a year.
4.1.1 DAILY INSPECTION (REFER TO 4.7.1)
OptiStar Elite units need to be inspected daily as follows:
• Inspect the Powerhead, be sure both rams are functioning properly.
• Ensure all cable connections are secure.
• Inspect the ceiling suspension system for any worn or damaged parts. If worn
or damaged parts are found discontinue use immediately.
4—MAINTENANCE
Refer to Section 8 “Inspection and Maintenance” of the accompanying Ceiling

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
Suspension Installation Manual, P/N 814844, for the recommended inspection

intervals, preventative maintenance schedule, and cleaning procedures.
4.1.2 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

Procedures in this chapter check the performance of the major functions of the
OptiStar Elite.
Checkout procedures are recommended at these times:
• As part of a routine preventive maintenance program
• If a problem or mis-calibration is suspected
• After repairs
Be certain to read through the steps carefully before performing them. Some
steps in the operational procedures require more than one observation or re-
quire a sequence to be timed.
If these procedures cannot be completed or if the OptiStar Elite doesn’t per-
form as described, stop the checkout and discontinue use of the injector. Call
for service.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-1
4.2 POWERHEAD CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

4.2.1 POWERHEAD CHECKOUT ITEMS REQUIRED
• LF 20 ml, 30 ml, 60 ml and 125 ml syringes
• The OptiStar pressure gauge fixture is in the OptiStar Elite optional
service kit (refer to chapter 5)
• water and container
• syringe adapter
• OptiStar Elite Preventive Maintenance Checklist
4.2.2 POWERHEAD OVERVIEW
4—MAINTENANCE
Figure 4-2-1 below illustrates the powerhead functional components
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
Injection Indicators
Reverse A & B Sides
Accelerator
A SIDE Button
Forward
Button
Stop
Button
Powerhead
Ram A
B SIDE
Air Check
Start
Button
DOTAclip
Syringe StarClip Syringe
Adapter Syringe Adapter
Syringe Adapter (optional)
Holder Powerhead (optional)
Side A Syringe Ram B
Holder
Side B
Figure 4-2-1 Powerhead
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-2
4.2.3 POWERHEAD OPERATIONS

1. Remove syringes from the powerhead. Power up system.
2. On the A side, press and hold the powerhead Accelerator Button, then press and hold
either the Forward Button, or Reverse Button. Ensure ram moves freely in both forward
and reverse directions. Also, verify that the ram LED’s flash during this procedure.
3. Repeat step 2 for the B side.
4. Exercise A side ram movement by pressing the Forward Button, or Reverse Button.
Ensure ram moves freely in both forward and reverse directions.
5. Repeat step 4 for the B side.
4—MAINTENANCE
6. Install 60 ml syringe on A side. Program an A and B injection.

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
7. Press the Air Check button to enable the injection, then press the Start button on the
Powerhead. The injections you programmed should have activated verifying the pow-
erhead Start button and Air Check button are functioning properly.
4.2.4 POWERHEAD STOP BUTTON CHECK
1. Power up the system
2. Load 60 ml syringe on A side, program an injection for either A or A & B rams.
3. On the Powerhead, press the Air Check button, then press the Start button. During ram
movement observe the Powerhead injection indicators. The injection indicator light for
the ram in motion should be flashing.
4. With ram movement taking place, press the Powerhead Stop Button. Ram movement
should stop and the Console will indicate “Injection Interrupted”.
4.2.5 SYRINGE DETECTION CHECK
1. Power up system as previously described.
2. Place 60 ml syringes in the A & B sides of the injector head.
3. Verify console screen and powerhead indicates “60 ml syringe”.
4. Remove syringes. Then place 30 ml syringes in the A & B sides of the injector head.
NOTE: The 30 ml syringe being used on the B-side in place of the 50 ml syringe injec-
tion will indicate 50 ml.
5. Verify console and powerhead indicates “30 ml syringe” for the A side, and “50 ml syringe”
for the B side.
6. Remove syringes. Then place 10/15/20 syringe adapter in the A side. Verify Powerhead
indicates “10/15/20” and Console indicates “20”.
7. Place 125 ml syringe in the B side. Verify console and powerhead indicate “125 ml syringe”.
8. Remove all syringes and adapters on A side. Verify console indicated no syringe by the
syringe symbol blinking and displaying “-ml”.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-3
4.2.6 LIMIT SWITCH CHECK

The purpose of this check is to verify limit switch board (positioned in the
Powerhead) settings.
1. Power up the system as previously described.
2. Using the Powerhead controls, fully retract both Powerhead rams.
3. Place a 60 ml syringe in the A side.
4. On the Powerhead, press and hold the A side Forward Button until ram motion
stops. Observe the 0 mark on the syringe, the front wiper should be engaging the 0
mark. Also, on the Console screen, observe the Volume Remain field, it should be 0.
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
0 ml
CHECKOUT
Front Wiper
Figure 4-2-2
Press and hold the A side Reverse Button until ram retraction motion stops.
Verify on the Console screen, the Volume Remain field, is 63 ml (± 1 ml).
Repeat step 3 and 4 procedures for the B side Ram. If adjustments are required,
refer to Chapter 8.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-4
4.2.7 RAM FACE CHECK

Perform the following tests to confirm that the ram faces are not putting a pre-
load on the load cells before attempting to calibrate pressures.
1. Manual check of A & B side:
Verify that both the A and B ram faces are not in a bind. With your hand only,
they should be able to spin and pull-off. Also, note that the load cell holders
shall remain secure while moving the ram faces.
2. Pressure Check of A side:
Install 60 ml syringe and calibration fixture as illustrated in figure 4-2-6
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
Pull the A side ram face outward approximately 1/8”.

CHECKOUT
With a full 60 ml syringe, run a 10 ml @ 4 ml/sec. @ 100 psi injection so that the
plunger stops with an adequate volume remaining to run the same injection
without retracting the ram.
Without retracting the ram, empty the syringe by manually pushing the plung-
er to the expelled end, then repeat the same 10 ml injection so the ram face
does not engage the pushrod at all.
Check the results screen and verify that the last injection did not achieve any
pressure (+20 PSI).
3. Pressure Check of B side:
Move calibration fixture on A side and Install 60 ml syringe on B side.
Pull the B side ram face outward approximately 1/8”.
With a full 60 ml syringe, run the following injections so that the B side plunger
stops with a adequate volume remaining to run the same injection without
retracting the ram:
A: 1 ml/s Flow rate, 1 ml Volume
B: 4 ml/s Flow rate, 10 ml Volume
Without retracting the ram, empty the syringe by manually pushing the plung-
er to the expelled end, then repeat the same 10 ml injection so the ram face
does not engage the pushrod.
pressure (+20) for the B ram.
NOTE: If test steps 1, 2 or 3 fail, the ram face must be repaired and all tests
repeated.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-5
4.2.8 FLOW RATE/VOLUME CHECK PROCEDURE

1. Retract each ram fully.
2. Install 2 empty 60 ml syringes with the front wiper of the piston before the 40 ml tick
indicating a volume greater than 40 ml.
NOTE: Install syringes so that tick marks can easily be seen while installed in nest.
3. Use the forward jog key to move the ram forward and push the pushrod until the
front wiper is in the middle of the 40 ml tick mark for each syringe.
Front Wiper
4—MAINTENANCE
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
cc
PROCEDURES
MONOJECT
CHECKOUT
Figure 4-2-3 Front Wiper at 40 ml Tick Mark
NOTE: If the font wiper moves past the 40 ml tick mark then retract the ram,
pull back the plunger and repeat step 3.
4. Program a two phase A and B injection with a flow rates of 1 ml/s and volumes of
35 ml.
NOTE: Make sure no phase, injection or scan delay is programmed.
5. Enable the system and run the injection.
6. While running injection, use the screen Total Time timer as your stop watch. When
the text box in the lower right portion of the screen changes from "Injection Proto-
col" to "Injection Complete" note and record the time displayed. The time should
be between the range of 1:06 and 1:14.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-6
NOTE: No audible beep will be sounded when the full injection is completed.
Injected Volume Total Time

35 4 ml A 1:10
35 4 ml B Side PSI
0 50 100 150 200 A 1
Pressure B 1
PSI
Injection
Achieved Side Flow Volume Delay Complete
ml/sec ml sec
Results PH1 A 1.0 35 0
4—MAINTENANCE
PH2 B 1.0 35 0
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
Main
Figure 4-2-4 Total Time and Injection Complete

7. Now look at the font wipers of the pistons.
The front of the wiper should be close to the 5 ml tick mark on each syringe.
Front Wiper
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
cc
MONOJECT
Figure 4-2-5 Font Wiper at 5 ml Tick Mark

If the front of the wiper is between the 4 ml and 6 ml tick mark, the volume is
within specification.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-7
4.2.9 INJECTION PRESSURE CHECKS

NOTE: The injector must be removed from the magnet room before performing
Pressure Verification checks.
The Pressure checks defined in this section will measure the flow rate to pres-
sure relationship. To measure this relationship, the pressure gauge fixture in
Figure 4-2-6 is placed in either Powerhead side, A or B. The side opposite the
pressure gauge fixture will then contain the syringe to apply pressure.
To check injection pressure, the following tools are required:
60 ml syringe
4—MAINTENANCE
20 ml syringe
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
30 ml syringe
125 ml syringe
Syringe adapter
Tool kit pressure gauge fixture
Water and container
NOTE: When performing pressure checks, a gauge reading variation of ± 20
PSI is acceptable. If your reading is outside this parameter, repeat the check to
confirm your gauge is not the problem. If calibration is required, refer to chap-
ter 8 in this Manual.
For pressure checks in this section, the data listed in table 1 will be used:
NOTE: This table is for reference only. To perform pressure checks, use the direc-
tions on
the following pages.
RAM PROGRAM FLOW PRESSURE
INJECTION SYRINGE
SIDE VALUE RATE VALUE
1 60 A 60mL 4mL/sec 150 PSI
4 60 B 60mL 4mL/sec 150 PSI
5 30 B 30mL 4mL/sec 200 PSI
6 125 B 60mL 4mL/sec 100 PSI
Table 1
NOTE: When performing the pressure checks, it is the peak PSI reading on the
gauge that is to be verified and recorded, not the average reading.
NOTE: When performing B side checks, program A ram for 1 ml/sec, 1 ml.
NOTE: The B side pressure value is = to the A-side value.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-8
NOTE: The 30 ml syringe being used on the B-side in place of the 50 ml syringe
injection will indicate 50 ml.
To perform pressure check proceed as follows:
1. Remove injector from magnetic room.
2. Fully retract both A and B rams.
3. Manually fill a 60 ml syringe.
NOTE: It may be necessary to perform the fill process several times to purge air
and completely fill the syringe and tubing.
4. Install filled 60 ml syringe in side A
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
5. Connect clear pressure tube to the back of the pressure gauge fixture. Install the
CHECKOUT
pressure gauge check fixture in side B as illustrated in Figure 4-2-6.
Pressure
100
200
Pressure 50
Tube
Gauge 300
Fixture
LE Base
Assembly
(Black)
60 mL
60
55 mL Syringe
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
Powerhead Powerhead
5
'B' Side 'A' Side
Drain and
Fill Tubes
ml
125 ml
60
B 50 ml ml
5/20 l
10/1 30 ml
60 m
A
Water
Container
Figure 4-2-6. Pressure gauge fixture

NOTE: If the fixture's black LE base assembly is not fully inserted into B side so
that B side indicates a 50 ml syringe, 200 PSI cannot be selected at the Console
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-9
INJECTION #1 SIDE A 60 ML SYRINGE (4 ML/SEC, 60 ML, 150 PSI) ± 20 PSI

1. At the Console, program side A for injection, then press the 'Check' button.
2. Press Start button and observe the pressure gauge reading. Verify peak reading is
within specified range, record peak reading.
3. Disconnect pressure gauge tube at syringe in side A.
4. Remove the syringe from side A.
1. Retract ram A.
2. Manually fill the 30 ml syringe.
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
3. Place 30 ml syringe in side A.
4. Connect pressure gauge tube to syringe.
5. At the Console, program side A for injection, then press the 'Check' button.
within specified range, and record peak reading.
7. Disconnect pressure gauge tube at 30 ml syringe in side A.
8. Retract ram A.
9. Remove 30 ml syringe from side A.
1. Retract ram A.
2. Place 20 ml Syringe adapter in side A.
4. Place 20 ml syringe in side A.
6. At the Console, program side A for injection, then press the Air Check button.
8. Disconnect pressure gauge tube at 20 ml syringe in side A.
9. Retract ram A.
10. Remove 20 ml syringe and syringe adapter from side A.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-10
INJECTION #4 SIDE B 60 ML SYRINGE (4 ML/SEC, 60 ML, 150 PSI) ± 20 PSI

2. Remove pressure gauge from side B and place in side A. Place 60 ml syringe
in ram B.
4. At the Console, program side B for injection, then press the Air Check button.
4—MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
6. When injection is complete, disconnect pressure gauge tube at syringe in ram B.

7. Remove 60 ml syringe from side B.
8. Retract ram B.
INJECTION #5 SIDE B 30 ML SYRINGE (4 ML/SEC, 30 ML, 200 PSI) ± 20 PSI
NOTE: The 30 ml syringe on the B side is used to simulate a 50 ml syringe for
testing purposes.
4. Disconnect pressure gauge tube at syringe in side B.
6. Retract ram B.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-11
INJECTION #6 SIDE B 125 ML SYRINGE (4 ML/SEC 100 PSI) ± 20 PSI

1. Manually fill 125 ml syringe.
2. Place 125 ml syringe in side B.
5. Disconnect pressure gauge tube at syringe in side B.
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
7. Remove pressure gauge fixture from side A.
8. Retract ram B.
ACHIEVED PRESSURE RESULTS ON A AND B RAM
After all pressure checks are complete, go to the Results Screen to view injec-
tion results. Compare achieved pressure values A and B ram injections to the
actual pressure gauge readings obtained in injections 1 thru 6. The readings
should be with in +/- 20 psi of the programmed pressure value. If your reading
is outside of this range, repeat the check to confirm your gauge is not the prob-
lem. If calibration is required, refer to Chapter 8.
Return injector to magnet room.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-2-12
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-3-1
4.3 CONSOLE CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

4.3.1 CONSOLE OPERATIONS
1. Turn on the Power Control, and Power Supply.
2. On the console, Press the Power ON/OFF button. The system should power up. Af-
ter initialization, the last exited injection mode will be displayed. Also, the Console
ON/OFF button should be illuminated.
3. Press the System Info button. Verify correct date and time settings. Record Console
and Power Control software version on the PM Check list.
4—MAINTENANCE
4. Press the Results button. The first 8 injections will be displayed. Press the right
PROCEDURES
arrow button to display injections 9 through 16. The results listed are injections
CHECKOUT
completed by date and time in descending order.
5. Press the main button. Press the Memory button. The first 8 protocols should be
displayed. Press tabs 1 through 5 to increment pages through all 40 protocols.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-3-2
4.3.2 REMOTE START OPERATIONS

1. Install 60 ml syringe on A side. Program an A and B injection.
2. Press the Air Check button on the Powerhead or the “Enable” button on the Con-
sole. Press and release the Remote Start Button. The injection should have acti-
vated verifying the proper operation.
3. During an injection cycle, Press the Remote Start Button. The injection should stop
with the indication “Injection Interrupted” displayed.
(Rear View)
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
Console Data
and Power
Connection J1
Remote Start
Connection J2
(Front View)
Touch
Sensitive
Display
Screen
System
ON/OFF Button
Figure 4-3-1 Console Overview
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-4-1
4.4 GROUND CONTINUITY CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

4.4.1 GROUND CONTINUITY
1. Using the continuity/Diode checker function on a DMM or similar indicating
device, ensure continuity exists between the AC plug ground pin and any ex-
posed (unpainted) metal surface that is conductive while connected to all other
accessible metal. Refer to figure 4-4-1
DANGER!
If ground continuity is nonexistent, do not use the injector, contact an
authorized service representative. Failure to follow this instruction can
result in serious injury.
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
NOTE: For models with 814450
Use Standoff
Power Supply Connector for
Chassis (Earth)
Ground
TEST EQUIPMENT
O I
Power Supply
NOTE: For models with 814600 Use Standoff

Power Supply Connector for
Chassis (Earth)
Ground
TEST EQUIPMENT
Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC,

2111 E. Galbraith Road, Cincinnati,
OH 45237-1624 USA. Made in USA.
apply
904509
Power Supply
Figure 4-4-1 Ground Continuity Check
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-4-2
4.4.2 ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE (CHASSIS OR ENCLOSURE)

NOTE: This test is optional, and is intended as an example for facilities where
internal procedures may dictate it’s performance. The following information is
intended for qualified biomedical engineers or trained electrical technicians at
the facilities (install site).
1. Use leakage current test equipment to check the leakage through the power cord
ground with ground open. The leakage should be less than 500 microamperes for
U.L. listed models (domestic-UL60601-1) and less than 500 microamperes (export-
IEC 60601-1) for all others. If higher, check for the cause and repair.
Use Standoff Power Supply

4—MAINTENANCE
Connector for
Chassis (Earth)
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
Ground O I
LEAKAGE CURRENT
Ground Clip Filter
TEST EQUIPMENT
A
ml
60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
B 50
60 ml ml
125 ml
Console
Power Control
J3
Powerhead

Power Supply
Power Supply Use Standoff

Connector for
Chassis (Earth)
Ground
apply
904509
LEAKAGE CURRENT Ground Clip Filter

TEST EQUIPMENT
A
ml
60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
B 50
60 ml ml
125 ml
Console
Power Control
J3
Powerhead

Power Supply
Figure 4-4-2 Leakage Test Set-Up
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-4-3
WARNING!
If system leakage remains above 500 microamperes, do not use the in-
jector as it may be an electric shock risk. Contact an authorized service
representative.
2. Disconnect the leakage test equipment.
4.4.3 GROUND IMPEDANCE

NOTE: This test is optional, and is intended as an example for facilities where
internal procedures may dictate it’s performance. The following information is
4—MAINTENANCE
intended for qualified biomedical engineers or trained electrical technicians at
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
the facilities (install site).
1. Refer to Figure 4-4-3. Run a current of 25 A (50 or 60 Hz) with a no-load voltage (not
to exceed 6 V) for at least 5 seconds through the protective earth pin in the mains
plug and Power Supply chassis.
2. The measured ground impedance must not exceed 0.1 ohms (if measured at
ground contact of the appliance inlet when tested without power cord) or 0.2
ohms (if measured at ground pin of power cord plug when tested with power cord
plug).
Do not use injector if the system ground impedance exceeds 0.1 ohms (when
tested without power cord) or 0.2 ohms (when tested with power cord in-
stalled). Use of injector when ground impedance exceeds 0.1 ohms / 0.2 ohms
may pose an electric shock risk. Contact an authorized service representative.
WARNING!
Do not use the injector if the system ground impedance exceeds 0.1
ohms / 0.2 ohms. Use of injector when ground impedance exceeds
above limits may pose an electric shock risk. Contact an authorized ser-
vice representative.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-4-4
Use Standoff Power Supply

Connector for
Chassis (Earth)
Ground O I
GROUND IMPEDANCE
Ground Clip Filter
TEST EQUIPMENT
A
ml
60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
B 50
60 ml ml
125 ml
Console
Power Control
J3
Powerhead
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT

Power Supply
Power Supply Use Standoff

Connector for
Chassis (Earth)
Ground
apply
904509
GROUND IMPEDANCE Ground Clip Filter

TEST EQUIPMENT
A
ml
60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
B 50
60 ml ml
125 ml
Console
Power Control
J3
Powerhead

Power Supply
Figure 4-4-3 Ground Impedance Test Set-Up
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-5-1
4.5 POWER CONTROL CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

4.5.1 POWER CONTROL
1. Check all cable connections to the Power Control.
2. Visually inspect Power Control covers.
3. Check Power Control status light is on when power is applied.
4. Check Power Control is at its installed position located outside magnetic 300 gauss
and is mounted in its stand.
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-5-2
4.5.2 GAUSS MEASURING METHOD
CAUTION!
The OptiStar Elite injector will meet all performance specifications when
the power control is placed at any of the 4 specified power control posi-
tions. If the power control is positioned within a magnetic field higher
than 300 gauss then the injector may encounter alarms, rendering the
injector inoperable.
1. Only use gauss meter that has valid calibration date.

4—MAINTENANCE
2. At the Power Control location, take measurements in eight different directions

PROCEDURES
from the top of the Power Control approximately every 45 degrees, noting reading
CHECKOUT
at each position.
NOTE: If reading is higher than 300 gauss, reposition Power Control in Magnet
room.
3. Record the highest gauss reading from step 2.
Power Control
Figure 4-5-1 Power Control
Power Control
Power Control
Stand
Figure 4-5-2 Power Control on Stand
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-6-1
4.6 CEILING SUSPENSION CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

Suspension Arms are shipped with a Transit Locking Knob that is set to elimi-
nate travel of the arm to the horizontal position. Always raise the arm to the
upward limit of travel before removing any equipment mounted to the arm.
THE ARM WILL SPRING UPWARD WITH CONSIDERABLE FORCE UNDER NO LOAD
CONDITIONS, AND MAY CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Additional information on the use of the Transit Locking Knob is provided in
the installation manual that accompanied the ceiling suspension system carton.
NOTE: The suspension system is to only be used with LF injectors. The maximum
load capacity of the suspension spring arm should not exceed 32 lbs (14.5 kg) at full
extension. The use of accessories not complying with the equivalent safety re-
4—MAINTENANCE
quirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting
PROCEDURES
system. Consideration relating to the choice shall include:
CHECKOUT
• use of the accessory in the patient vicinity
• evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been performed
in accordance to the appropriate EN 60601-1 harmonized national standard
4.6.1 SUSPENSION ARM VISUAL AND OPERATIONAL CHECKS
 The column is securely mounted to the system base.

 The injector mount can rotate smoothly.
 The spring arm is properly balanced.
 The spring arm can smoothly move through its entire range of motion.
 The joint between the spring arm and the extension arm allows the arm to
smoothly move through its entire range of motion.
 The joint between the extension arm and the column allows the arm to smoothly
move through its entire range of motion.
 The column tube covers are securely mounted on the column.
 The bottom column covers are securely mounted on the column.
 The suspension arm covers are securely mounted on the suspension arm.
 The total resistance of the internal ground wire is less than 1 Ω.
If the ceiling track is part of the system, perform the following checks after the system
installation is complete.
 The carriage smoothly moves along the entire length of the track.
Note; For the specific checks and procedures refer to the accompanying
AADCO ceiling suspension installation manual, P/N 814844S
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-6-2
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
This page intentionally left blank
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-7-1
4.7 CLEANING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
DO NOT use any solvents or alcohol based cleaners to clean the
Powerhead, Console, Power Control or Power Supply.
4.7.1 SYRINGE HOLDER

On a daily basis, move the ram to the retracted position and wipe out the inside
4—MAINTENANCE
of the syringe holder with a lint-free cloth sprayed with an all-purpose house-
PROCEDURES
hold cleaner. Remove any contrast build up around the syringe holder sensors.
CHECKOUT
4.7.2 DOTACLIP / STARCLIP SYRINGE ADAPTER
Clean the syringe adapter with water or alcohol only. Do not sterilize.
4.7.3 POWERHEAD
Clean the exterior of the powerhead and the optional syringe adapter by spraying a
cloth with an all-purpose household cleaner, then gently wipe clean.
4.7.4 CONSOLE
The console may be cleaned by using a lint-free cloth sprayed with an all-
purpose household cleaner. To clean the touch screen, use a damp nonabrasive
cloth and any commercially available non-ammonia and non-alcohol window
cleaner to regularly clean the surface. NOTE: The cleaning solution should be
applied to the cloth rather than the surface of the touch screen. The touch
screen is not water proof.
4.7.5 POWER CONTROL
Clean the exterior of the power control by spraying a cloth with an all-purpose
household cleaner, then gently wipe clean.
4.7.6 POWER SUPPLY
Clean the exterior of the power supply by spraying a cloth with an all-purpose
household cleaner, then gently wipe clean.
4.7.7 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
The ceiling suspension components are hard anodize coated. They can be
cleaned and disinfected with agents normally used in operating rooms.
Refer to Section 8 “Inspection and Maintenance” of the accompanying AADCO
Ceiling Suspension Installation Manual, P/N 814844S, for the recommended in-
spection intervals, preventative maintenance schedule, and cleaning procedures.
818507-M 2020-05-05
4-7-2
4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-1-1
5 TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 OVERVIEW
The intention of this Chapter is to deliver information to the service technician
in order to track a problem to a subassembly so it can be replaced or repaired.
When a problem exists with the OptiStar Elite, a message will be displayed on
the console screen. A complete listing of these messages and their probable
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
cause is contained in this chapter.
Instructions for disassembly and reassembly of major injector components are
defined in chapter 6 of this manual.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-1-2
5.1.1 OPTISTAR ELITE SERVICE KIT (OPTIONAL P/N 801210)

The tools listed below are supplied in the OptiStar Elite service kit. This kit is
required for OptiStar Elite troubleshooting and calibration procedures.
Part # Descriptions Comments
801216 Case, Foam-Plastic Recommended to keep all the

unique tools together
801240 Pressure Calibration Fixture Required for Calibration
801202 Test Display Required for Calibration
801201 Test Switch Assembly Required for Calibration

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
801211 Cable Assembly 26 Position Required for Calibration

Socket to Socket. Length 18
inches
801212 Cable Assembly 20 Position Required for Calibration

Socket to Pin. Length 18 inches
801213 Screwdriver Titanium #2 Phillip Required for any disassembly within

magnet room
801257 Screwdriver Titanium 3/16 Slotted Required for D-shell backshell removal
801200 Spanner Wrench Non-Ferrous Required for adjustment of Powerhead

pivot (OptiStar MR only).
801214 Wrench Titanium (3mm) Hex Required for removal of Powerhead from
stand and adjustment of Powerhead pivot
within magnet room (OptiStar MR only).
801215 Wrench Titanium (4mm) Hex Required for adjustment of Powerhead

pivot with magnet room (OptiStar MR only).
801254-10 Cable Assembly, Test 10 foot Required for adjustment of Powerhead

pivot within magnet room
(OptiStar MR only).
802713 Pressure Fixture Base Required to calibrate OptiStar Elite
801224-07 Cable Assembly, 25 pin, D shell, M/F Required for testing outside of magnet
room.
Figure 5-1-1 Tool Kit
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-1-3
5.1.2 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES

We suggest these actions when first troubleshooting the OptiStar Elite; things
to try before taking anything apart, and to make the job easier.
1. Check indicator lights on Power Supply and Power Control to ensure adequate
power is present.
2. Verify the problem. Check the injector under the same conditions and settings that
it had when the problem occurred. If possible, try the injector in an isolated setting
to see if the problem can be duplicated.
3. Try different settings. Check the injector with different control settings than it had
when the problem occurred. Change the flow rate, volume and pressure. If anoth-
er size syringe is available, try it.
4. Use the checkout in chapter 4. This is a relatively quick way to check the major
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
functions. This is especially helpful if the accuracy is in question.
5. Visually inspect subassemblies and components before performing electrical tests
or calibration procedures. Specifically make sure cable plugs are firmly attached,
and cables are not crimped, or under tension. If the trouble is in the powerhead,
open the powerhead cover and inspect the powerhead while it operates. Look for
loose parts, loose connections, interference, and wear.
6. Isolate the fault. While trying different settings, and under different conditions, try
to isolate the specific problem.
7. Call your sales representative for service assistance, field service, and for replace-
ment parts or modules. If the system is new, still under warranty, or covered under
a service contract, call your sales representative before proceeding.
DANGER!
Be extremely careful when the OptiStar Elite is open. Lethal voltages
are exposed. Be careful not to leave an open system unattended with
power plugged in. DISCONNECT THE POWER CORD BEFORE REMOVING
OR REPLACING BOARDS.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-1-4
Alarm Number
Alarm History
Reason Code
31 OCT 14:29 Alarm 01-B004
11 OCT 09:40 Alarm 06-B001
10 OCT 13:52 Alarm 50-0001
08 OCT 15:45 Alarm 15-B002
08 OCT 15:34 Alarm 15-B001
08 OCT 15:30 Alarm 17-A002
08 OCT 15:25 Alarm 15-B001
08 OCT 15:23 Alarm 30-0001
08 OCT 15:21 Alarm 15-A004
08 OCT 14:20 Alarm 15-B001
Page 1
< >
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
System Info
Figure 5-1-1 History Alarm Screen

A: 60 60ml AB1
B: 60 60ml Duration 00:12 Alarm Number
Phase Side Flow Alarm 21!
Volume Phase Delay
ml/sec ml sec
0.1 1 0
Unable to start the injection
1 A Max Vol
Verify both Powerhead and Console are ready Inject Delay
to begin the injection
2 B 0.1 1 Max Vol 00:00
Scan Delay
3 - 00:00
4 Reason Code
Peak PSI
20
0007 Timing Bolus
Figure 5-1-2 Alarm Code Presentation
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-1
5.2 SYSTEM GENERATED MESSAGES

With these faults, a message appears on the system display. Use this chapter to
help find the possible cause and what to check.
The alarms are listed in numeric order as shown below, followed by a brief de-
scription. If an alarm fault occurs, find the alarm number on the list, then refer
to the expanded explanation given for that alarm in this chapter.
Each alarm includes a description message of what it means, probable causes,
and what action to take to remedy the problem. From these messages, the de-
fective subassembly (such as a circuit board or the powerhead) can be identi-
fied and replaced.
The OptiStar Elite also retains a history of reported alarms. Refer to Chapter 9
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
for procedures.
Alarm
Number Fault Message
1 Pressure Limit Alarm
2 Over Volume Alarm
3 Over Flow Rate Alarm
4 Motor Timing Alarm
6 Motor Alarm
9 Invalid Powerhead Pressure Measurement Alarm
13 Forward/Reverse Limit Sensor Alarm
14 Motor Control Watchdog Alarm
15 Syringe Size Sensing Alarm
16 Power Control Communication Buffer Alarm
17 Key Press Alarm
18 Power On Self Test Alarm
20 Protocol Parameter Alarm
21 Invalid Start Request Alarm
23 Power Control Firmware Checksum Alarm
24 Power Control NV Memory Checksum Alarm
30 Touchscreen Alarm
31 Remote Start Switch Connection Alarm
32 Console CPU Hardware Malfunction Alarm
33 Console Protocol Memory Checksum Alarm
34 Console Program Checksum Alarm
35 General Power Control Alarm
36 SW Watchdog Timer
50 Power Control not Detected Alarm
90 Power Control/Console Communication Alarm
NOTE: Reason codes for Alarms 1 thru 24 may begin with an A or B. These let-
ters identify which ram the alarm is associated with.
Table 5-2-1 Alarm listing
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-2
Alarm no. 1:
Meaning: Pressure limit malfunction
Cause: There are four possible causes for a Pressure Limit Malfunction:
Reason Code 0001: Programmed Maximum Pressure is exceeded continuously
for more than 1 second.
Reason Code 0002: Remaining Volume, (ram position), does not change for
more than 2 seconds when a forward ram movement has previously pressure
limited.
Reason Code 0003: The motor configured for a forward move indicates reverse
movement for more than 2 seconds when a forward ram movement has previ-
ously pressure limited.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Reason Code 0004: Pressure relief from pressure die down on B ram does not
occur within 2 seconds.
• Ram face has become jammed on load cell holder
• Bad cable at J5 or J6 on the Powerhead board
Check: An obstruction in the tubing or catheter caused an alarm.
Make sure the injection tubing is not kinked or pinched. If any stopcock values
are in line, make sure they are open. Verify that the operator is not trying to
program high flow rates into a small needle. Keep in mind that the B side may
have a low pressure limit. In some cases the operator could program a high
pressure (180 to 200 psi limit) A side injection followed by a B side. Immediately
after the injector completes side A, side B will start. If the residual pressure from
the side A injection exceeds the pressure limit for side B the injector may trig-
ger a pressure limit malfunction alarm or a hardware alarm.
Alarm no. 2:
Meaning: Over Volume error.
Cause: The volume delivered exceeded the programmed volume by more than
1 ml. The error is generated from the UPP injector volume counter because it
reached the set value plus 1 ml.
Reason Code 0001: Software forward move monitoring detects motor position
counts have expelled 1-ml worth of volume more than the requested amount.
Reason Code 0002: Software reverse move monitoring detects motor position
counts have retracted 1-ml worth of volume more than the requested amount.
Check: Optical encoders on motors, loose connector or printed circuit board.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-3
Alarm no. 3:
Meaning: Flow Rate malfunction.
Cause: The optical encoders are used to control and monitor the flow rate. If the
flow rate exceeds the programmed flow rate this alarm will appear. The encoder
signals are monitored by the UPP counter on the microprocessor board.
Reason Code 0001: Speed read from the PLD is 25% over the set speed for more
than 1 second.
Check: Optical encoders, loose connectors or printed circuit board.
Alarm no. 4:
Meaning: Motor Timing Alarm.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Cause: A-side or B-side motor encoder signals are intermittently lost during an
injection.
Reason Code 0001: Injection duration for A-side injections is 25% over the com-
puted duration. Occurs if pressure limiting did not occur.
Possible causes are:
Faulty motor driver board in the power control.
Faulty motor
Powerhead cable
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-4
Alarm no. 6:
Meaning: Motor malfunction.
Reason Code 0001: Motor position counts do not change for more than 2 sec-
onds after 300 ms startup interval (of phase).
Reason Code 0002: Motor configured for a forward move indicates reverse
movement for more than 2 seconds, when the move has NOT previously pres-
sure limited after 300 ms startup interval (of phase).
Reason Code 0003: Motor configured for a reverse move indicates forward
movement for more than 2 seconds, when the move has NOT previously pres-
sure limited after 300 ms startup interval (of phase).
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
A-side or B-side motor encoder signals are disconnected during an injection.

Faulty motor driver board in the power control.
Faulty motor in powerhead.
Faulty connection to motor or motor encoder.
Overheated.
Fluid path blocked.
Pressure limit is programmed to low.
Check: Verify that the powerhead ram is functioning by pressing the forward or
reverse buttons on the powerhead.
Alarm no. 9:
Meaning: Invalid Powerhead Pressure Measurement
Reason Code 0001: Pressure A/D reading does not complete for more than 250
times.
Check: Replace CPU board in Power Control
Call Technical Support.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-5
Alarm no. 13:

Meaning: FWD/REV limit sensor malfunction.
Reason Code 0001: Both A-side or B-side hard limit switches are ON for more
than 1 second.
Reason Code 0002: Limit switch event occurred when in paused state.
Reason Code 0003: Limit switch event occurred before injection completed and
more than 1 ml of volume was remaining.
Reason Code 0004: Reverse limit switch engaged when injecting.
Reason Code 0005: Both A-side or B-side hard limit switches are ON during
initialization tests.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Faulty limit switch board.
Dirt is blocking light path.
Check: Call Service.
Alarm no. 14:
Meaning: Motor Control Watchdog Alarm.
Reason Code 0001: Generated by pressing the ENTER key in Mode 7 to verify
watchdog operation.
Reason Code 0002: The FPGA chip on the CPU board which controls motion
contains a watchdog timer. If this watchdog timer is not reset every 500 ms or
less, this alarm will be activated.
CPU board malfunction.
Check: Call Technical Support.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-6
Alarm no. 15:

Meaning: Changed Syringe Size Alarm.
Reason Code 0001: A syringe change (including 1 second debounce) occurred
during a programmed injection (including a patency injection).
Reason Code 0002: When an invalid syringe type was detected. 1 second de-
bounce completed.
Reason Code 0003: Syringe switch debounce was unable to complete within 5
seconds due to constant changing switch readings.
Reason Code 0004: Syringe error detected during initialization
Possible causes:
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
If the alarm occurs while a syringe adapter is installed, the syringe adapter may
be moving and causing the syringe sensing switch to momentarily change
syringe sizes.
Faulty syringe sensor switch.
Faulty adapter.
Faulty bottom cover causing erroneous switch open/closure.
Faulty connection to syringe sensor.
Non-conforming syringe is being used.
Check: If the powerhead displays an incorrect syringe size, inspect the syringe
size switches for accumulated contrast sticking, an obstruction in the flange
slot, or defective powerhead PCB.
NOTE: Do not change syringe on either the A or B side until the entire injection
sequence is complete.
Alarm no. 16:
Meaning: Power Control Communication Buffer Alarm.
Reason Code 0001: Unable to queue send event to Console.
Reason Code 0002: Error occurred while sending a command to the Console.
Reason Code 0003: Error occurred while receiving a command from the Con-
sole.
Possible causes: Intermittent faulty connection to Console.
Check: Power Control to Console communication connections.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-7
Alarm no. 17:

Meaning: Key Press Alarm
Reason Code 0001: Start, stop, or check air key is pressed during initialization.
Reason Code 0002: Forward, reverse, a fast key is pressed during initialization.
Any one of the powerhead forward, reverse, fast, start, stop, and check switches
are closed during Power On Self Test.
Check: A powerhead switch was unintentionally pressed during the power on
sequence.
Alarm no. 18:
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Meaning: Initialization health check error.
Reason Code 0001: Initialization Speed check failed.
Reason Code 0002: Initialization UPP inject time check failed.
Reason Code 0003: Initialization UPP inject volume check failed.
Reason Code 0004: Initialization UPP position check failed.
Reason Code 0005: Initialization Pressure test failed.
Reason Code 0006: Console did not report model.
Reason Code 0007: Console reported invalid model, expecting OptiStar Elite.
Possible causes:
Non-OptiStar Elite Console connected to OptiStar Elite Power Control.
Faulty UPP chip.
Faulty pressure sensor.
Faulty Powerhead cable.
Check: All pins at Powerhead cable connector (cowbell).
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-8
Alarm no. 20:

Meaning: Protocol Error.
Protocol parameters between the Power Control and Console are checked at the
start of normal, drip, patency injections:
Reason Code 0001: Protocol flow rate exceeded the syringe max allowable
Reason Code 0002: Protocol volume exceeded the syringe max allowable
Reason Code 0003: Protocol pressure exceeded the syringe max allowable
Reason Code 0004: One of the protocol parameters was less than the minimum
allowable
Reason Code 0005: Protocol invalid checksum
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Reason Code 0006: Wrong side protocol received for Patency

Ram retracted past retract position for syringe, for example: A 30 ml syringe is
installed, but the remaining volume and programmed volume is greater then 30
Faulty communication link between the Console and Power Control.
Incompatible software versions between Console and Power Control
Check: Call Technical Support.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-9
Alarm no. 21:

Meaning: Invalid Start Request Alarm
Possible causes:
Reason Code 0001: Request is received from Console to start an injection while
disabled.
Reason Code 0002: Request is received from Console to start a drip injection
while disabled.
disabled. This may happen as a result of simultaneously pressing Console Start
and Powerhead jog keys.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
jogging and disabled.
while jogging and disabled.
jogging and disabled. This may happen as a result of simultaneously pressing
Console Start and Powerhead jog keys.
jogging and enabled.
while jogging and enabled.
jogging and enabled. This may happen as a result of simultaneously pressing
Console Start and Powerhead jog keys.
Reason Code 000A: Request is received from Console to load protocol data
while jogging and enabled. This may happen as a result of simultaneously
pressing Console Start and Powerhead jog keys.
Reason Code 000B: Request is received from Console to start an injection at
completion of an injection.
Reason Code 000C: Request is received from Console to start a drip injection at
completion of an injection.
Reason Code 000D: Request is received from Console to start an injection at
completion of an injection. This may happen as a result of simultaneously
pressing Console Start and Powerhead jog keys.
Reason Code 000E: Request is received from Console to disable when an injec-
tion start transaction is in process. This may happen as a result of simultane-
ously pressing Console Start and Powerhead Stop keys.
Reason Code 0010: Request is received from Power Control to start an injection
when Console is disabled.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-10
Alarm no. 23:

Meaning: Power Control firmware Checksum Alarm.
Reason Code 0001: ROM checksum test failed at initialization.
Check: If software has just been downloaded into the Power Control CPU board,
refer to section 10.2.1.
Replace CPU Board in the Power Control.
Call service.
Alarm no. 24:
Cause: NV memory checksum does not agree with its last saved checksum.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Reason Code 0001: NV SRAM checksum test failed at initialization.

Check: If software has just been downloaded into the Power Control CPU board,
refer to section 10.2.1.
Replace CPU Board in the Power Control.
Call service.
Alarm no. 30:
Meaning: Touchscreen Alarm.
Reason Code 0001: Alarm if touchscreen is pressed during startup / initializa-
tion.
Reason Code 0002: Console PIC processor checksum test failed on touch screen
data.
Check: The touch screen should have nothing making contact with it during
power up.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-11
Alarm no. 31:

Meaning: Remote Start Switch Connection Alarm.
Cause: The Remote Start Switch is improperly connected or becomes discon-
nected during an injection, this alarm condition will occur.
Reason Code 0001: Auxiliary port is in an invalid state
Reason Code 0002: Start switch was connected and removed while in an inject-
ing screen
Reason Code 0003: Start switch pressed simultaneously when injector is en-
abled
Check: Remote Start Switch connection.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Alarm no. 32:
Meaning: Console CPU hardware malfunction.
Cause: SPI or I2C bus has failed.
Check: Replace Console CPU board
Alarm no. 33:
Meaning: Console Protocol Memory Checksum Alarm. CRC check for NVRAM failed.
Check: Battery on Console CPU board is bad or loose.
Replace Console CPU board.
Call Service.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-12
Alarm no. 34:

Meaning: Console Program Checksum Alarm. CRC check for program memory
failed.
Check:
Download software
Replace Console CPU board.
Call Service.
Alarm no. 35:
Meaning: General Power Control Alarm. Invalid Powerpack alarm code received.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Check: Call Service.

Alarm no. 36:
Meaning: Console SW Watchdog Timer.
Reason Code 0000: Unknown, still running when watchdog time out occurred
Reason Code 0001: Access error processor exception
Reason Code 0002: Address error processor exception
Reason Code 0003: Illegal instruction processor exception
Reason Code 0004: Divide by zero processor exception
Reason Code 0005: Privilege violation processor exception
Reason Code 0006: Un-implemented A line processor exception
Reason Code 0007: Un-implemented B line processor exception
Reason Code 0008: Format error processor exception
Reason Code 0010: Unable to allocate memory from heap
Check:
Download software
Replace Console CPU board
Call Service.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-13
Alarm no. 50:

Meaning: Power Control not Detected.
Reason Code 0001: Console fails to communicate with the Powerpack after 30
seconds at power up.
Reason Code 0002: Powerpack stopped responding to periodic link check mes-
sages.
Reason Code 0003: Console detected that Power Control is trying to reset and
go through initialization again.
Possible causes:
Power Control is not turned on.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Faulty RS422 cable/connection.
Faulty data communications link to Power Supply
Faulty serial link EMI Filter.
Faulty Console RS422 line driver/receiver board.
Faulty Power Control RS422 line driver/receiver board.
Check: The power control is switched on (green indicator switch is on).
Check: J1 and J2 power supply connections to the Console, and the power con-
trol.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-14
Alarm no. 90:

Meaning: Power Control/Communication Error.
There are several possible sub alarm codes associated with Alarm no. 90. Their format
is used to explain alarms on the 2 communications channels.
Reason Code 0001: Incorrect commands received during initialization sequence.
Reason Code 0002: Communication with the Power Control is lost before completing
the power on sequence.
Reason Code 0003: Three bad transmissions received from the Power Control.
Reason Code 0004: Power Control stopped transmission during a command packet.
Reason Code 0005: UART Received break. The received break circuit detects breaks
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
that originate in the middle of a received character. However, a break in the middle of
a character must persist until the end of the next detected character time.
Reason Code 0006: UART Framing error. No stop bit was detected when the cor-
responding data character in the FIFO was received. The stop-bit check occurs in the
middle of the first stop-bit position.
Reason Code 0007: UART Parity error. Character in the FIFO was received with incor-
rect parity.
Reason Code 0008: UART Overrun error. One or more characters in the received data
stream have been lost.
Reason Code 0009: Invalid model received from Power Control.
Reason Code 000A: Modal dialog was visible when screen changed, must have lost
communication.
Reason Code 000B: Incoming message too large for communication buffer
Reason Code 000C: Incoming data queue full when attempting to put data on to the
queue
Reason Code 000D: Incoming data queue is empty when attempting to get data
from queue.
Possible causes:
Faulty RS422 cable/connection.
Faulty data communication link to Power Supply
Faulty serial link EMI Filter.
Faulty Console RS422 line driver/receiver board.
Faulty Power Control RS422 line driver/receiver board.
Incompatible Power Control connected (non-Elite).
Check: Power Control to Console communication connections.
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-15
5.2.1 ACTIVATING THE SYSTEM ERROR RESULTS LIBRARY

The alarm history library retains the last 80 alarm messages encountered. To
display these alarm messages proceed as follows:
1. Turn the console on.
2. Touch the System Info button.
3. Touch the Alarm History button.
4. To return to the System Information screen, simply touch the System button.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
818507-M 2020-05-05
5-2-16
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-1-1
6 FIELD REPLACEABLE
PARTS
This chapter provides disassembly and assembly instructions for OptiStar Elite
field replaceable parts. These parts are defined in the following sections:
Section 6-2 Console
Section 6-3 Powerhead
Section 6-4 Power Control
Section 6-5 Power Supply.
Section 6-6 Remote Stand
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Section 6-7 Filter
Section 6-8 Ceiling Suspension
Section 6-9 Cables
Section 6-10 Service Kit Parts
Section 6-11 Gender Connectors
When removing a specific item, follow the DISASSEMBLY instructions up to the
point where the removal of that particular item is discussed. To disassemble an
item may require sub components to be removed first. If this is the case, you
will be directed to perform the appropriate sub component instruction first. To
replace an item, follow the disassembly instructions in reverse order until the
unit is completely reassembled.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-1-2
WARNING!
Always remove components from magnet room (Powerhead and Power Con-
trol) before disassembly. Failure to follow this warning could result in personnel
injury or equipment damage.
WARNING!
WARNING!
WARNING!
Before removing any Power Control PC boards, ensure proper static protection
6—DISASSEMBLY
devices are used. Failure to follow this warning could result in equipment dam-
REASSEMBLY
age.
WARNING!
Only cabling listed in this document can be used with the OptiStar Elite MR
Contrast Delivery System. Failure to follow this warning could result in equip-
ment damage.
6.1 GENERAL INFORMATION

6.1.1 RETAINING SCREWS
• OptiStar Elite components are retained with Non-Ferrous brass or blue stain-
less steel screws. The blue dyed screws are made of a type of stainless steel
that is not attracted to a magnet. Always use Non-Ferrous screws if replace-
ment is required.
6.1.2 TERMINOLOGY
• The term Wire harness is used to identify internal unit cabling.
• The term Cable is used to identify cabling between each OptiStar Elite unit.
6.1.3 REPLACEABLE PARTS
• Each section in this chapter identifies OptiStar Elite component replaceable
parts.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-1
6.2 CONSOLE
DANGER!
Before attempting any disassembly procedure, turn off all power to the
OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System.
The Console assembly consist of the following components:
NOTE: An (*) next to a Find No. indicates the part cannot be ordered.
• Cover
• Touchscreen
• Console CPU and Interface Board
• Harnesses
• Switch assembly
• Display subassembly
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-2
6.2.1 CONSOLE REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS (814101)

(FOR 814101 CONSOLE ONLY - SEE FIGURE 6-2-1, 6-2-2 & 6-2-3)
Find No. Part No. Description

814101 CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
1* M4-.7 X 10 MM PLASTIC PHILLIPS PAN HEAD SCREW
2* FOOT-RUBBER-CONSOLE
3 844101-1S CONSOLE CPU BOARD- WILL REQUIRE SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
4 802102-1 INTERFACE BOARD
5 802104 TOUCHSCREEN, 10.4”
6 802198 CONSOLE FRONT COVER
7 802199 CONSOLE BACK COVER
8 802114SR CONSOLE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
6—DISASSEMBLY
9* LOCTITE 222,PURPLE,THREAD LOCK

REASSEMBLY
10 802110 INTERFACE CABLE ASSEMBLY

11 MOUNTING PLATE, BUTTON
12 814401S DISPLAY UPGRADE KIT
13 802130SR MOUNTING BRACKET, COMM-BOARD
14* SPACER,CAP
15* GASKET, DIN-CONNECTOR
16* JACKNUT KIT
17* SCREW, FOR PLASTIC, #4 HI/LOW
18* TIE ON ARROWHEAD
19* PLATE,HINGE,FINISHED
20* HINGE, CONSTANT TORQUE
21* SCREW,M4X.7,10 MM,PR,PH,LOCKWSH
22* SCREW,PT3.5,12 MM,SS(FOR THERMO PLASTICS)
23* SCREW,M4X.7 8 MM PR PH W/LW
24* PCB SUPPORT
26* LABEL, CONNECTOR ID, CONSOLE
27* LABEL,SERIAL NUMBER
28 802108 SWITCH BUTTON, CONSOLE
29* SCREW-4-40X5/16 PH
30* WASHER #4 INT TOOTH
31* LABEL,ATTENTION
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-3
28
18 27
26
31
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
FRONT VIEW 16 29 30
2x REF XXXXXX-X
S/N xxxx-xxx
REF 2
22
12x
19 20
2x
BACK VIEW
1
4x
2
BACK VIEW 5x
818507-M 2020-05-05 Figure 6-2-1 Console Assembly (P/N 814101)

6-2-4
24 12
3.0 REF
2x 23 3
21
12 REF 4x
17
4x
SEE NOTE 3
11
8
SEE NOTE 1
PIN 1
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY
14 17 2x
SEE NOTE 3
J3 15
6 5
13
NOTES:
1. THE BACKLIGHT HARNESS IS ROUTED THROUGH THE NOTCH IN THE MOUNTING PLATE.
THE SWITCH ASSEMBLY IS CONNECTED TO J6 AND THE INVERTER HARNESS IS CONNECTED TO J7.
7
2. CONNECT INTERFACE CABLE FROM J3 OF INTERFACE BOARD TO J5 OF CONSOLE CPU BOARD.
3. THE #4 SCREW (ITEM 17) THREADED INTO THE PLASTIC COVERS (QTY. = 6) SHALL BE TORQUE LIMITED
TO 60 OZ/IN.
10
BACK COVER ASSEMBLY
Figure 6-2-2 Console PCB Assembly (P/ N 814101)

818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-5
12
029
05 2
-X
X
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
Figure 6-2-3 Display Subassembly Kit (P/N 814401S)

818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-6
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-7
6.2.2 CONSOLE REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS (814400)

(FOR 814400 CONSOLE ONLY SEE FIGURES 6-2-4, 6-2-5 & 6-2-6)

814400 CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
1* M4-.7 X 10 MM PLASTIC PHILLIPS PAN HEAD SCREW
2* FOOT-RUBBER-CONSOLE
3 846101-1S CONSOLE CPU BOARD- WILL REQUIRE SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
4 802102-1 INTERFACE BOARD
5 814104S TOUCHSCREEN, 10.4”
6 802198 CONSOLE FRONT COVER
7 802199 CONSOLE BACK COVER
8 802114SR CONSOLE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
10 802110 INTERFACE CABLE ASSEMBLY
11 MOUNTING PLATE, BUTTON
12 846116S DISPLAY SUBASSEMBLY
13 802130SR MOUNTING BRACKET, COMM-BOARD
14* SPACER,CAP
15* GASKET, DIN-CONNECTOR
17* SCREW, FOR PLASTIC, #4 HI/LOW
18* TIE ON ARROWHEAD
19* PLATE,HINGE,FINISHED
20* HINGE, CONSTANT TORQUE
21* SCREW,M4X.7,10 MM,PR,PH,LOCKWSH
22* SCREW,PT3.5,12 MM,SS(FOR THERMO PLASTICS)
23* SCREW,M4X.7 8 MM PR PH W/LW
24* PCB SUPPORT
26* LABEL, CONNECTOR ID, CONSOLE
27* LABEL,SERIAL NUMBER
28 802108 SWITCH BUTTON, CONSOLE
29* SCREW-4-40X5/16 PH
30* LABEL, MR UNSAFE
32 FERRITE, CABLE CLAMP-ON RECTANGULAR, 26.67 MM SLOT
33 FOAM PAD
34 SPONGE RUBBER
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-8
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-9
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Figure 6-2-4 Console Assembly (P/N 814400)
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-10
12
3
24 32
3.0 REF
21
23 4x
12 REF
17
4x
SEE NOTE 3
11
28 8
SEE NOTE 1
6—DISASSEMBLY
PIN 1
REASSEMBLY
FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY

(shown with 846101-1S console cpu board)
14, 17
2x
SEE NOTE 2
J3 15
6 5
TOUCHSCREEN ASSEMBLY
4 (shown with 814104S touchscreen)
13
34 NOTES:
1. THE BACKLIGHT HARNESS IS ROUTED THROUGH THE NOTCH IN THE MOUNTING PLATE.
33 THE SWITCH ASSEMBLY IS CONNECTED TO J6 AND THE INVERTER HARNESS IS CONNECTED TO J7.
7
2. CONNECT INTERFACE CABLE FROM J3 OF INTERFACE BOARD TO J5 OF CONSOLE CPU BOARD.
3. THE #4 SCREW (ITEM 17) THREADED INTO THE PLASTIC COVERS (QTY. = 6) SHALL BE TORQUE LIMITED
TO 60 OZ/IN.
10
BACK COVER ASSEMBLY
SEE NOTE 1
Figure 6-2-5 Console PCB Assembly (P/ N 814400)

818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-11
12
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
Figure 6-2-6 Display Subassembly Kit (P/N 846116S)

818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-12
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-13
6.2.3 CONSOLE COVER REMOVAL /INSTALLATION

Refer to Figure 6-2-1 for Console P/N: 814101.
Back Cover Removal
1. Place the console, with hinge plate attached, face down on a soft, clean surface to
prevent damage to the finish (i.e., table top with soft cloth in between console and
table).
2. To remove the hinge plate (item 20), remove screws (item 22) and lockwashers.
NOTE: If the hinge plate is not the item being serviced it can remain attached
to the back cover.
3. To remove the back cover (item 7), remove the four screws (item 1) and slowly lift
6—ASSEMBLY &
away from the front half without fully extending the ribbon harness assembly
DISASSEMBLY
(item 10).
NOTE: The harness assembly (item 10) must be disconnected from the console
CPU board at J5 before the back cover can be completely separated from the
front half of the console.
Front Cover Removal
4. On the Console CPU board, disconnect Switch cable from J6 connector.
5. Remove four (4) retaining screws securing the display subassembly (item 12) to the
front cover.
6. Remove ferrite, if it applies to this console, around touchscreen and display ribbon
cables by sliding off its two (2) retaining clips.
7. Remove touch screen cable from J2 on CPU PCB.
8. Carefully lift the display subassembly (item 12) and then the touchscreen assembly
from front cover (item 6).
9. Transfer the front cover switch assembly to the kit front cover (item 6) by removing
the four retaining screws.
10. To install covers, perform procedures above in reverse order.
11. With a permanent marker, write the serial number on the label located on the kit
Console Back Cover.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-14
6.2.4 CONSOLE CPU REMOVAL /INSTALLATION

NOTE:
Use 844101-1S for Console P/N: 814101. Refer to Figure 6-2-2.
Use 846101-1S for Console P/N: 814400. Refer to Figure 6-2-5.
1. Perform Console Cover Removal procedure 6.2.3.
2. Disconnect the following four connectors at the Console CPU board:
Touchscreen cable from J2
Display cable from J8
Switch assembly (item 8) from J6
Backlight cable from J7
3. Remove two (2) screws retaining (item 23), lift console CPU PCB (item 3) of retain-
ing pegs.
6—ASSEMBLY &
DISASSEMBLY
4. Remove two (2) screws retaining (item 3), lift console CPU PCB (item 3) off retaining
pegs.
5. Install kit Console CPU board (item 3) and perform assembly procedures above in
reverse order.
6. Perform software download to Console using procedures in Chapter 10 of this
manual.
7. Verify date and time in console setup screen as described in section 3.3.3.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-15
6.2.5 DISPLAY SUBASSEMBLY REMOVAL /INSTALLATION

FOR CONSOLE P/N: 814101 ONLY
Refer to Figure 6-2-2
1. Perform removal procedure 6.2.3, and 6.2.4.
2. Remove four (4) retaining screws securing the Display Subassembly (item 12) to the
front cover.
3. Remove Display Subassembly.
4. Install Console Display Upgrade Kit (814401S) and perform assembly procedures in
reverse order.
FOR CONSOLE P/N: 814400
1. Perform removal procedure 6.2.3, and 6.2.4.
2. Remove four (4) retaining screws securing the Display Subassembly (item 12) to the
front cover.
6—ASSEMBLY &
DISASSEMBLY
3. Remove Display Subassembly
4. Install Console Display Service Kit (846116S) and perform assembly procedures
above in reverse order.
6.2.6 TOUCHSCREEN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Perform removal procedure 6.2.3, 6.2.4, and 6.2.5.
2. Lift Touchscreen from front cover.
3. Install Touchscreen Kit, Console P/N: 802104S (item 5) and perform assembly pro-
cedures above in reverse order.

1. Perform removal procedure 6.2.3, 6.2.4, and 6.2.5.
2. Lift Touchscreen from front cover
3. Install Touchscreen Kit, Console P/N: 814104S (item 5) and perform assembly pro-
cedures above in reverse order.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-16
6.2.7 CONSOLE POWER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Place the console, with hinge plate attached, face down on a soft, clean surface to
prevent damage to the finish (i.e., table top with soft cloth in between console and
table).
2. To remove the back cover (item 7), remove the four screws (item 1) and slowly lift
away from the front half without fully extending the ribbon harness assembly
(item 10) to expose the Display Subassembly.
NOTE: The harness assembly (item 10) does not have to be disconnected from
the console CPU board to remove the Console Power Switch Assembly.
3. Disconnect the Console Power Switch cable at the CPU board J6 connector.
4. Remove four (4) screws retaining the Display Subassembly and gently move it aside
until the Console Power Switch is exposed.
6—ASSEMBLY &
DISASSEMBLY
5. Remove four (4) retaining screws from the Console Power Switch mounting plate
(item 11) and remove button mounting plate. Then remove Console Power Switch
Assembly.
6. Install Switch Kit and perform assembly procedures above in reverse order.
6.2.8 CONSOLE INTERFACE BOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Perform removal procedure 6.2.3.
2. Remove harness assembly (item 10) from Interface board (item 4), disconnect at
the Interface board (item 4) J3 connector.
3. Remove two (2) mounting bracket retaining screws from (item 13). Remove Inter-
face Board (item 4) with mounting bracket (item 13).
4. Separate mounting bracket (item 13) from Interface Board (item 4) by removing
two (2) standoff nuts.
NOTE: Be sure to retain mounting bracket (item 13). This bracket must be in-
stalled to the Interface Board (item 4) when it is replaced.
5. Install Interface Board P/N: 802102-1 and perform assembly procedures above in
reverse order.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-17
6.2.9 CONSOLE ASSEMBLY

Refer to Figures 6-2-1 thru 6-2-3 for Console P/N: 814101.
Refer to Figures 6-2-4 thru 6-2-6 for Console P/N: 814400.
1. Place the top cover on a soft, clean surface to prevent damage to the finish (i.e.,
table top with soft cloth in between cover and table). Position the cover so that it's
inside surface faces up and the switch assembly is now in the upper left corner.
2. Push Console Switch button into the opening provided until seated.
NOTE: Clean mounting surface with alcohol before mounting switch.
3. Place Console Power Switch Assembly (item 8) over the Console Switch button.
Install Power Switch mounting plate (item 11).
4. Position the touch screen (item 5) over the large opening in the top cover so the
harness and connector are at the right side.
5. Move the Console Power Switch cable to side, then place the Display Subassembly
(item 12) over the touch screen so the harness and connector are at the right side.
6—ASSEMBLY &
DISASSEMBLY
Secure assembly with four (4) mounting screws (item 21).
CAUTION!
Do not over-tighten screws. Over-tightening the screw will damage the unit.
6. Mount the Console CPU board (item 3) on the standoffs provided. Install two (2)
retaining screws to secure the CPU board. Install the following cables:
Touchscreen cable to J2
Display cable to J8
Switch assembly cable (item 8) to J6
Backlight cable to J7
7. Place the back cover (item 7) on a bench with the inside surface facing up.
8. Install Interface Board (item 4) and mounting bracket (item 13) in the slots provid-
ed. Secure mounting bracket to back cover with two (2) retaining screws.
9. Install harness assembly (item 10) to the Interface Board J3 connector.
10. Move back cover close to the front cover. Install Interface Board cable (item 10) to
J5 on the CPU board.
11. The software can be downloaded to the console if required. Refer to the down-
load process described in Chapter 10, Software Installation.
12. Place back cover onto front cover and install four (4) retaining screws.
13. Install two torque hinges (item 20) onto the back cover mounting pads using six
screws with lockwashers (item 22).
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-2-18
6—ASSEMBLY &
DISASSEMBLY
This Page Intentionally Left Blank.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-1
6.3 POWERHEAD
DANGER!
Before disassembling the Powerhead, follow the power off instructions
listed in each disassembly/assembly section.
WARNING!
Always remove Powerhead from magnet room before disassembly. Fail-
ure to follow this warning could result in personnel injury or equipment
damage.
The Powerhead assembly consist of the following components:

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
• Powerhead
A
10/15 30 ml 60 ml
/20 ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
Figure 6-3-1 Powerhead on Remote Stand
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-2
6.3.1 POWERHEAD REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS

Find No. Item No. Part Description
814300 POWERHEAD ASSY
1 802743 Kit See Section 6-9 Kits
2* MAINFRAME, MACHINED
3 802371 GEAR, 24DP 32T
5* MACHINED, MOTOR MOUNT
6* PILOT, MOTOR GEAR
7* GUIDE PLATE
8 802912S NEST, SYRINGE HOLDER,
Also in 814748S Kit,
See Section 6-9 Kits
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
9 802327 GUIDE BUSHING

11 In 802744 Kit,
or 802746 Kit, See Section 6-9 Kits
12* FLAG, A-SIDE
13* METRIC, LEAD NUT
14* FLAG, B-SIDE
15* METRIC, LEAD SCREW
16* RAM
18 802388 HOLDER, LOAD CELL
20 802386 PRESSURE WASHER
21 802389 RAM FACE
22 802344 ROD, OUTER SUPPORT
23 802741S Kit See Section 6-9 Kits
24* BLOCK, ADJUSTMENT
25* PIVOT
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-3
6.3.1 POWERHEAD REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS (CONT’D)

26 814302-1S Kit See Section 6-9 Kits,
27 802744 Kit See Section 6-9 Kits,
28 802744 Kit See Section 6-9 Kits,
29 814315S KEYPAD ASSY, POWERHEAD, Also in 814895S Kit,
See Section 6-9 Kits,
30 814301-1S PCB ASSY, POWERHEAD
31 802110 CABLE ASSY, INTERFACE
32 802303SR Kit See Section 6-9 Kits,
33 802332 WIPER
34 802381 PIVOT BUSHING
35 802382 PIVOT WASHER
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
36 802383 CAP, PIVOT
37 802384 THRUST WASHER, PIVOT
38 802385 PILOT BUSHING, MOTOR
40* Shield, MOTOR
41 802744 Kit 1/8” DOWEL PIN, 316 S.S.
42 802903 DETENT, SYRINGE HOLDER, Also in 802744 Kit, or
814748S Kit, See Section 6-9 Kits
43 802368 MACHINED, SUPPORT ARM
44* ADHESIVE,SILICONE,CLEAR
47 802313-1 PCB ASSY, SYRINGE SIZE SENSING
48 814302-1S Kit See Section 6-9 Kits,
49 802317 HARNESS ASSY, SIZE SENSING
50 802318 HARNESS ASSY, ENCODER
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-4

53 802396 BOTTOM COVER, FRONT, POWERHEAD
54 802397 BOTTOM COVER, BACK, POWERHEAD
56 In 814748S Kit,
57 In 802744 Kit,
59 In 802744 Kit,
or 802741S Kit, See Section 6-9 Kits
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
60 In 802744 Kit,
61 802744 Kit SCREW, M4, 12 MM,BHCS,SS-A4,BLUE
62 802744 Kit SCREW, M4, 10 MM, PR, PH, SS-A4, BLUE DYE
63 802744 Kit SCREW, M5, 10 MM, PR, PH, SS-A4, BLUE DYE
64 802679 CLAMP, VINYL COATED
66* GROMMET, CONTINUOUS
70 In 802744 Kit,
73 In 802744 Kit,
74 802718S KNOB, M8
76* LOCTITE 242,BLUE,NUT LOCK
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-5

77* SEALANT, SILICONE LUBRICANT
78 802303SR Kit See Section 6-9 Kits,
79* LOCTITE 609,GREEN,OR RED COMPOUND
81* GREASE-MULTI-PURPOSE AEROSOL
82 In 802744 Kit,
or 814748S Kit, (7 Places) See Section 6-9 Kits
83 802913S NEST COVER, SYRINGE HOLDER,
Also in 814748S Kit,
See Section 6-9 Kits
802730 SYRINGE ADAPTER (WITH LABEL)
84* TY-WRAP TIES
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
87 In 802744 Kit,
91* LABEL, S/N
92* LABEL,DIRECTION-ENABLE/INJECT
95 In 802744 Kit,
96 In 802744 Kit,
99 SCREW, SET, M5 8 MM, SS-#4, BLUE DYE
100 BALL, 5/32” DIA
101 LABEL, WARNING, PINCH POINT
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-6
6—DISASSEMBLY

REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-7
74 37 36
51
46
76 1
35 3 38
57
34
4 76
25 5
22 43 57
41
8 19
70 35
62 61
SEE NOTE 2 77 62
24 70
92 6
96 80 79 26
6—DISASSEMBLY
58 67
REASSEMBLY
77 58
27
28
7 79 LIGHTLY COAT SIDE WALL
OR COUNTER BORE
68
33 58
9 39 79
71
17 2
90
60 12
20 10 81
11
77 73
4
14 62
13
23
23 REF
18 59
15 81
21 77 16
818507-M 2020-05-05 Figure 6-3-1 Powerhead Assembly (P/N 814300-B Sht 1)

6-3-8
50 REF LOAD CELL CABLE ROUTING

48 REF
REF 23
REF 49 REF
90 71 125 REF
7 REF
99 100
32
30 78 60
DETAIL A
62 84
TOP VIEW 64
89
82 90
23 48
6—DISASSEMBLY
90
63 69
REASSEMBLY
64 REF
REF 23
SEE DETAIL A
P9 50
P8 P7 REF
FROM “B” MOTOR
FROM “A” MOTOR 95
REF 50
56
JA1
JB JA 43
JB1
50 TO ‘A’ MOTOR
48
50 49
84 (85)
TO “B”MOTOR
47 42 BOTTOM VIEW
40 87
95
END VIEW

6-3-9
45
101
29
APPLY ADHESIVE
44 TO BOTTOM SURFACE
& INSIDE OF COVER
A x xxx
xx
xx
x
x
B x xx
xx
x
x
A B
52
31
REF
31
54
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
8.00 .06
85 86
62
(81)
(85)
83
53
91
87
82
91
PART NUMBER AND

CURRENT REV
MMYY AND FOUR (4)
DIGIT SERIAL NUMBER
DETAIL B
BACK VIEW

6-3-10
Power Control Powerhead Board

P1 Connector Wire Color Connectors J7, J8, J9
P1:24 BLACK J7-11
P1:9 RED J7-12
P1:39 BROWN J7-2
P1:25 YELLOW J7-1
P1:30 WHITE J7-3
GND SCREW NONE J7-4
P1:20 GREEN J7-5
P1:26 ORANGE J7-6
P1:40 BLUE J7-7
P1:13 BROWN J7-8
P1:41 YELLOW J7-9
P1:27 PINK J7-10
TAN
P1:8 BLACK J8-9
P1:22 RED J8-8
P1:29 WHITE J8-4
P1:43 GREEN J8-3
P1:37 ORANGE J8-2
P1:23 BLUE J8-1
6—DISASSEMBLY
P1:14 PURPLE J8-14

P1:42 SLATE J8-13 Pin 1
REASSEMBLY
P1:38 PURPLE J8-6 J8 Powerhead Board

P1:10 GRAY J8-7 (P/N 802301-1)
J7
P1:28 PINK J8-12 Connectors
GND SCREW NONE J8-15
P1:11 TAN J8-10 J9
P1:12 RED/YELLOW J8-11 P2 P1
P1:5 RED/GREEN J8-5 Pin 1
RED/BLACK - JA
P1:21 BLACK J9-1
P1:7 RED J9-2 JB Powerhead
P1:36 WHITE J9-3 Motor Connections
P1:6 GREEN J9-5 JB1
P1:35 ORANGE J9-6
P1:34 BLUE J9-4 JA1
J9-7
GND SCREW NONE J9-8
Power Control Powerhead

P2 Connector Wire Color Motor Connections
P2:18 BLUE JA-1
P2:23 YELLOW JA-3
P2:21 GREEN JA-4
GND SCREW NONE -
P2:17 WHITE/BLUE JB-1
P2:26 WHITE/YELLOW JB-3
P2:20 WHITE/GREEN JB-4
GND SCREW NONE -
P2:24 RED/BLUE JB1-1
P2:22 RED/YELLOW JB1-3
P2:27 RED/GREEN JB1-4
GND SCREW NONE -
P2:25 BLACK/BLUE JA1-1
P2:19 BLACK/YELLOW JA1-3
P2:28 BLACK/GREEN JA1-4
GND SCREW NONE -
818507-M 2020-05-05
Figure 6-3-4 Powerhead Cable (P/N 802303)
6-3-11
6.3.2 POWERHEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION FROM CEILING SUSPENSION

The installation steps and procedure for mounting the powerhead to the ceiling
suspension systems are defined in Sections A-8 through A-12 of this manual.
To remove or reinstall the powerhead perform the reverse order of the steps in
Sections A-8 through A-12 of this manual.
6.3.3 POWERHEAD COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Powerhead covers consist of four units:
Syringe holder nest cover (item 83)
Bottom back cover (item 54)
Top cover (item 52)
6—DISASSEMBLY
Bottom front cover (item 53)
REASSEMBLY
NOTE: Powerhead covers can be removed while mounted to the stand.
NOTE Remove the Powerhead assembly from the magnet room during cover
removal and installation.
6.3.3.1 Syringe Holder Nest Cover Removal/Installation
1. Turn off all power to the OptiStar Elite injector.
2. Remove Powerhead assembly from magnet room.
3. Remove all syringes if present.
4. Remove syringe holder nest cover (item 83) three (3) retaining screws. Remove
syringe holder nest cover (item 83).
5. To reinstall, perform the procedures above in reverse order.
6.3.3.2 Bottom Back Cover Removal/Installation
4. Remove bottom back cover (item 54) four (4) retaining screws. Remove bottom
back cover.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-12
6.3.3.3 Top Cover Removal/Installation

4. Remove all bottom covers as described in sections 6.3.3.1, 6.3.3.3 and 6.3.3.4.
5. Lift top cover off until keypad assembly (item 29) cable connector is exposed. Dis-
connect the keypad connector at the keypad, and remove top cover.
6.3.3.4 Bottom Front Cover Removal/Installation
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
4. Remove syringe holder nest cover as described in section 6.3.3.1. Remove bottom
back cover as described in section 6.3.3.2.
5. Remove bottom back cover (item 53) eight (8) retaining screws. Remove bottom
front cover. NOTE: The top cover will be free to remove at this point.
6.3.4 POWERHEAD BOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Remove Powerhead assembly from magnet room.
1. Remove all Powerhead covers as described in section 6.3.3. Refer to Figure 6-3-1
and 6-3-2.
2. Disconnect all connections to the Powerhead board.
3. Remove six (6) retaining screws (item 90) and lift off Powerhead board.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-13
6.3.5 POWERHEAD CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Disconnect the Powerhead cable from the Power Control. Remove Powerhead
assembly from magnet room.
1. Remove all Powerhead covers as described in section 6.3.3.
2. Remove four (4) retaining screws from shield motor cover (item 40). Also, remove
two (2) Powerhead board rear retaining screws. Carefully slide shield motor cover
(item 40) off.
3. Cut rear cable wire Ty-wrap.
4. Before removing motor and encoder connectors, write down connector wire orien-
tations. This will ensure connectors are not flipped during the installation process.
Disconnect JA, JA1, JB, and JB1 connectors and ground wires. Also, disconnect the
ground wire connection next to the Powerhead cable retaining bracket.
5. At the Powerhead retaining bracket, cut the two (2) Ty-wraps (one on each side).
6—DISASSEMBLY
Remove four (4) retaining screws (item 60) the Powerhead retaining bracket. Care-
REASSEMBLY
fully remove Powerhead cable.
6.3.6 MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Refer to Figure 6-3-1 and 6-3-2.
1. Remove the bottom back cover as described in section 6.3.3.2.
2. Before removing motor and encoder connectors, write down connector wire orien-
tations. This will ensure connectors are not flipped during the installation process.
Disconnect JA, JA1, JB, and JB1 connectors and ground wires. Also, disconnect mo-
tor encoder connectors (item 50).
3. Remove three (3) motor retaining screws and washers (item 70 and 72). Remove
motor and gear assembly. Be careful not to lose pilot bearing (item 38).
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-14
6.3.7 POWERHEAD END LIMIT SENSING BOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Move both rams to their middle retracted position.
4. Position Powerhead with rams in the vertical position.
5. Remove both ram face caps (item 21). Remove inner O-ring (item 73) to expose
both set screws (item 59). With a 1.5 mm allen wrench, remove both set screws
(item 59).
6. At the Powerhead board, disconnect both size sensing cables (item 49).
7. Disconnect each connector at the Limit Sensing Boards (item 26). Take note of the
connectors used.
8. Remove six (6) screws (item 58) from guide plate (item 7). Carefully slide guide
6—DISASSEMBLY
plate and ram assembly from base.

REASSEMBLY
9. Carefully slide the Limit Sensing Boards (item 26) from their runners. Take note of
the position adjustment screws (item 27) are in, then remove adjustment screws
(item 27) from Limit Sensing Boards (item 26) using adjustment runner tool (P/N
802731).
10. To reinstall, perform the procedures above in reverse order. Ensure all O-rings are
properly lubricated.
NOTE: When reinstalling a Limit Sensing Board, ensure the load cell (item 23)
cable and conduit is correctly positioned in the slots provided. Also, End Limit
calibration must be performed when this board is replaced.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-15
6.3.8 LOAD CELL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4. Position Powerhead with rams in the vertical position.
5. Remove both ram face caps (item 21). Remove inner O-ring (item 73) to expose
both set screws (item 59). With a 1 1/2 mm allen wrench, remove both set screws
(item 59).
6. Disconnect each connector at the Limit Sensing Boards (item 26). Take note of the
connectors used. Cut all Ty-wraps retaining the Limit Sensing Cable. Also, bend
cable retainers to allow for cable removal.
7. Remove four (4) screws (item 60) from bushing retainer (item 17). Lift wiper (item
33) and bushing guide (item 9) from guide plate (item 7).
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
8. Remove load cell cable and conduit from powerhead by feeding connector end
through the opening provide in the guide plate (item 7).
9. To install load cell, perform the procedures above in reverse order.
NOTE: When installing a load cell kit, ensure the load cell (item 23) cable and
conduit is correctly positioned in the slots provided.
10. Load cell replacement requires an injection pressure check. Refer to Section 4.2.9.
6.3.9 END LIMIT HARNESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Disconnect End Limit harness (item 48) connections at the End Limit Sensing board
(item 26). At the Powerhead board (item 30), Disconnect the End Limit harness at
J3 and J4 connectors.
3. Cut wire Ty-wraps retaining the harness.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-16
6.3.10 ENCODER HARNESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Disconnect Encoder harness (item 50) connections at the Powerhead board (item
30) and at the motors (item 1).
3. Cut wire Ty-wraps retaining the Encoder harnesses.
6.3.11 SYRINGE SIZE SENSING BOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

There are two (2) Syringe Size Sensing Boards for each ram. Refer to Figure 6-3-
2 for location and procedures.
6—DISASSEMBLY

REASSEMBLY
1. Remove syringe holder nest cover as described in section 6.3.3.1.

2. Disconnect cable (item 49) connections from Syringe Size Sensing boards (item 47).
3. Remove Syringe Size Sensing board retaining screws (item 87) and detent syringe
holder (item 42).
6.3.12 DETENT SYRINGE HOLDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Remove syringe holder nest cover as described in section 6.3.3.1.
2. Disconnect cable (item 49) connections from Syringe Size Sensing boards (item 47).
3. Remove Syringe Size Sensing board retaining screws (item 87) and detent syringe
holder (item 42).
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-17
6.3.13 SYRINGE SIZE SENSING HARNESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Disconnect cable (item 49) connections from Syringe Size Sensing boards (item 47)
and at the Powerhead board (item 30) J10 and J11 connectors.
3. Cut wire Ty-wraps from outer support rods (item 22).
3. Feed Syringe Size Sensing cable (item 49) connectors through the slot provided in
the syringe nest holder (item 8).
6.3.14 SYRINGE NEST HOLDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
3. Remove syringe nest holder cover as described in section 6.3.3.1.
4. Disconnect cable (item 49) connections from Syringe Size Sensing boards (item 47)
and feed cable connectors through the slot provided in the syringe nest holder
(item 8).
5. Remove four (4) screws retaining the syringe nest holder (item 8) to the support
rods. Remove the syringe nest holder.
6.3.15 SUPPORT ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Rotate knob (item 74) counterclockwise to remove.
2. Remove pivot cap (item 36).
3. Remove retaining ring (item 46).
4. Slide Powerhead from support arm (item 43).
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-3-18
6.3.16 BEARING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Removal
1. Move both rams to the fully extended position.
4. Remove four (4) retaining screws from shield motor cover (item 40). Also, remove
two (2) Powerhead board rear retaining screws. Carefully slide shield motor cover
(item 40) off.
5. Remove the Powerhead cable as described in section 6.4.5.
6. Remove 6 mm lead screw nut (item 68) from lead screw (item 15).
7. Remove Powerhead motors as described in section 6.3.6.
6—DISASSEMBLY
8. Rotate lead screw (item 15) to access gear set screws. Loosen both gear set screws
REASSEMBLY
(item 57). Then remove both lead screw gears (item 3).
9. Remove five (5) screws (item 58) from motor mount (item 5). Remove bearing as-
sembly from lead screws.
10. Remove bearing retaining ring (item 11) and bearings (item 10) from motor
mount housing (item 5).
Reassembly
11. Install new bearings into motor mount (item 5). Install bearing retaining ring (item
11). NOTE: Ensure the bearing retaining ring is fully seated during installation.
12. Slide motor mount assembly (item 5) onto lead screws and secure assembly with
five (5) mounting screws (item 58).
13. Install lead screw gears (item 3) onto lead screws (item 15). Ensure set screws are
positioned to contact the lead screw flat surfaces when tightened. At this time
simply snug the gear set screws on the lead screw flat surfaces, do not tighten the
gear set screws.
Rotate both lead screws until the gear set screws are accessible after motors installa-
tion.
14. Reinstall motor assembly.
15. Reinstall 6 mm lead screw nut (item 68) and tighten nut.
16. Tighten gear set screws (item 57).
17. Reinstall Powerhead cable.
18. Reinstall shield motor cover. Then reinstall all Powerhead covers.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-1
6.4 POWER CONTROL

DANGER!
Before attempting any disassembly procedure, turn off all power to the
WARNING!
Always remove Power Control from magnet room before disassembly.
Failure to follow this warning could result in personnel injury or equip-
ment damage.
WARNING!
The Power Control contains special Non-Ferrous screws. They are identi-
fied by blue dye. Always use Non-Ferrous blue dye screws if replace-
ment is required. Failure to follow this warning could result in personnel
6—DISASSEMBLY
WARNING!
REASSEMBLY
Before removing any Power Control PC boards, ensure proper static
protection devices are used. Failure to follow this warning could result
in equipment damage.
Injector operations are controlled by the Power Control. PC boards and other
Power Control components are contained in the following four units: Backplate
Control, Front Control Encloser, Rear Control Encloser, and Front Control Cover.
Replacement components contained in these units are list in section 6-4-1.
Backplate
Control
Rear Control
Encloser
Front Control
Encloser
Front Control
Cover
Figure 6-4-1 Power Control Assembled Unit
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-2
6.4.1 POWER CONTROL REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS

814200 POWER CONTROL ASSY
1 802251 FRONT CONTROL ENCLOSER
2 802252 REAR CONTROL ENCLOSER
3 814222S FRONT CONTROL COVER
4 802237 BACKPLATE, CONTROL
5 814201-1S CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY
6 802202-1/ POWER BOARD ASSEMBLY/
814202-1 REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY
7 802203-1 DRIVER BOARD ASSEMBLY
8 802204-1 COMMUNICATION BOARD ASSEMBLY
9 802207SR INTERCONNECT BOARD ASSEMBLY
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
10 802263 EMI GASKET

11 802212 POWERHEAD MOTORS HARNESS ASSEMBLY
12 802213SR POWERHEAD COMMUNICATION HARNESS ASSEMBLY
13 802214SR CONSOLE COMMUNICATION HARNESS ASSEMBLY
14 802215 POWER CONTROL SWITCH
15 802635 RUBBER FOOT
16 802261S STAND OFF ASSEMBLY
17* LABEL, S/N
18* NON-FERROUS SCREW, M5, 10 MM, PR, PH, SS-A4,
BLUE DYE
19* NON-FERROUS SCREW, M4, 10 MM, PR, PH, SS-A4,
BLUE DYE
20 802711 JACK SCREW KIT, SOCKET
22* NON-FERROUS SCREW, M2.5, 6 MM, PR, PH, SS-A4,
BLUE DYE
23* NON-FERROUS WASHER, EXT. TOOTH, M2.5, SS-A4,
BLUE DYE
26 FOAM PAD, FRONT COVER
28 WASHER, FLAT, M3, SSA4, BLUE DYE
29 LOCTITE 609,GREEN,RET COMPOUND
31 SCREW, M3, 10MM, PR, PH, SS-A4, BLUE DYE
32 SHIELD, POWER CONTROL
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-3

33 FOOT-RUBBER-CONSOLE
35 FOAM PAD, BACKPLATE
36 4-40 X .25 JACKSCREW,.156 HEX,SS-A4,BLUE DYE
NOTE: All fasteners are part of fastener Service Kit (P/N 802744)
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-4
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-5
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLED VIEW
INSIDE OF FRONT COVER VIEW
J1, J2
J3
I/O
EXPLODED VIEW (BOTTOM)
REAR ASSEMBLY VIEW
818507-M 2020-05-05 Figure 6-4-2 Power Control Assembly (P/N 814200 Rev L)
6-4-6
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Figure 6-4-3 Power Control Assembly (P/N 814200 Rev M)

818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-7
6.4.2 BACKPLATE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove all external connections.
3. Remove Power Control from Magnet Room.
4. Position Power Control Upside down.
5. At the rear of assembly, remove six (6) screws from backplate cover (item 4).
6. When removing the backplate cover, keep in mind there are internal harness con-
nections. Gently remove backplate cover (item 4) from rear enclosure cover (item
2).
7. On the Driver board (item 7), disconnect Head motor harness (item 11) from J2
connector.
8. On the Communication board (item 8), disconnect the following items:
6—DISASSEMBLY
Powerhead Communication harness (item 12) from J3 connector, Console Com-
REASSEMBLY
munication harness (item 13) from J2 connector, and Power Control switch harness
(item 14) from J1 connector.
9. The Backplate Cover (item 4) can be set aside.
10. To reinstall the Backplate Cover, perform steps 1 thru 8 in reverse order.
6.4.3 DRIVER BOARD (802203-1) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove all external connections
5. Remove Backplate Cover as described in section 6.3.2.
6. Remove two (2) screws (item 19). These screws secure the Driver Board heat sink to
the Rear Cover Enclosure.
7. Before removing the Driver Board (item 7) and shield (item 32), take note of its
countersink slot location in the Rear Cover Enclosure. Grasp Driver Board and
Shield, then pull straight outward to disconnect from the Power Control Intercon-
nect Board (item 9).
8. To reinstall Driver Board, perform steps 1 thru 7 in reverse order.
9. Calibration must be performed when this board is replaced.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-8
6.4.4 COMMUNICATION BOARD (802204-1) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

5. Remove Backplate Cover as described in section 6.3.2.
6. Before removing the Communication Board (item 8), take note of its countersink
slot location in the Rear Cover Enclosure. Grasp Communication Board and pull
straight outward to disconnect from the Power Control Interconnect Board (item
9).
7. To reinstall Communication Board, perform steps 1 thru 7 in reverse order.
6.4.5 CPU BOARD (814201-1S) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

2. Disconnect cabling to the Power Control Unit.
4. Remove four (4) screws (item 19) from Front Cover Encloser item 1.
5. Remove Front Control Cover (item 3).
6. Before removing the CPU Board item 5, take note of its countersink slot location in
the Rear Cover Enclosure. Grasp CPU Board and pull straight outward to disconnect
from the Power Control Interconnect Board (item 9).
7. To reinstall CPU Board, perform steps 1 thru 7 in reverse order.
8. Calibration must be performed when this board is replaced.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-9
6.4.6 POWER/REGULATOR BOARD (802202-1/814202-1) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4. Remove four (4) screws (item 19) from Front Cover Encloser item 1.
5. Remove Front Control Cover item (3).
6. Before removing the Power/Regulator Board (item 6), take note of its countersink
slot location in the Rear Cover Enclosure. Grasp Power/Regulator Board and pull
straight outward to disconnect from the Power Control Interconnect Board (item
9).
7. To reinstall Power/Regulator Board, perform steps 1 thru 7 in reverse order.
6.4.7 INTERCONNECT BOARD (802207SR) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
4. To remove the Interconnect Board, remove components as defined in the following
sections:
Section 6-4-2
Section 6-4-3
Section 6-4-4
Section 6-4-5
Section 6-4-6
5. Remove four (4) standoffs (item 16) from Rear Control Encloser (item 2).
6. When the Rear Control Encloser (item 2), and Front Control Encloser (item 3) are
separated, the Interconnect Board is free for removal.
NOTE: Take note of the Interconnect Board orientation before removal.
7. To reinstall Interconnect Board, perform steps 1 thru 7 in reverse order.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-10
6.4.8 POWERHEAD MOTOR HARNESS (802212) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

5. At the rear of assembly, remove six (6) screws from Backplate Cover (item 4).
6. Gently remove Backplate Cover (item 4) from rear enclosure cover (item 2).
7. On the Driver board (item 7), disconnect Powerhead motor harness (item 11) from
J2 connector.
8. At the Backplate Cover (item 4), remove two (2) retaining screws from connector
(item 11).
6—DISASSEMBLY
9. Feed Head motor harness (item 11) through Backplate Cover (item 4) to remove.
REASSEMBLY
10. To reinstall the Powerhead motor harness, perform steps 1 thru 9 in reverse order.
6.4.9 POWERHEAD COMMUNICATION HARNESS (802213SR)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove all external connections
7. On the Communication board (item 8), disconnect Communication harness (item
12) from J3 connector.
8. At the Backplate Cover (item 4), remove two (2) retaining screws from connector
(item 12).
9. Feed Head Communication harness (item 12) through Backplate Cover (item 4) to
remove.
10. To reinstall the Communication harness, perform steps 1 thru 9 in reverse order.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-11
6.4.10 CONSOLE COMMUNICATION HARNESS (802214SR)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
7. On the Communication board (item 8), disconnect Communication harness (item
12) from J2 connector.
8. At the Backplate Cover (item 4), remove two (2) retaining socket standoffs (item 20)
from connector (item 13).
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
9. To reinstall the Communication harness, perform steps 1 thru 8 in reverse order.
6.4.11 POWER SWITCH (802215) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
7. On the Communication board (item 8), disconnect Power harness (item 14) from J1
connector.
8. Grasp and squeeze Power Switch retaining clips while pushing forward to remove
from Backplate Cover (item 4).
9. Feed Power Switch harness (item 14) through Backplate Cover (item 4) to remove.
10. To reinstall the Power Switch and harness, perform steps 1 thru 9 in reverse order.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-4-12
6—DISASSEMBLY

REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-1
6.5 POWER SUPPLY

The DC Power Supply (P/N 814450 or 814600) is used to power the OptiStar
Elite system. Internal to the DC Power Supply are several key components. The
primary component is the switching Power Supply. P/N: 814450 can be one of
two brands: International Power, or Condor. P/N: 814600 will be the CUI INC.
brand. Replacement components for the Power Supply (P/N 814450) are listed
in section 6.5.1 and for the Power Supply (P/N 814600) in section 6.5.8.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-2
6.5.1 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS

(For models with the 814450 Power Supply)
814450 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY

1 802711 JACK SCREW KIT, SOCKET
2 240E3335 AC INLET MODULE, FILTERED, 6A
3 240E3336 FUSE DRAWER, AC INLET MODULE
5 251769 HARNESS CLAMP-1/2” DIA.
6 340E0025 POWER SUPPLY, +27 VDC
7 380E0072 TERMINAL,STUD MOUNT,DUAL .250 90 DEGREE
9 802451-1 POWER SUPPLY LE BOARD ASSEMBLY
10 802402 INSULATOR, POWER SUPPLY
11 802403 AC DISTRIBUTION HARNESS ASSEMBLY
6—DISASSEMBLY
12 802404 DC DISTRIBUTION HARNESS ASSEMBLY

REASSEMBLY
13 802407 LED ASSY

14* LABEL, WIRING
15 814435S FRONT COVER
16 802635 FOOT, RUBBER
17* NUT,M4X.7,HEX,W/LOCKWASHER
18* SCREW,M4X.7,10 MM,PR,TH,BLK
19 802428 POWER SUPPLY HOUSING
20* LABEL,WARNING(SHOCK&EXPLOSION HAZARD)
21* LABEL, RATING, POWER SUPPLY
25* GROUND LABEL-CARD
26 802455 BACKPLATE, ELECTRONICS
27 172L0078 FUSE-4AMP,SLO-BLO 5 MM
28 LABEL, CONNECTOR I.D.
29* TY-WRAP TIES
32* SCREW, M4 X .7, 6 MM, PR, PH, W/LW
33 4-40 X .31 JACKSCREW
34 LABEL, MR UNSAFE
35 LABEL, ‘OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS’ BLUE ICON, 3RD EDITION
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-3
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
SEE GROUND
STUD FOR DETAILS
BROWN (L) TO PCB-J7
25 BLUE (N) TO PCB-J7
G/Y (GND) TO GROUND STUD
REAR PANEL WIRING DETAIL
7 (2 PLACES)
17 (2 PLACES)
TO POWER SUPPLY GND
TO GND TO AC INLET GND
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GROUND STUD DETAIL POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT TERMINAL DETAIL
Figure 6-5-1 Power Supply Components (P/N: 814450)
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-4
6.5.2 POWER SUPPLY FUSE REPLACEMENT


1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply. The fuse drawer, located at the
rear of the Power Supply resides in the AC inlet module (item 3). Two fuses are con-
tained in the fuse drawer.
2. With a small screw driver, push fuse drawer tabs in while gently prying from side to
side until removal is possible.
3. To reinstall fuse drawer, line up fuse drawer key and push in until a snap is heard.
6.5.3 REMOVAL OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT
1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply.

2. Disconnect all cabling to the Power Supply.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
3. If the Power Supply unit is wall mounted, pull latch forward and lift up to remove
unit from wall mount bracket.
6.5.4 DC POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT

1. Perform REMOVAL OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT steps in section 6.5.3.
2. Remove four (4) buttonhead screws (item 18) from rear of Power Supply housing.
3. Gently slide Power Supply frame from housing until LED harness (item 13) connec-
tion is exposed. Disconnect LED harness connection.
4. Disconnect AC wiring from terminal strip location (item 11).
5. Disconnect DC distribution wiring at the terminal strip (item 12).
6. Remove four (4) screws (item 3)2 retaining Power Supply to frame.
To reinstall Power Supply, perform the steps above in reverse order.
NOTE: When reinstalling Power Supply, be sure to follow label wiring diagram
(located on the insulator) when making terminal connections.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-5
6.5.5 PC BOARD REPLACEMENT


tion is exposed. Disconnect LED harness connection at the PC board.
4. Disconnect two (2) AC distribution connectors (item 11), and DC distribution con-
nectors (item 12) at the PC board.
5. Remove six (6) jacknuts (connection side) securing PC board to backplate. Lift PC
board from backplate.
To reinstall PC board, perform the steps above in reverse order.
6—DISASSEMBLY
6.5.6 POWER ON/OFF SWITCH REPLACEMENT
REASSEMBLY

4. At the PC board, disconnect AC wire connector (item 11) to AC inlet module (item
3).
5. Remove four (4) screws (item 32) retaining Power Supply to frame. Move Power
Supply to the side to expose AC inlet module retainers.
6. Remove the three (3) leads from the AC inlet module (item 3).
7. The AC inlet module is retained to the backplate by four (4) retaining clips (two (2)
on each side). With a small screwdriver, push in on each retaining clip and remove
AC inlet module.
To reinstall AC inlet module, perform the steps above in reverse order.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-6
6.5.7 LED ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT


2. Remove four (4) buttonhead screws from rear of Power Supply housing (item 18).
4. Remove four (4) buttonhead screws (item 18) from Power Supply housing front
cover. Remove front cover.
5. From inside of front cover, grasp LED socket and pull to remove. The LED green lens
is retained in the front cover by the socket. Be careful not to lose green lens when
removing socket.
6. To remove LED from socket, gently grab LED with a pair of needle nose pliers and
6—DISASSEMBLY
pull from socket.

REASSEMBLY
To reinstall LED socket, perform the steps above in reverse order.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-7
6.5.8 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS

814600 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY

1 172L0078 FUSE-4AMP,SLO-BLO 5 MM
2* TY-WRAP TIES
3 240E3336 FUSE DRAWER, AC INLET MODULE
4 240E3335 AC INLET MODULE, FILTERED, 6A
5* DUST CAP, METAL, FOR USE ON DB9 FEMALE
6 251769 HARNESS CLAMP-1/2” DIA.
8 340L0038 POWER SUPPLY, +27 VDC
9* GROUND LABEL-CARD
10 802635 FOOT, RUBBER
6—DISASSEMBLY
11 814403 AC DISTRIBUTION HARNESS ASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
12 814460 POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE BOARD ASSEMBLY
13 814601 POWER SUPPLY MOUNTING PLATE
14* LABEL, RATING, POWER SUPPLY
15 844456 SCREW-#6-19 X 1/2 PLASTIC
16 844471 4-40 X .31 JACKSCREW
17 844652 COVER, POWER SUPPLY (LF_GUERBET)
18 901166 HARNESS, POWER SUPPLY CONTROL, ILLUMENA
19 904107 NUT,M4X.7,HEX,W/LOCKWASHER
20 904509 LABEL, ‘OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS’ BLUE ICON, 3RD EDITION
21 802419 SCREW, M4 X .7, 6 MM, PR, PH, W/LW
22 601574 CABLE TIE MOUNTING BASE
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-8
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Figure 6-5-2 Power Supply Components (P/N: 814600)
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-9
6.5.9 POWER SUPPLY FUSE REPLACEMENT


1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply. The fuse drawer, located at the
rear of the Power Supply resides in the AC inlet module (item 4). Two fuses are con-
tained in the fuse drawer.
2. With a small screw driver, push fuse drawer tabs in while gently prying from side to
side until removal is possible.
3. To reinstall fuse drawer, line up fuse drawer key and push in until a snap is heard.
6.5.10 REMOVAL OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT
1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply.
6—DISASSEMBLY
2. Disconnect all cabling to the Power Supply.
REASSEMBLY
3. If the Power Supply unit is wall mounted, pull latch forward and lift up to remove
unit from wall mount bracket.
6.5.11 DC POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT


2. Remove four (4) screws (item 15) and four (4) rubber feet (item 10) from the bottom
of the power supply mount plate (item 13).
3. Remove the power supply top cover (item 17).
4. Disconnect the power supply AC distribution harness from the power supply.
5. Disconnect the power supply DC harness from the Power Supply Interface board.
6. Remove the four (4) screws (item 21) holding the power supply to the power sup-
ply mount plate.
To reinstall Power Supply, perform the steps above in reverse order.
NOTE: When reinstalling Power Supply, be sure to follow the service/installa-
tion manual when making terminal connections.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-5-10
6.5.12 PC BOARD REPLACEMENT


4. Disconnect the power supply ac distribution harness (item 11) from the interface
PC board.
5. Disconnect power supply control harness (item 18) and the DC power harness from
the PC board.
6. Remove six (6) jacknuts (connection side) securing PC board to backplate. Lift PC
board from backplate.
6—DISASSEMBLY
To reinstall PC board, perform the steps above in reverse order.

REASSEMBLY
6.5.13 POWER ON/OFF SWITCH REPLACEMENT
For 814600 refer to Figure 6-5-2.

4. Remove the three (3) leads from the AC inlet module (item 4).
5. The AC inlet module is retained to the backplate by four (4) retaining clips (two (2)
on each side). With a small screwdriver, push in on each retaining clip and remove
AC inlet module.
To reinstall AC inlet module, perform the steps above in reverse order.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-6-1
6.6 REMOTE STAND

The Remote Stand consist of a stationary post, base and hanger.
6.6.1 REMOTE STAND REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS
802872 KIT, REMOTE STAND HARDWARE
802850 REMOTE STAND ASSEMBLY
844526S ELITE REMOTE STAND BASE KIT
802862 ELITE REMOTE STAND WHEEL KIT
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Cable Hanger Stationary Post
Wheelbase
Figure 6-6-1 Remote Stand Assembly
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-6-2
6—DISASSEMBLY

REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-7-1
6.7 FILTER
The Filter Assembly is replaced as a KIT 802614SR.
6.7.1 FILTER ASSEMBLY
802600 FILTER ASSEMBLY
31.75mm
12.7mm 6.604mm (.260") (5 Places)
(1.25") 31.75mm Diameter
(.5")
(1.25")
76.2mm
(3")
(FRONT VIEW)
101.6mm
6—DISASSEMBLY
(4")
REASSEMBLY
270.0mm (10.63")
285.75mm (11.25")
76.2mm
(3.0") (SIDE VIEW)
457.2mm (18.0")
Figure 6-7-1 Filter Assembly
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-7-2
6—DISASSEMBLY

REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-8-1
6.8 CEILING SUSPENSION

The ceiling suspension consists of a standard or long column assembly, ar-
ticulating spring arm assembly, and a J-Bow arm that connects to the injector
powerhead.
Ceiling Suspension Systems allow the Optistar Elite powerhead to be flexibly
mounted at a distance from the patient location. Separate manuals and in-
structions for the Suspension System are supplied with each Suspension Sys-
tem shipment. Each kit lists the hardware and tool requirements, and includes
drawings and instructions for installation.
Contact your local Guerbet distributer for more information.
6.8.1 CEILING SUSPENSION REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS
Part No. Description
241411S KIT, CARRIAGE WITH CABLE ATTACHMENT
241412S KIT, LONG COLUMN ASSEMBLY
SUSPENSION
6—CEILING
241415S KIT, STANDARD COLUMN ASSEMBLY
241416S HARDWARE KIT, MRI ANCHORAGE PLATE
241417S HARDWARE KIT, MRI TRACK AND CARRIAGE ASSY
241418S HARDWARE KIT, MRI CARRIAGE ASSY
241419S HARDWARE KIT, MRI CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
241420S KIT; PLASTIC COVERS, STANDARD COLUMN
241421S KIT; PLASTIC COVERS, LONG COLUMN
241422S KIT; PLASTIC COVERS FOR EXTENSION ARM
241423S KIT; PLASTIC COVERS, SPRING ARM
241424S KIT; GROUND WIRES AND MOUNTING SCREWS
241425S HARDWARE KIT, J-BOW AND EXTENSION ARM
241426S HARDWARE KIT, END OF EXTENSION ARM
241428S KIT, SPRING ARM AND J-BOW ARM ASSEMBLY
See Figure 6-8-1 and 6-8-2. Note that the carriage assembly is part of the
optional track assembly.
See Section 6.10 for the corresponding orderable service kit numbers.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-8-2
COLUMN
SPRING
ARM
SUSPENSION
6—CEILING
J-BOW
ARM
Figure 6-8-1 Ceiling Suspension System
Figure 6-8-2 Carriage Assembly
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-9-1
6.9 CABLES
Replacement cables for the OptiStar Elite are illustrated in Figures 6-9-1 and
6-9-2.
For Powerhead and data cable pinout information refer to Chapter 6-10.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-9-2
CONTROL
ROOM
Handbutton
Connection J2
(P/N 802620 (2 m (6 ft)
(P/N 802622 (6 m (20 ft)
Console Console
Communication (P/N 814101 and 814400)
and Power (Rear View)
Connection J1 * NOTE: Do Not Exceed Cable Length,
(From Power Supply to Console) is 92 m (300 ft)
* Data Cable and Power

(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft) O I Power Supply
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 814450)
(Rear View)
EQUIPMENT
6—DISASSEMBLY
ROOM Fuse
REASSEMBLY
Holder
Socket 4 Amp Slow Blow
cable end P/N 172L0078
Power In
Filter (Qty 2)
100-127 / 220-240 V~
(P/N 802600)
MAGNET ROOM * NOTE: Do Not Exceed

Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Power Control) * Comm. Cable and Power
is 46 m (150 ft) (P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
Free Hanging (P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
D-Shell Connector (P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
Powerhead
(P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft)
(P/N 814300)
Optional (P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft)
Ceiling Suspension A 60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
(P/N 241405 or 241413)
Optional
Remote Stand
P
A
50 ml ml
60 ml
125
60 ml ml
30
B
10/15/20
ml
(P/N 802850)
Power Control
(P/N 814200) Note: Ensure
(Rear View) connector
orientation is
Powerhead Cable correct when
(P/N 802303SR) making
10 m (32.8 ft) connection
Figure 6-9-1 Cabling for models with the 814450 Power Supply
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-9-3
Handbutton
Connection J2
Console (P/N 802620 (2 m (6 ft)
(P/N 814101 and 814400) (P/N 802622 (6 m (20 ft)
(Rear View)
Console
Communication
and Power
Connection J1
O I J2 J1
Power Supply
(P/N 814450)
(Rear View)
CONTROL Fuse
ROOM Holder
4 Amp Slow Blow
* NOTE: Do Not Exceed Cable Length, P/N 172L0078
(From Power Supply to Console) is 92 m (300 ft) Power In
(Qty 2) 100-127 / 220-240 V~
* Comm. Cable and Power

(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
6—DISASSEMBLY
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft) Ground Cable
REASSEMBLY
(P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft) (Keep short as possible)
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 801259-1 (.5 m (1.5 ft)
Socket (P/N 801259-3 (.9 m (3 ft)
EQUIPMENT (P/N 801259-7 (2 m (7 ft)
Filter cable end
ROOM (P/N 801259-15 (5 m (15 ft)
(P/N 802600)
Ground Strip
Data Cable Penetration Panel
(P/N 801224-03 (.9 m (3 ft) (Using available 25-pin pass through)
or
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
* NOTE: Not To Exceed

MAGNET ROOM Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Power Control)
is 46 m (150 ft)
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
Powerhead (P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft)
(P/N 814300) (P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft)
A 60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
Optional
Ceiling Suspension J3
(P/N 241405 or 241413)

Optional
Remote Stand
(P/N 802850)
Power Control
P
Note: Ensure
60 ml ml ml
30
A
50 ml ml
10/15/20
60 ml
125
(P/N 814200)
orientation is
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-9-4
CONTROL
ROOM
* Console Data and Power Cable
(P/N 814465-01 (1 m (3.5 ft)
(P/N 814465-02 (2 m (7 ft) Handbutton
(P/N 814465-04 (4 m (15 ft) Connection J2
(P/N 814465-08 (8 m (25 ft) (P/N 802620 (2 m (6 ft)
(P/N 814465-15 (15 m (50 ft) (P/N 802622 (6 m (20 ft)
(P/N 814465-23 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 814465-30 (30 m (100 ft) Console
(P/N 814465-46 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 814101 and 814400)
(Rear View)
Console Communication
and Power Connection J1 * NOTE: Do Not Exceed Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Console) is 92 m (300 ft)
For lengths greater than 46m, add an 801224 cable of the proper length.
* Power Control Data and Power Cable

(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft) Power Supply
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 814600)
(Rear View)
6—DISASSEMBLY
EQUIPMENT apply
REASSEMBLY
ROOM
904509
Fuse Holder
cable end Power In
P/N 172L0078 100-127 / 220-240 V~
Filter (Qty 2)
(P/N 802600)

Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Power Control) * Power Control Data
is 46 m (150 ft) and Power Cable
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
Powerhead
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 814300)
Optional (P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft)
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft)
(P/N 241405 or 241413)
Optional
Remote Stand
P
A
50 ml ml
60 ml
125
60 ml ml
30
B
10/15/20
ml
(P/N 802850)
Power Control
orientation is
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-9-5
* Console Data and Power Cable Handbutton

(P/N 814465-01 (1 m (3.5 ft) Console Connection J2
(P/N 814465-02 (2 m (7 ft) (P/N 814101 and 814400) (P/N 802620 (2 m (6 ft)
(P/N 814465-04 (4 m (15 ft) (Rear View) (P/N 802622 (6 m (20 ft)
(P/N 814465-08 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 814465-15 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 814465-23 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 814465-30 (30 m (100 ft)
(P/N 814465-46 (46 m (150 ft)
Console
Communication
and Power Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC,
Connection J1
apply
904509
CONTROL
Power Supply
ROOM Fuse Holder (P/N 814600)
4 Amp Slow Blow (Rear View)
* NOTE: Do Not Exceed Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Console) is 92 m (300 ft) P/N 172L0078
(Qty 2) Power In
For lengths greater than 46m, add an 801224 cable of the proper length. 100-127 / 220-240 V~

(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
6—DISASSEMBLY
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
REASSEMBLY
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 801259-1 (.5 m (1.5 ft)
Socket (P/N 801259-3 (.9 m (3 ft)
Filter cable end
ROOM (P/N 801259-15 (5 m (15 ft)
(P/N 802600)
Ground Strip
or
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
* NOTE: Not To Exceed Cable Length,

MAGNET ROOM (From Power Supply to Power Control)
is 46 m (150 ft)
* Power Control Data
and Power Cable
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
Powerhead (P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 814300) (P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft)
A 60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft)
Optional
(P/N 241405 or 241413)

Optional
Remote Stand
(P/N 802850)
Power Control
P
Note: Ensure
60 ml ml ml
30
A
50 ml ml
10/15/20
60 ml
125
(P/N 814200)
orientation is
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-9-6
6—DISASSEMBLY

REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-1
6.10 SERVICE KIT PARTS

OptiStar Elite service kit parts are defined in the following sections:
Refer to section 6.3 to view a find number illustration.
Section 6.10.1 Load Cell Service Kit (P/N 802741S)
Section 6.10.2 Bushing Replacement Service Kit (P/N 802742)
Section 6.10.3 Motor Replacement Service Kit (P/N 802743)
Section 6.10.4 Fastener Service Kit (P/N 802744)
Section 6.10.5 Bearing Replacement Kit (P/N 802746)
Section 6.10.6 Cover Kit (P/N 814895S)
Section 6.10.7 Syringe Holder Service Kit (P/N 814748S)
Section 6.10.8 End Limit Kit (P/N 814302-1S)
Section 6.10.9 Powerhead Cable/Gasket Kit (P/N 802303SR)
Section 6.10.10 Console Switch Kit (P/N 802114SR)
Section 6.10.11 Filter Kit (P/N 802614SR)
Section 6.10.12 Display Assembly (P/N 846116S)
Section 6.10.13 Head Communication Harness Assembly (P/N 802213SR)
6—KIT PARTS
Section 6.10.14 Power Control Interconnect Assembly (P/N 802207SR)
Section 6.10.15 Console Communication Harness Assembly (P/N 802214SR)
Section 6.10.16 Power Supply Replacement / Upgrade Service Kit (P/N 814604S)
Section 6.10.17 Power Supply Box Service Kit (P/N 814600S)
Section 6.10.18 Carriage Assy Service Kit (P/N 241411S)
Section 6.10.19 Long Column Assy Service Kit (P/N 241412S)
Section 6.10.20 Standard Column Assy Service Kit (P/N 241415S)
Section 6.10.21 Spring Arm With J-Bow Arm Assy Service Kit (P/N 241428S)
Section 6.10.22 Plastic Covers, Standard Column, Kit (P/N 241420S)
Section 6.10.23 Plastic Covers, Long Column, Kit (P/N 241421S)
Section 6.10.24 Plastic Covers, Extension Arm Kit (P/N 241422S)
Section 6.10.25 Plastic Covers, Spring Arm Kit (P/N 241423S)
Section 6.10.26 Ground Wires And Mounting Screws Kit (P/N 241424S)
Section 6.10.27 Pcb Assy, Power Board Kit (P/N 814202-1S)
Section 6.10.28 Pcb Assy, Power Control Cpu Kit (P/N 814201-1S)
Section 6.10.29 Hardware Kit, Mri Anchorage Plate (P/N 241416S)
Section 6.10.30 Hardware Kit, Mri Track And Carriage Assy (P/N 241417S)
Section 6.10.31 Hardware Kit, Mri Carriage Assy (P/N 241418S)
Section 6.10.32 Hardware Kit, Mri Ceiling Suspension Systems (P/N 241419S)
Section 6.10.33 Hardware Kit, J-Bow And Extension Arm (P/N 241425S)
Section 6.10.34 Hardware Kit, End Of Extension Arm (P/N 241426S)
Section 6.10.35 Universal Console CPU PCB Service Kit (P/N 846101-1S)
Section 6.10.36 Universal Console Touchscreen Service Kit (P/N 814104S)
Section 6.10.37 Optistar Elite Console Service Kit (P/N 814400S)
Section 6.10.38 Optistar Elite Console Display Upgrade Kit (P/N 814401S)
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-2
6.10.1 LOAD CELL SERVICE KIT (P/N 802741S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
23 LOAD CELL ASSY 1
20 PRESSURE WASHER 1
18 HOLDER, LOAD CELL 1
21 RAM FACE 1
73 O-RING, 022 2
59 SCREW, SET, M3, 5 MM, SS-A4, BLUE 1
6.10.2 BUSHING REPLACEMENT SERVICE KIT (P/N 802742)

17 RETAINING, BUSHING 1
9 GUIDE BUSHING 1
6—KIT PARTS
33 WIPER 1
97 GASKET, RAM 2
6.10.3 MOTOR REPLACEMENT SERVICE KIT (P/N 802743)

1 MOTOR/ENCODER ASSY DRIVE A 1
51 GEAR, 24DP 24T 1
70 WASHER, SPRING LOCK, M4, SS-A4, BLUE DYE 3
57 SCREW, SET, M4, SS-A4, BLUE 2
72 SCREW, M4, 50 MM, SHCS, SS-A4, BLUE 3
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-3
6.10.4 FASTENER SERVICE KIT (P/N 802744)

SEALANT, SILICONE LUBRICANT
TY-WRAP TIES 8
75 WASHER-#14S BRASS FLAT 2
27 SCREW, ADJUSTMENT 2
67 NUT, M6, HEX, NYLON INSERT, SS-A4, BLUE 2
56 SCREW, M2.5, 6 MM, PR, PH, SS-A4, BLUE DYE 6
82 SCREW, M3, 10 MM, PR, PH, SS-A4, BLUE DYE 6
69 WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS-A4, BLUE DYE 1
95 WASHER, EXT. TOOTH, M2.5, SS-A4, BLUE DYE 8
71 WASHER, EXT. TOOTH, M3, SS-A4, BLUE DYE 8
6—KIT PARTS
70 WASHER, SPRING LOCK, M4, SS-A4, BLUE DYE 15
94 WASHER, FLAT, M3, SSA4, BLUE DYE 4
28 O RING, -008 2
39 STANDOFF, M3 - 6 MM 4
61 SCREW, M4, 12 MM,BHCS,SS-A4,BLUE 4
41 1/8” DOWEL PIN, 316 S.S. 1
57 SCREW, SET, M4, SS-A4, BLUE 8
87 SCREW, M2.5, 10 MM, PR,PH,SS-A4,BLUE 4
46 RETAINING RING 1
11 RETAINING RING, 1-3/8 2
60 SCREW, M3, 8 MM, PR, FH, SS-A4, BLUE 10
73 O-RING, -022 4
68 NUT, M5, HEX, NYLON INSERT, SS-A4, BLUE 2
59 SCREW, SET, M3, 5 MM,SS-A4, BLUE 2
88 SCREW, M3, 8 MM, PH,PR,SS-A4,BLUE 8
90 SCREW,M3, 6 MM, PR, PH,SS-A4,BLUE 8
89 CABLE CLAMP, 9/16” 1
96 STAND OFF , 3/16” X 1”, M3 2
42 DETENT, SYRINGE HOLDER 2
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-4
6.10.5 BEARING REPLACEMENT SERVICE KIT (P/N 802746)

GREASE-MULTI-PURPOSE AEROSOL
10 BEARING ASSEMBLY, NON-FERROUS 1
4 BEARING ADAPTER 2
11 RETAINING RING, 1-3/8 1
6.10.6 POWERHEAD TOP COVER SERVICE KIT (P/N 814895S)

29 KEYPAD ASSEMBLY 1
52 TOP COVER 1
45 LENS, INDICATOR 2
6—KIT PARTS
6.10.7 SYRINGE HOLDER SERVICE KIT (P/N 814748S)

56 SCREW, M2.5, 6 MM, PR, PH, SS-A4, BLUE DYE 2
95 WASHER, EXT. TOOTH, M2.5, SS-A4, BLUE DYE 4
87 SCREW, M2.5, 10 MM, PR,PH,SS-A4,BLUE 2
96 STAND OFF , 3/16” X 1”, M3 2
8 NEST, SYRINGE HOLDER 1
83 NEST COVER, SYRINGE HOLDER 1
42 DETENT, SYRINGE HOLDER 2
85 LABEL, 30/60 ML, FLUID DETECTION 1
86 LABEL, 50/60 ML, FLUID DETECTION 1
71 WASHER, EXT TOOTH 2
47 PCB ASSEMBLY, SYRINGE SIZE SENSING 4
6.10.8 END LIMIT KIT (P/N 814302-1S)

26 PCB ASSEMBLY, END LIMIT SENSING 1
48 HARNESS ASSEMBLY, END LIMITS 1
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-5
6.10.9 POWERHEAD CABLE/GASKET KIT (P/N 802303SR)

32 POWERHEAD CABLE ASSEMBLY 1
78 EMI POWERHEAD GASKET 1
6.10.10 CONSOLE SWITCH KIT (P/N 802114SR)

28 SWITCH BUTTON, CONSOLE 1
8 SWITCH ASSY, CONSOLE 1
11 MOUNTING PLATE, BUTTON 1
17 SCREW, FOR PLASTIC, #4 HI/LOW 4
FACEPLATE BOX SMALL 1
6—KIT PARTS
6.10.11 FILTER KIT (P/N 802614SR)
FILTER ASSY 1
PIPE, FULL THREAD, NPSM, 3” 1
WASHER, FLAT, NON-FERROUS, 1” 1
NUT, HEX, NON FERROUS, 1” 4
PIPE THREAD, FULL THREAD, NPSM, 6” 1
WIRE MESH SHIELD WASHER 1
PAD-SCORED CONSOLE 2
6.10.12 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY (P/N 846116S)

COMPLETE ASSEMBLY-NO ADDITIONAL PARTS
6.10.13 HEAD COMMUNICATION HARNESS ASSEMBLY (P/N 802213SR)

COMPLETE ASSEMBLY,-NO ADDITIONAL PARTS
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-6
6.10.14 POWER CONTROL INTERCONNECT ASSEMBLY (P/N 802207SR)

6.10.15 CONSOLE COMMUNICATION HARNESS ASSEMBLY (P/N 802214SR)

6.10.16 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT / UPGRADE SERVICE KIT (P/N 814604S)

TY-RAP TIES 1
POWER SUPPLY, 25.5VDC 1
CABLE TIE MOUNTING BASE 1
6—KIT PARTS
HARNESS ASSY, AC DISTRIBUTION 1

HARNESS, POWER SUPPLY CONTROL, ILLUMENA 1
NUT,M4X.7,HEX,W/LOCKWASHER 1
6.10.17 POWER SUPPLY BOX SERVICE KIT (P/N 814600S)

GUMMED TAPE - 3” WIDE 1
DESICCANT BAG 1
MCV, 814004C CHINA ROHS 1
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY MATRIX, OPTISTAR ELITE 1
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY, OPTISTAR ELITE 1
MULTI-LANGUAGE INSERT FOR PART KITS 1
UNIVERSAL CONSOLE HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY MATRIX 1
LABEL, 4X6, PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION 1
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-7
6.10.18 CARRIAGE ASSY SERVICE KIT (P/N 241411S)

INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
CARRIAGE ASSY, 241411 1
SCREW, M10 X 1.5 X 35 MM 4
SCREW, M10 X 1.5 X 25 MM 1
WASHER, M10 SPLIT LOCK 4
WASHER, M10 FLAT 4
WASHER, BEARING (BRASS) 1
1.75 O.D. X 1.25 I.D. X .040 THKNS
WASHER, 1.53 O.D. X 1.27 I.D. 1
6.10.19 LONG COLUMN ASSY SERVICE KIT (P/N 241412S)
6—KIT PARTS
INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
SCREW, M10 X 1.5 X 35MM 4
WASHER, M10 FLAT 4
LONG COLUMN, 241412 1
SCREW, M10 X 1.5 X 25 MM 1
CLIP, RETAINING 1
1.75 O.D. X 1.25 I.D. X .040 THKNS
WASHER, 1.53 O.D. X 1.27 I.D. 1
WASHER, M10 FENDER 1.50 O.D. 1
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-8
6.10.20 STANDARD COLUMN ASSY SERVICE KIT (P/N 241415S)

INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
STANDARD COLUMN, 241415 1
SCREW, M10 X 1.5 X 35 MM 4
SCREW, M10 X 1.5 X 25 MM 1
CLIP, RETAINING 1
WASHER, M10 FLAT 4
1.75 O.D. X 1.25 I.D. X .040 THKNS
WASHER, 1.53 O.D. X 1.27 I.D. 1
WASHER, M10 FENDER 1.50 O.D. 1
6—KIT PARTS
6.10.21 SPRING ARM WITH J-BOW ARM KIT (P/N 241428S)

INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
RETAINING CLIP 1
1.75 O.D. X 1.25 I.D. X .040 THKNS
WASHER, 1.53 O.D. X 1.27 I.D. 1
6.10.22 PLASTIC COVERS, STANDARD COLUMN, KIT (P/N 241420S)

INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
MALE COLUMN COVER (OSP-7601H-M NF) 1
FEMALE COLUMN COVER (OSP-7601J-M NF) 1
BOTTOM COLUMN COVER (OSP-7601K NF) 2
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-9
6.10.23 PLASTIC COVERS, LONG COLUMN, KIT (P/N 241421S)

INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
UPPER MALE COLUMN COVER 1
UPPER FEMALE COLUMN COVER 1
LOWER MALE COLUMN COVER 1
LOWER FEMALE COLUMN COVER 1
BOTTOM COLUMN COVER 2
RUBBER COLUMN COVER 2
6.10.24 PLASTIC COVERS, EXTENSION ARM KIT (P/N 241422S)

INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
SCREW, M3-0.5 X 10 MM FHCS 2
6—KIT PARTS
PLASTIC CAP 2
6.10.25 PLASTIC COVERS, SPRING ARM KIT (P/N 241423S)

INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
TOP COVER 2
BOTTOM COVER 2
LEFT LONG COVER 1
RIGHT LONG COVER 1
LEFT SHORT COVER 1
RIGHT SHORT COVER 1
5.25” SLIDE, SHORT 3
5.50” SLIDE, LONG 1
LARGE SQUARE MRI-SAFE® STICKER 2
ROUND HERCULES® STICKER 4
ROUND MRI-SAFE® STICKER 4
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-10
6.10.26 GROUND WIRES AND MOUNTING SCREWS KIT (P/N 241424S)

INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
J-BOW GROUND WIRE WITH 3 MM BRASS RING TERMINAL
AND SCREW USED AT EACH END. 1
SPRING ARM GROUND WIRE WITH 3 MM BRASS RING TERMINAL
EXTENSION ARM GROUND WIRE WITH 3 MM BRASS RING TERMINAL
STANDARD COLUMN GROUND WIRE WITH 3 MM BRASS RING TERMINAL
AND SCREW USED AT ONE END. 1
LONG COLUMN GROUND WIRE WITH 3 MM BRASS RING TERMINAL
AND SCREW USED AT ONE END. 1
SCREW, M3-0.5 X 8 MM BHCS 4
LARGE SQUARE MRI-SAFE® STICKER 2
6—KIT PARTS
ROUND HERCULES® STICKER 4

ROUND MRI-SAFE® STICKER 4
10 FOOT GROUND WIRE 1
6.10.27 PCB ASSY, POWER BOARD KIT (P/N 814202-1S)

REGULATORS PCB ASSEMBLY, ELITE POWER CONTROL 1
6.10.28 PCB ASSY, POWER CONTROL CPU KIT(P/N 814201-1S)

PCB ASSY, POWER CONTROL CPU 1

818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-11
CEILING SUSPENSION HARDWARE KITS

6.10.29 HARDWARE KIT, MRI ANCHORAGE PLATE (P/N 241416S)
This hardware is used for installation of the Anchorage Plate, P/N 241408, which
is shipped with this component. Note: the hardware kit can be ordered sepa-
rately. Unistrut nuts are not included.
SCREW; M10-1.5 X 35 MM BHCS 4
WASHER; M10 SPLIT LOCK 4
WASHER; M10 FENDER, 1.50 O.D. 4
6.10.30 HARDWARE KIT, MRI TRACK AND CARRIAGE ASSY (P/N 241417
This hardware is used for installation of the Track Assembly, P/N 241410, which
is shipped with this service kit. Note: the hardware kit can be ordered separate-
ly. Unistrut nuts are not included.
6—KIT PARTS
WASHER; M10 LOCK, COUNTERSUNK 8
ELECTRICAL NUT 1
CABLE TRACK 1
SCREW, M6-1.0 X 10 MM 3
6.10.31 HARDWARE KIT, MRI CARRIAGE ASSY (P/N 241418S)

This hardware is used for installation of the Carriage Kit, P/N 241411S, which is
shipped with this service kit. Note: the hardware kit can be ordered separately.
SCREW; M10-1.5 X 35MM BHCS 4
WASHER; M10 FLAT 4
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-12
6.10.32 HARDWARE KIT, MRI CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS (P/N 241419S)

This hardware is used for the installation of 241405 Standard Length Ceiling
Suspension System; 241413 Long Ceiling Suspension System; 241412S Long
Column Assy Kit; and 241415S Standard Column Assy Kit, which is shipped with
these assemblies. Note: the hardware kit can be ordered separately.
SCREW; M10-1.5 X 35 MM BHCS 4
CLIP; RETAINING 1
WASHER; M10 FLAT 4
WASHER; BRASS BEARING, 1
1.75 O.D. X 1.25 I.D.
WASHER; 1.53 O.D. X 1.27 I.D. X .040 THKNS 1
6—KIT PARTS
WASHER; M10 FENDER, 1.50 O.D. 1

6.10.33 HARDWARE KIT, J-BOW AND EXTENSION ARM (P/N 241425S)
This hardware is used for installation of the Spring Arm + J-Bow Arm Kit, P/N
241428S, which is shipped with this service kit. Note: the hardware kit can be
ordered separately.
INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
CLIP; RETAINING 1
1.75 O.D. X 1.25 I.D. X .040 THKNS
WASHER, 1.53 O.D. X 1.27 I.D. 1
6.10.34 HARDWARE KIT, END OF EXTENSION ARM (P/N 241426S)

INSTRUCTION SHEET 1
CAP, PLASTIC 1
CLIP, RETAINING 1
1.75 O.D. X 1.25 I.D. X .040 THKNS
WASHER, SMALL BRASS 1.53 O.D. X 1.27 I.D.
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-13
6.10.35 UNIVERSAL CONSOLE CPU PCB SERVICE KIT (P/N 846101-1S)

PCB ASSEMBLY, CONSOLE CPU 1
SCREW,M4X.7 8MM PR PH W/LW 2
6.10.36 UNIVERSAL CONSOLE TOUCHSCREEN SERVICE KIT (P/N 814104S)

TOUCHSCREEN, 10.4”, OFFSET CONNECTOR 1
6.10.37 OPTISTAR ELITE CONSOLE SERVICE KIT (P/N 814400S)

CONSOLE ASSY, OPTISTAR ELITE 1
6—KIT PARTS
6.10.38 OPTISTAR ELITE CONSOLE DISPLAY UPGRADE KIT (P/N 814401S)
PCB SUPPORT 1
TOUCHSCREEN, 10.4”, OFFSET CONNECTOR 1
UNIVERSAL CONSOLE CPU PCB SERVICE KIT 1
DISPLAY SUBASSEMBLY 1
SCREW,M4X.7,10MM,PR,PH,LOCKWSH 4
SCREW,M4X.7 8MM PR PH W/LW 2
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-10-14

6—KIT PARTS
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-11-1
6.11 GENDER CONNECTORS

If an OptiStar Elite is to replace an OptiStar LE; gender connectors can be used
to adapt existing cable connectors to the OptiStar Elite.
Gender Connectors:
25 pin to pin connector for power supply (P/N 240E3404).
25 pin socket to socket for Console (P/N 240E3405).
25 pin/socket feed through adapter for pin panel applications (P/N 802020).
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
6-11-2
6—DISASSEMBLY

REASSEMBLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-1-1
7 THEORY OF
OPERATION
This chapter describes the design and function of the OptiStar Elite MR Contrast
Delivery System. Block diagrams for the system are included for each assembly
described. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
NOTE: For additional information refer to Chapter 11 Schematics.
Section 7-2 System Block Diagram
Section 7-3 Power Supply
Section 7-4 Power Control
Section 7-5 Powerhead
Section 7-6 Console
7—THEORY OF
OPERATION
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-1-2

7—THEORY OF
OPERATION
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-2-1
LINE V
SYSTEM OVERVIEW 25 PIN D-SHELL
J1/J2
J1 SUPPLY BOX
CONSOLE
814101 814450
422
SUPPLY
POWER HEAD 814300 and
814400 +27 V
"A" "B" ON/OFF
SYRINGE SIZE SYRINGE SIZE CLOSURE
SENSE BOARDS SENSE BOARDS
END LIMIT +27 V
BOARDS SWITCHED
J1/J2
25 PIN
A B D-SHELL
422 +27 V
SWITCHED
J10 J3 J4 J11
LIMIT SWITCHES FILTER
7—THEORY OF
SYRINGE SWITCHES
KEYPAD
OPERATION
HEAD MAIN BOARD KEYPAD
814301-1S J7, J8, J9 HEAD I/O
XDUCER
SWITCHES XDUCER EXITATION
ENCODERS
J12 LIGHT CONTROL 25 PIN
J6 D-SHELL
SIZE LEDS
J5
J1 J2
J3
XDUCER XDUCER D
J1 R C
ENC ENC A B
A B HEAD I O
CABLE V
E M
HOUSING
MOT MOT R
INTERCONNECT
JA, JA1 JB, JB1
S
U C
P P
J2 P U
B MOTOR DRIVE TO L
DRIVER Y
A MOTOR DRIVE
POWER CONTROL 814200
Figure 7-2-1 System Overview Block Diagram for models with 814450 Power Supply
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-2-2
LINE V
SYSTEM OVERVIEW 15 PIN D-SHELL
J2
J1 SUPPLY BOX
CONSOLE
814101 814600
422
SUPPLY
POWER HEAD 814300 and
814400 +27 V
"A" "B" ON/OFF
SYRINGE SIZE SYRINGE SIZE CLOSURE
SENSE BOARDS SENSE BOARDS
END LIMIT +27 V
BOARDS SWITCHED
J1
25 PIN
A B D-SHELL
422 +27 V
SWITCHED
J10 J3 J4 J11
LIMIT SWITCHES FILTER

7—THEORY OF
SYRINGE SWITCHES
KEYPAD
OPERATION
HEAD MAIN BOARD KEYPAD

814301-1S J7, J8, J9 HEAD I/O
XDUCER
SWITCHES XDUCER EXITATION
ENCODERS
J12 LIGHT CONTROL 25 PIN
J6 D-SHELL
SIZE LEDS
J5
J1 J2
J3
XDUCER XDUCER D
J1 R C
ENC ENC A B
A B HEAD I O
CABLE V
E M
HOUSING
MOT MOT R
INTERCONNECT
JA, JA1 JB, JB1
S
U C
P P
J2 P U
B MOTOR DRIVE TO L
DRIVER Y
A MOTOR DRIVE
POWER CONTROL 814200
Figure 7-2-2 System Overview Block Diagram for models with 814600 Power Supply
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-3-1
7.3 POWER SUPPLY

The Power Supply assembly houses a +27 VDC nominal power supply, and
interface board. The interface board provides the following functions:
• Added AC line filter for the power supply
• Switching of the +27 VDC to the system
• Communication pass through from the console to the power control
Refer to the Power Supply block diagram Figure 7-3-1 for models with 814450,
or Figure 7-3-2 for models with 814600.
For models with the 814450 Power Supply, connectors J1 and J2 are wired iden-
tically and can be used for either the Console or the Power Control. For models
with the 814600 Power Supply, connector J1 is wired for the Power Control and
connector J2 is wired for the Console.
On models with the 814450 Power Supply, when the green LED on the Power
Supply front panel is on, the +27 VDC is present inside the power supply assem-
bly. The +27 VDC is applied to J1 and J2 through U4, a solid state relay switched
by a momentary closure from the Console ON/OFF switch. On models with the
7—POWER SUPPLY
814600 Power Supply, when the blue LED on the Power Supply top panel is on,
the AC mains are connected to the switching power supply. The +27 VDC is not
present until the Power On/Off button on the Console is pressed. The +27 VDC
is then applied to J1 and J2.
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-3-2
814450 SUPPLY BOX
POWER
SWITCH
LINE VOLTAGE
FILTER
CONNECTOR BD
802451-1
J1
422
27VDC
ON/OFF SUPPLY
+27 VDC
7—POWER SUPPLY
J2
ON/OFF
+27 VDC
SSR
422
814450 SUPPLY ASSY.,

BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 7-3-1 814450 Power Supply Block Diagram
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-3-3
814600 SUPPLY BOX
POWER
SWITCH
LINE VOLTAGE
FILTER
CONNECTOR BD
POWER 802451-1
J1
CONTROL
422
27VDC
SUPPLY
+27 VDC
7—POWER SUPPLY
J2 PS
ON/OFF ON/OFF
+27 VDC
422
CONSOLE
814600 SUPPLY ASSY.,

BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 7-3-2 814600 Power Supply Block Diagram
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-3-4
7—POWER SUPPLY
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-1
7.4 POWER CONTROL

The Power Control consists of five main electrical assemblies:
1. Interconnect Assembly (P/N 802207SR)
2. Power Board (P/N 802202-1) or Regulator Board (P/N 814202-1)
3. CPU Board (P/N 814201-1S)
4. Communication Board (P/N 802204-1)
5. Driver Board (P/N 802203-1)
Refer to the Power Supply block diagram Figure 7-4-1.
The interconnect assembly is fixed in place as part of the Power Control chassis;
the other boards slide into the Power Control and mate with the interconnect
assembly. The interconnect assembly consists of two backplane boards con-
nected to each other by feed through capacitor filters. The assembly divides the
Power Control into the CPU/Power (front) section, and Driver/Communication
(back) section. The CPU/Power backplane board is (P/N 802205-1). The Driver/
Communication backplane board part number is 802206-1. All connections
7—POWER CONTROL
between the Power Control boards are through the interconnect assembly.
The Console Communication Harness (P/N 802214SR) provides two functions:
1. Carries the +27 VDC nominal.
2. Carries Console communication.
The Head Communication Harness Assembly (P/N 802213SR) carries all head
signals EXCEPT the motor drive.
The Head Motors Harness (P/N 802212) carries the motor drive signals.
For additional information refer to Chapter 11 Schematics.
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-2

7—POWER CONTROL
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-3
Calibration Download
Switch Box Connector
Connector
802215
Switch/Cable
Assembly
P J J
2 2 J P 1
J 3 3
6
CPU Mode J
Switches J 802214SR Console
4 2 Communication
802204-1 J3
Harness
814201-1 8
S1 P J Communication Assembly
CPU Board 1 1
0 J P Board
2 2 2
J 8 J
7
J
2 3
Calibration 0
Display 2 0 802213SR Head
Connector 2 Communication
6
7—POWER CONTROL
Harness
2 Assembly
0
5 J P
P J 1 1
3 J1
3
802202-1/814202-1 802203-1
Power / Regulator Board Driver Board Head
Connector
P J
4 4
J2 J2
802212 Head
802207SR Assembly Motors Harness
Assembly
814200 POWER CONTROL

BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 7-4-1 Power Control Block Diagram

818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-4

7—POWER CONTROL
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-5
7.4.1 POWER BOARD AND REGULATOR BOARD

The Power Board converts the nominal +27 VDC from the Power Supply Assem-
bly to the following voltages used by the system:
• +12 VDC - Mostly for LED’s, interface and opto drive
• +5 VDC - Logic power
• +22 to +24 VDC - Motor raw supply
In addition, the Power Board provides voltage and current sense that can be
monitored by the Main CPU. The motor raw supply can be turned on or off by
the CPU, or switched from approximately +22 VDC to +24 VDC, depending on
motor requirements.
7—POWER CONTROL
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-6
802202-1 / 814202-1 POWER / REGULATOR BOARD
FUSED 27VDC
SENSE V SENSE
6.3A
P3 +27 V U1
FUSE A SENSE
P4
+27 V
+12 V
+12VDC
U2
7—POWER CONTROL
+5 VDC
U3 +5 VDC
+22 -24 VDC

DC/DC
P3 MOT V
P4 DC/DC on
22 -24 VDC
PS1
P3 V CHANGE
802202-1 / 814202-1 POWER / REGULATOR BOARD

BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 7-4-2 Power / Regulator Board Block Diagram
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-7
7.4.2 COMMUNICATION BOARD

The Communication Board provides the following functions:
• Carries all non-motor signals between the Power Control and the
Powerhead cable
• Carries the nominal +27 VDC from the Power Supply to the on/off
switch, then to the interconnect assembly.
• Converts the transmitted and received signals from the CPU into RS-
422 to the console
Refer to the Communication Board block diagram Figure 7-4-3.
802204-1 COMMUNICATION BOARD

J3
HEAD I/O HEAD I/O P3
7—POWER CONTROL
+27 VDC J2
FROM
SUPPLY BOX
ON/OFF
SWITCH
+27 VDC
P2
SWITCHED
J1
U2
TX+
TX
F
TX- I
COMMUNICATION L
TO/FROM T MAX 488 P3
CONSOLE RX+ E
R RX
RX- S
J2
802204-1 COMMUNICATION BOARD

BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 7-4-3 Communication Board Block Diagram
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-8
7—POWER CONTROL
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-9
7.4.3 DRIVER BOARD

The Driver Board converts the 5v pulses generated by the CPU board into the
200 VAC, 45 kHz motor drive signals. The motor drive signals consist of two
sinusoidal waveforms (sin and cos), 90 degrees out of phase from each other,
and a return for each motor “layer”. Each motor consists of two separate “layers”,
each layer requiring the sin, and cos and return.
The same circuits are used to drive either the A or B motor.
In order to select the A motor, the CPU will pull P1:18 low, turning on U9, U10,
U11, and U12. this will connect the driver circuits to the A motor.
When selecting the B motor, the CPU pulls P1:17 low, turning on U13, U14, U15,
and U16. This connects the driver circuits to the B motor.
The CPU can also pull P1:19 low to short out the second inductor in each of the
driver circuits. This is done to retune the circuit to work at lower flow rates.
7—POWER CONTROL
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-10
802203-1 DRIVER BOARD
A SELECT
J1
+ 22 - 24 VDC
7—POWER CONTROL
TO A
MOTOR
DRIVE
DRIVE CIRCUIT
COIL SWITCH TO B
MOTOR
B SELECT
P1
802203-1 DRIVER BOARD

BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 7-4-4 Driver Board Block Diagram
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-11
7.4.4 CPU BOARD

The CPU board controls and monitors all system functions. The main micropro-
cessor, U13, is the Motorola MC 68332. System reset is handled by U19, which
holds the system in reset until Vcc is up. U9 is the 512K flash memory device
where the main program is stored. U2 and U5 make up the 16K of non-volatile
RAM, where calibration data, achieved value data, and other information is
stored. U3 and U8 are 128K SRAM.
The I/O mapping is handled by U16, an Altera FPGA. The CPU also uses U16 to
read the powerhead user buttons, syringe size switches, and the ram end limit
switches. All of these signals are isolated by opto couplers U34, U35, U36, and
U37. U30, also an Altera FPGA, is used to generate the motor drive signals and
monitor the motor speed and position. Additionally, the CPU monitors speed,
position and pressure through U1, a Universal Pulse Processor (UPP).
The pressure transducers, used to sense actual syringe pressure, are mounted
at the end of the powerhead rams. The transducers are supplied 2 VDC excita-
tion from the
D9 - U29:A - Q1 circuit on the CPU board. The excitation supply is a constant
7—POWER CONTROL
current type, so the 2V output is dependent upon both transducers being con-
nected. The millivolt level signal from the transducers is amplified to an approx-
imately 3.5 V max signal that is monitored by the CPU through the UPP.
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-12

7—POWER CONTROL
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-13
CPU MEMORY UPP & PLD

sh 1 sh 2 sh 3
U30 P-CONTROL
16 U9 8 J Test
32 KHz DATA
XTAL I/O 5 Points
FLASH
MEM DECODE
(16.777 MHz dk cyc) 7 CAL
10 *CSBOOT 256Kx16 ADR0-5 *WT 5
J PGM/DeBug TEST
U13 CPU m/w P&E (29F400T)
4 ADR11-15 CTRL
Power ON MOT 7B332 BDM I/F Cable (EPM7128)
Detector 16 bit ext D Bus SZSW
32 bit Adr & Int/ D bus 16
mode 4 DATA LCD 7
16 U3, U8
5
32 *i/o-wrt *IRQ1
ADR SIM *CS3
CPU 8 SRAM
TPU *CSB,9,10 128Kx16
STATUS 11 9.8304MHz
DS2- *CSO-CS10 (HM628128)
Motor Clk
DS5 8 *IRQ1-IRQ7 16 MHz
XTAL
2
*DSACK 16 U2, U5 (4MHz clk cycle)
U1 *IRQ3
NVRAM
8Kx16 8 *IRQ5
7—POWER CONTROL
*CS5,6,7 P7 EMP1270
STK12C68
8 U45
DATA 5
CONTROL
ADR 0-10
8 DATA
+12v PLL 7 PR FLT
CALIB. I/F sh 6 I/F & WAKE UP *sv-cs 2
sh 5 Encoder A/B Ckls sh 4 A/D 1 A/D 1
input 1
Hi Spd
SW BOX I/F 2
IN/OUT J 26 -5v
BUF’S +5v xvtr -5v 4
CONTROL 6
4
JTAG
SPEAKER (to head) Pressure Input A J 10 U30 *IRQ2
CALIB 1 (MOTOR) 26V & 1
J 20 Sample & Hold
TEST & 7
DISPLAY (BB INA 118)
CONSOLE (RS 422 drv) +5, +5VB, +12
8 (TO I/F, sh. 5) (fm PWR)
DATA MOTOR P
P1 CONTROL 4 2
Pressure Input B ADR 0-3
Sample & Hold P/M 32- (to DRVR)
Interface +12v 64- (BB INA 118) (EPM9400) SIN/ P
Buffer Lim SW 4 COS I
P 3
Circuitry I o.c. N (to DRVR)
5 sel A/B
13 N Phase-Locked
INTGRATOR/ Loop (HC4046) & SPD
F - IN
OPTO FILTER 1.88 MhZ - 1.6 MhZ F - OUT (to PWR)
I/F (40-45 Hz Running) Main-
BUPS Cntrl
Main-
ACTIVITY Cntrl
7 DETECT
LCD
8 (pwr on ena) 11.4 mA CONSTANT 814201-1
DATA CURRENT SOURCE +5v CPU BOARD
6 TO PRESSURE BRIDGE
EX & CLK BLOCK DIAGRAM
13 SZSW
Figure 7-4-5 CPU Block Diagram

818507-M 2020-05-05
7-4-14

7—POWER CONTROL
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-5-1
7.5 POWERHEAD
For signal details to and from the Powerhead, refer to the Chapter 6 Cables.
The boards located in the Powerhead are as follows:
1. Powerhead main board (P/N 802301-1).
2. End limit sensing board (one on each side, A and B) (P/N 814302-1).
3. Syringe size sensing board (two per side, flange and barrel for A and B)
(P/N 802307-1).
4. Keypad Assembly, which is part of cover kit (P/N 802747)
7.5.1 POWERHEAD MAIN BOARD
Refer to Chapter 11 schematic 802301
The Powerhead main board handles all signals to and from the Powerhead, the
only exception being the motor drive voltage, which connects directly to the
motors from the Powerhead cable.
7—POWERHEAD
Control of the A and B ram LED’s, and enabling of the syringe size LED’s is by
serial data shifted from the CPU using H_data and H_clock lines. Data is clocked
into U4 on the Powerhead board, then latched on U5.
Syringe size switch signals go directly to the CPU to sense what syringe is in-
stalled, and to U10 to light the appropriate Syringe Size LED on the keypad.
The keypad interface (U6, U7, U8, U16, U17) encodes 7 of the keypad switches
(all except the A and B speedup switches) into a three line binary code to the
CPU. A keypad fault (unconnected keypad) will cause an invalid code to the
CPU, triggering an error message.
The Powerhead contains optical encoders to control and monitor the position
and speed of the motors. The encoders are supplied with +5 VDC, and U1, U2,
and U21 buffer encoder signals before going to the CPU board.
The end limit sensing boards are supplied +12 VDC, and the limit signals pass
directly to the CPU.
The pressure transducer excitation voltage passes through from the CPU, the
transducer outputs pass through to the CPU.
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-5-2
7.5.2. END LIMIT SENSING BOARD

Refer to Chapter 10 schematic 814302.
There are two End Limit Sensing boards in the Powerhead, one for each ram.
The board has an optical interrupter at each end, and is actuated by a flag on
the ram. The sensor at the zero position (ram fully extended) is set exactly to
the ram position corresponding to an empty syringe, while the back sensor is
used to prevent overrun in the reverse direction.
7.5.3 SYRINGE SIZE BOARD
Refer to Chapter 10 schematic 802307.
There are four Syringe Size boards in the Powerhead. Each ram has two switch
board assemblies, one actuated by the syringe barrel and one activated by the
syringe flange. Different combinations of the syringe barrel and flange switches
are decoded by the CPU to determine what syringe is installed. The table below
shows the decoding for each syringe size.
A Side B Side
Switch Inputs
7—POWERHEAD
SIZE 0-A SIZE 1-A SIZE 0-B

(BARREL) (FLANGE) SYRINGE (BARREL) SYRINGE
OPEN OPEN N/A OPEN OPEN LF 125
OPEN CLOSED LF 10/15/20 OPEN CLOSED N/A
CLOSED OPEN Kendal 60 CLOSED OPEN Kendal 60
CLOSED CLOSED LF 30 CLOSED CLOSED LF 50
CLOSED = LOW
818507-M 2020-05-05
KEYPAD
814301-1 HEAD BOARD
J12
SWITCHES J7
SPEEDUP A
TO POWER CONTROL
SPEEDUP B
SWITCHES SWITCHES - 7 LINES J8

ENCODE TO POWER CONTROL
KEYPAD FAULT
SYRINGE
SIZE
LEDS SIZE
LED
ENABLE
DECODE DECODE
A B
J10
FLANGE A J7
TO POWER CONTROL
FROM BARREL A
SYRINGE
SIZE
SENSE J11
SWITCHES FLANGE B J8
802307-1 TO POWER CONTROL
BARREL B
SIZE
SHIFT/ LED
J8 LATCH ENABLE
FROM CLOCK
POWER A
CONTROL RAM
DATA LEDS
B
DRIVERS
J7
J1 A TO POWER CONTROL
A
M
ENC
INDEX J8
A/B
TO POWER CONTROL
J2
B B
M
ENC
J9
2V EXITATION
A
TRANSDUCER
J5
TO POWER CONTROL
B
TRANSDUCER
J6
J3 J7
A LIMITS
TO POWER CONTROL
814302-1
J4
B LIMITS J8
TO POWER CONTROL
814302-1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
814301-1 HEAD BOARD
Figure 7-5-1 Powerhead Block Diagram

818507-M 2020-05-05
7—POWERHEAD
7-5-3
7-5-4

7—POWERHEAD
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-6-1
7.6 CONSOLE OVERVIEW

The console provides the user interface through the color LCD and the touch
screen. Also, the console provides the system ON/OFF switch that is operable
only with the powerpack circuit breaker in the ON position.
Refer to the Console block diagram Figure 7-6-1.
7.6.1 CONSOLE CPU
The Console CPU performs the following functions.
• Serial communications to the power control
• Stores all screen information
• Processes touch screen inputs
• Provides console PIC processor for system redundant processor
state machine
• Manages screen generation
• Provides BDM port for console software downloading
7—CONSOLE
818507-M 2020-05-05
7-6-2
7.6.2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS

Interface Connection
The interface connector provides the means for the console to obtain power from the
supply as well as provide the path for the console to communicate with the system.
RS422 Drivers and Receivers
The communication channel to and from the powerpack is accomplished using RS422
drivers and receivers (MC3487 and MC3486 or equiv). The communications channel oper-
ates at a BAUD rate of 38400 bps with 1 start and 1 stop bit. A communication packet is
started by a start of command hardware signal (RTS) and completed by this signal being
de-asserted. For every command packet, there must be an acknowledgment of validity.
Touch Screen Control
The quiescent state assumes the screen is not touched. Signal X+ is driven high and X-,
Y+ and Y- are high impedance. During this time the line SY- is monitored by a compara-
tor. If the screen is touched the comparator’s output will generate an interrupt to the PIC
(Peripheral Interface Control). Upon receipt of the interrupt, the X- line is driven low thus
creating a voltage gradient across the X-axis. The X coordinate is defined by the value digi-
tized on the SY- channel corrected by the difference between 5 volts and the value found
on the SX+ channel. Then X lines are allowed to float and Y+ is driven high and Y- is driven
low. The Y coordinate is then defined as the digitized value for the SX- channel corrected
7—CONSOLE
by the difference between 5 volts and the value found on the SY+ channel. The BYTEME
signal is asserted and the X and Y coordinates are placed on the SPI transmit buffer.
RAM
The console PCB has a total of 4M bytes of memory organized as 1M x 32. The RAM is the
heart of the console control variables and data storage. All data within these devices are
lost when system power is removed.
FLASH
The console contains 4MB of FLASH memory which consists of 2-1Mx16 chips. Each
FLASH device is divided up into 32-64 KB sectors which are loaded with various sections
of the console software. The console software is divided as follows:
These devices contain the product software and all of the bit mapped images used on the
display screens, the basic set of languages used and the fonts sets for all displayed text.
Also, these devices contain the object records which are used to build the screens. Objects
are the devices which combine images, text, and functionality. The screen records are
simply the list of objects and locations.
CPU
The console uses an MCF5307 as its main microprocessor. In addition to the normal uses
of a microprocessor, data flow to and from memory and peripheral devices, the CPU
communicates directly with the SED1355 graphic’s LCD panel controller. The SED1355
gathers the information from the CPU to build the various screen images. Once the data is
organized the SED1355 will generate the necessary control signals for the LCD display and
display the image. The image will be maintained by the SED1355 until the CPU provides a
new or updates the current set of images.
818507-M 2020-05-05
Diag LEDS DS8 - DS 11
System
Interface PIC ICSP J1
16F873
J5 U3 Touch J2
802102-1 clock RTC
And SNAP
A0-A14 INV LCD Color
CAN Batt On Balt.
back J7 J8
U4 & U21 12C PS1
SRAM

D24 - D31
buss req. U16
On/Off 16Mhz
Y1
ADDR:A0 - A21
Display Aux
CONTROL Controller RGB
CPU
Panel J6 SED1355 FOA output
MC5307
U7 J3
DATA:D0 - D15
Isolator
U22
U8
PROG
:A0 - A21 & DATA
RS422/232 clk
MEM
2 MByte
Display Mem
GP I/O DATA:D0-D15 Flash
1Mx16 DRAM
U19
U6
GND +24V (4 Mbyte total)
Aux Spkr J9
PROG
:A0-A21
D1 & DATA
SPK MEM
SPK
Drvr. 2 Mbyte
U13 +5 DATA:D15 - D31
Switch & Jumper U20
U11 +12 Inputs (Config.

Options) SYS.
Figure 7-6-1 Console Block Diagram (814101)

S1:A,B,C,D RAM
U12 +3.3 DATA:D0 - D31 4 Mbyte total
DRAM
Reset SW3 (2 chips)
DBUG J4 U17
ADDR - A0 - A21 (2X)
+3.3 +5 U18
Diag. LEDs
40 Mhz DS4-DS7
PUP Y2
Reset clk
U14
818507-M 2020-05-05
7—CONSOLE
7-6-3
7—CONSOLE 7-6-4
Diag LEDS DS8 - DS 11
System
PIC ICSP J1
Interface Not Used
16F873
J5 U3 Touch J2
844102-1 clock RTC
818507-M 2020-05-05
And SNAP
A0-A14 INV LCD Color
CAN Batt On Balt.
back J7 J8
U4 & U21 12C PS1
SRAM
D24 - D31

buss req. U16
On/Off 16Mhz
Y1
ADDR:A0 - A21
Display Aux
CONTROL Controler RGB
CPU
Panel J6 SED1355 FOA output
MC5307e
U7 J3
DATA:D0 - D15
Isolator
U22
U8
Not Used PROG
:A0 - A21 & DATA
RS422/232 CLOCK
MEM SWITCH
2 MByte
Hands Display Mem
GP I/O DATA:D0-D15 Flash
1Mx16 DRAM
U19
U6
GND +24V (4 Mbyte total)
Aux Spkr J9
DS2 PROG
TP3 :A0-A21
D1 O & DATA
TP5 SPK MEM
O
TP4 SPK
O
U13 +5 Drvr. 2 Mbyte
DATA:D15 - D31
Switch & Jumper U20
Inputs (Config.
Options) SYS.
Figure 7-6-2 Console Block Diagram (814400)

S1:A,B,C,D RAM
U12 +3.3 DATA:D0 - D31 4 Mbyte total
O
DRAM
Reset SW3 TP2 (2 chips)
DS3
DBUG J4 U17
ADDR - A0 - A21 (2X)
+3.3 +5 U18
Diag. LEDs
40 Mhz DS4-DS7
PUP Y2
Reset clk
U14

8-1-1
8 CALIBRATION
8.1 OVERVIEW
To perform these calibrations, the Powerhead and Power Control Covers must
be disassembled. For details, see Chapter 6.
WARNING!
Always remove Power Control and Powerhead assembly from magnet

room before disassembly and calibrating. Failure to follow this warning
could result in personnel injury or equipment damage.
8.1.1 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT NEEDED:
The following items are part of the OptiStar Service Kit (Reference Section 5.1.1)
Test Display (P/N 801202)
8—CALIBRATION
20 Conductor Ribbon Cable (P/N 801212)
Test Switch Assembly (P/N 801201)
26 Conductor Ribbon Cable (P/N 801211)
MR Pressure Calibration Fixture (P/N 801240)
25 to 25 pin jumper cable for power supply to power control connector
(P/N 801224-07)
The items below are not part of the OptiStar Service Kit
60 mL, 20 mL, 30 mL, and 125 mL Syringes
10/15/20 mL syringe adapter
Tap Water
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-1-2
8.1.2 FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION

The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System should be calibrated at least
every 2 years or whenever a part or component that is used for pressure limit-
ing or Ram location has been replaced.
The following is a list of the various calibration procedures contained in this
chapter:
• Limit Switch Calibration. Forward and Reverse, Rams A & B (section 8.2).
• Pressure Adjustments (section 8.3)
Side A
60 mL
30 mL
10/15/20 mL
Side B
60 mL
50 mL
125 mL
• Additional Checks (section 8.5) Factory Adjusted
8—CALIBRATION
• Syringe Size Factor Check. section 8.4.1
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-1-3
8.1.3 CALIBRATION SET-UP

Turn off power to the power supply and power control units.
1. Disconnect the 25 pin data/power cable from the Filter to the Power Control. Re-
move Powerhead and Power Control assemblies from the magnet room.
2. At the Power Supply, disconnect the data/power cable (J2) to the Filter. You will be
connecting a 25 pin jumper cable to supply data/power to the Power Control.
3. Remove the Power Control front cover to expose the edge of the CPU board.
4. Connect the Test Display and Test Switch Assembly, (via ribbon cables), to the CPU
board of the Power Control. (Test Display to J7, Test switch Assembly to J6).
5. Attach 25 pin to 25 pin jumper data/power cable from the Power Supply (J2) to the
Power Control (J3) connection.
Test Display
SYRINGE
F11ML
REST VOL. ML
F12 LIMIT
F10 F9 PRESSURE
250 200 100 50 40 30 20 10 P.S.I.
MODE F1
F13 F15
F16 F6 F14
F2 F3
FLOW RATE ML VOLUME ML
SEC
F17
8—CALIBRATION
F4 F5 F7 F8
TIME
Up
Mode Test Switch
n
Ente
r Assembly
Dow
CPU J7
Board
CPU
SW 1
Note: ON position
is toward edge off
board J6
.
Figure 8-1-1 Test Unit Connections
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-1-4
8.1.4 INITIALIZATION OF THE POWER CONTROL CPU RAM:

Initializing the CPU RAM will replace any stored calibration values with default
values. This procedure should be performed in the event of any major compo-
nent or board change.
1. Install the Test Display as described in the Calibration Set-UP section 8.1.3.
2. In the Power Control, Locate SW1 on the CPU board. Set all four dip switches to the
Closed, ON, position. (This would be toward the edge of the board)
3. Power UP the System in the sequence listed below:
1st Power Control
2nd Power Supply
3rd Console front panel “On/Off” button.
The system should power UP normally and all of the test display’s segments
should be on.
4. When initialization is complete, power DOWN the unit and reset SW1.
NOTE : After re-initializing the CPU RAM, the calibration procedure must be
performed.
NOTE : Initializing the CPU RAM will erase all pressure limit calibrations. They
will be replaced with default values. These default values should not be used
8—CALIBRATION
without performing the calibration procedure.
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-1-5
8.1.5 ENTERING THE CALIBRATION MODE :

To enter Calibration Mode, proceed as follows:
1. Perform the calibration set-UP (refer to 8.1.3).
2. With system off, locate SW1 on the Power Control CPU board. Set dip 3 to ON and
ensure that 1, 2, and 4 are OFF.
3. Power UP the System in the following sequence:
1st Power Control
2nd Power Supply
3rd Console front panel “On/Off” button.
4. The system should power UP normally with the test display in Mode 0.
NOTE: Mode 0 is active when there is no number next to “Mode”.
8.1.6 TEST DISPLAY AND TEST SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS:
The Test Display and Test Switch Assembly are used in the calibration process.
Both items are illustrated below.
Test Switch Assembly Test Display
Mode SYRINGE
F11ML
8—CALIBRATION
Up F1 REST VOL. ML
F12 LIMIT
r
F10 F9 PRESSURE
Ente 250 200 100 50 40 30 20 10 P.S.I.
n
Dow
MODE F1
F13 F15
F16 F6 F14
F2 F3
FLOW RATE ML VOLUME ML
SEC
F17 F7
F4 F5 F8
TIME
Figure 8-1-2 Test Components
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-1-6
8.1.7 TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY OVERVIEW

Test Switch Assembly functions are as follows:
‘UP’ key: Used to increase an adjustable value in a mode.
‘DOWN’ key: Used to decrease an adjustable value in a mode.
‘Enter’ key: Used to Update an adjusted value into memory.
‘Mode’ key: Used to cycle through the 8 different modes on the Test Display.
8.1.8 TEST DISPLAY OVERVIEW
For calibration, the Test Display has 8 different selectable modes. Each mode
selected will present its own unique values and fields.
Test Display mode selections are as follows:
• Mode 0 = Optic limit switch adjustment
• Mode 1 = Pressure adjustment
• Mode 2 = Not used
8—CALIBRATION
• Mode 6 = Power Factor test (Factory Adjusted)

• Mode 7 = See section 10.2.1
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-1-7
8.1.9 MODE DESCRIPTIONS

Field descriptions and functions for each mode are as follows:
NOTE: In the descriptions which follow, the letter ‘F’ proceeds each definition.
This letter is merely a visual cross reference that relates to illustration Figure
8.1.2. For example, field 1 means location F1, on Figure 8.1.2 and so on.
MODE 0: F1, this field is blank when Mode 0 is selected.
F2 Displays ‘AH’ when Ram A is active. When ‘BH’ is displayed Ram B is active.
F3 ‘FoF’ = Front limit off; not blocked. ‘Fon’ = Front limit on; blocked.
F5 ‘BoF’ = Back limit off; not blocked. ‘Bon’ = Back limit on; blocked.
F7 Hexadecimal number representing position of the Ram.
F9 The Volume remaining. A decimal point needs to be understood one place
over to the left.
MODE 1: F1) Displays ‘1’
F2 displays ‘AH’ when Ram A is active. When ‘BH’ is displayed, Ram B is active.
F3 Indicates the actual pressure only after calibration during an injection.
8—CALIBRATION
F5 Displays the pressure limit selected on the console from the last completed
injection.
F6 Pressure calibration value for the active Ram and syringe.
F7 New pressure calibration value adjusted by using the UP and DOWN keys on
the Test Switch Assembly. When the ‘ENTER’ key is pressed, (on the Test Switch
assembly) this adjusted value will be copied to field F6 and thus into memory.
F8 Displays a hexadecimal number during the injection. This hex number
equals half of the actual pressure displayed in field F3 when converted to deci-
mal.
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-1-8
MODE 6: F1) Displays ‘6’

F2 Displays ‘AH’ when Ram A is active. When ‘BH’ is displayed Ram B is active.
F3 Displays ‘FR’ which stands for ‘flow rate’.
F5 This field indicates the flow rate of the active Ram. A decimal point is to be
understood two places over from the right. For example, ‘400’ would be 4.00
mL/s.
For push button operation: ‘0’ = no Ram movement, ‘100’ = slow speed Ram
movement, ‘500’ = fast speed Ram movement.
NOTE:
A side forward and reverse 0, 100, 500
B side forward 0, 100, 500
Reverse 0, 100, 999 (with no syringe)
Reverse 0, 100, 500 (with syringe)
F6 Power factor number, (Not normally adjusted).
Ram A Ram B
60 mL 493 60 mL 493
30 mL 470 50 mL 588
10/15/20 mL 257 125 mL 1012
8—CALIBRATION
F7 New Power Factor value is adjusted by using the UP and DOWN keys on the
Test Switch. When the ‘ENTER’ key is pressed (on the Test Switch) this adjusted
value will be copied to field F6 and thus into memory.
F11
Ram A Ram B
60 mL 9 60 mL 6
30 mL 7 50 mL 8
10/15/20 mL 5 125 mL 10
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-2-1
8.2 LIMIT SWITCH CALIBRATION (MODE 0):

8.2.1 SETUP
1. Make sure both powerhead Rams are fully retracted & no adapters are installed.
2. Enter the Calibration Mode.
3. On the switch assembly, press the mode button repeatedly until mode 0 is selected
on the test display.
NOTE: Refer to 8.1.9 Mode Descriptions for Mode 0 field information.
4. Install a 60 mL syringe on the ‘A’ side.
NOTE: the last fill/expel button pressed, Ram side A or Ram side B, will deter-
mine which Ram information; Ram A (AH) or B (BH) appears on the test display.
Also, note that when pressing a fill/expel button to toggle the display to the
desired Ram, the Ram has to physically move to toggle the display to that Ram.
Subsequently, the last Ram that physically moves becomes the active Ram on
the display.
NOTE: the volume indicated on the test display is missing a decimal point, it
must be moved over one position to the left. For example: 62 = 6.2 mL
NOTE: the console display volume will round to the nearest whole number
8—CALIBRATION
displayed on the test display volume.
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-2-2
8.2.2 FOREWORD LIMIT SWITCH CHECK & ADJUSTMENT (A)

1. Expel the syringe until the front wiper of the piston just barely touches the zero line
of the syringe. Reference the following figure:
0 ml Front Wiper
Figure 8-2-1 Syringe and Piston

2. If the Forward limit is set correctly, the following will be true:
8—CALIBRATION
The volume displayed on the test display shall be (00), which is 0.0 mL.
The limit switch status on the display shall be (Fon), or foreword limit switch =
on.
The limit switch status shall be (FoF) when the volume displayed on the test
display is (01) or higher.
3. If the statements in step 2 are not true, then the limit switch board for the Ram of
concern will have to be adjusted forward or backward.
4. To access adjustment screws, remove the Powerhead lower front, middle covers,
and syringe holder nest cover. The top cover is now loose, be careful when rotat-
ing the Powerhead. Facing the injector rams, the two adjustment screws reside on
the Powerhead guide plate positioned vertical. A 3.5 mm nut driver or tool (P/N
802731) is required to make adjustments. Refer to figure 6-3-1 (item 27) for adjust-
ment screw locations.
The top adjustment screw adjust the A ram limit.
The bottom adjustment screw adjust the B ram limit.
Adjustment screw rotation:
Clockwise rotation will provide more ram forward travel.
Counterclockwise rotation will provide more ram backward travel.
5. If the board had to be moved, make sure that the wiper of the Ram is centered
within the optic sensor and is in no danger of hitting the sensor.
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-2-3
8.2.3 REVERSE LIMIT SWITCH CHECK (A)

1. Retract the Ram to its full limit.
2. If the Reverse limit is set correctly, the following will be true:
The volume displayed on the test display shall be (630); or 63 mL when not in
calibration mode.
The volume displayed on the test display shall be (713); or 71 mL when in
calibration mode
The limit switch status on the display shall be (bon) when the Ram reaches the
reverse limit
The limit switch status shall toggle to (boF) when the volume displayed on the
test display goes less than 713 on the test display.
8.2.4 FORWARD LIMIT SWITCH CHECK & ADJUSTMENT (RAM B)
Use the same procedure defined for Ram A forward limit switch check and
adjustment.
8.2.5 REVERSE LIMIT SWITCH CHECK (RAM B)
Use the same procedure defined for Ram A Reverse Limit Switch Check.
8—CALIBRATION
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-2-4

8—CALIBRATION
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-3-1
8.3 PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS: (MODE 1)

8.3.1 RAM FACE CHECK
Perform the following tests to confirm that the ram faces are not putting a pre-
load on the load cells before attempting to calibrate pressures.
1. Manual check of A & B side:
Verify that both the A and B ram faces are not in a bind. With your hand only,
they should be able to spin and pull-off. Also, note that the load cell holders
shall remain secure while moving the ram faces.
2. Pressure Check of A side:
Pull the A side ram face outward approximately 1/8”.
With a full 60 mL syringe, run a 10 mL @ 4 mL/sec. @ 100 psi injection so that
the plunger stops with a volume remaining adequate to run the same injection
without retracting the ram.
Without retracting the ram, empty the syringe and manually push the plunger
to the expelled end, then repeat the same 10 mL injection so the ram face does
not engage the pushrod at all.
8—CALIBRATION
pressure (-).
NOTE: If either step 1 or 2 test fail, the ram face must be repaired and both tests
repeated.
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-3-2
8.3.2 SETUP
1. Enter the Calibration Mode by following the procedure in section 8.1.5.
2. Using the Test Switch Assembly, go to Mode 1.
NOTE: Refer to 8.1.9 Mode Descriptions for Mode 1 field information.
3. The pressure values displayed (to the right of the flow & volume box, F6 and F7)
shall both be defaulted to (0335) if the Ram Initialization has been performed and a
60 mL syringe is installed.
4. Install the pressure gauge fixture as illustrated in Figure 8-3-1.
NOTE: The last fill/expel button pressed, Ram A or Ram B side, will determine
which Ram information; Ram A (AH) or B (bH) appears on the test display. Also,
note that when pressing a fill/expel button to toggle the display to the desired
Ram, the Ram has to physically move to toggle the display to that Ram. Sub-
sequently, the last Ram that physically moves becomes the active Ram on the
display.
Pressure
100
200
Pressure 50
Tube
Gauge 300
Fixture
8—CALIBRATION
LE Base
Assembly
(Black)
60 mL
60
55 mL Syringe
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
Powerhead Powerhead
5
'B' Side 'A' Side
Drain and
Fill Tubes
ml
125 ml
60
B 50 ml ml
5/20 l
10/1 30 ml
60 m
A
Water
Container
Figure 8-3-1 Pressure gauge fixture installed
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-3-3
8.3.3 SIDE “A” 60 ML SYRINGE:

1. Connect syringe and the pressure test assembly to the ‘A’ Ram, refer to the pressure
test assembly description in this chapter. Fill syringe with tap water and purge the
air.
2. Program the following injection: 60 mL @ 4 mL/sec. @ 150 psi. on side A.
3. Run the complete injection and note the following:
The peak measurement shall be 150 psi. ± 10
NOTE: the pressure bar graph on the console display will indicate a pressure
value slightly lower than 150 psi. This is normal since the bar graph is display-
ing the average pressure while the injector’s calibration point is peak.
NOTE: that after the injection, pressing the “Results” button on the console will
display the achieved parameters of the last 8 injections; (the last 16 if pressed
twice). The pressure listed on this screen is also an average pressure, and shall
be within ± 10 psi. of the programmed and achieved peak values.
4. If the pressure needs to be adjusted, perform the following steps:
a. On the Test Switch Assembly, press the UP or DOWN buttons This action will raise
or lower the bottom (0335) value, F7, on the Test Display (Note that lowering the
number will increase the pressure).
8—CALIBRATION
b. After an adjusted value is displayed, press the Enter button on the Test Switch
Assembly. This will change the top value, F6 on the Test Display, to match the
lower value F7 that was just modified.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 as required until the 150 psi. specification is reached.
Again, the pressure indicated on the results screen must match the calibration
point of 150 ± 10 psi. as well.
6. Check no-load flow rate by performing the following steps:
a. Remove the syringe from the head.
b. Set UP the same shot as in step 2 above.
c. Toggle test display to mode 6
d. Run the shot. The flow rate displayed on the test display shall be 4.0 +/- .1 mL/
sec., (390-410), indicated under “Volume ML”, F5.
e. Note that for all injections, the real-time flow rate is displayed while in this mode,
and that when pressure limiting is engaged, the real-time flow rate will always be
lower than programmed.
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-3-4
8.3.4 SIDE “B” 60 ML SYRINGE:

1. While in Mode 1 on the Test Display, install a 60 mL syringe on side B and A.
2. Program the following injection:
A side = 1 mL @ 1 mL/sec. @ 150 psi.
B side = 60 mL @ 4 mL/sec.
3. Run the injection. The measured peak shall be 150 psi. +/- 10 psi.
4. The Test Display will originally indicate a pressure limit value of (0330). This value
should be adjusted to achieve 150 psi. +/- 10 psi.
a. On the Test Switch Assembly, press the UP or DOWN buttons to change the F7
bottom value UP or DOWN as required. Note, that lowering the number will in-
crease the pressure. After the adjusted value is displayed, press the Enter button.
This will change the top F6 value to match the lower F7 value.
5. Repeat this process as many times as necessary to achieve the specification above.
8.3.5 SIDE “B” 125 ML SYRINGE:
1. Replace the 60 mL syringe with a 125 mL syringe.
2. Setup the same injection as in step 2 of section 8.3.4.
8—CALIBRATION
3. Run the injection. The measured peak shall be 100 psi. +/- 10 psi.
4. Adjust pressure in the same manner as the A side. The Test Display will originally
indicate a pressure limit value of (0165) and should be adjusted accordingly to
achieve 100 psi. +/- 10 psi using the Test Switch Assembly.
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-3-5
8.3.6 SIDE “A” 20 ML SYRINGES

1. Install the 20 mL syringe adapter on side “A”.
NOTE: On the test display, the injector defaults to (0625) for 20 mL syringe.
2. With a 20 mL syringe installed, program the following injection: 20 mL, 4.0 mL/s,
200 psi.
3. Run the injection. The measured peak shall be 200 psi +/- 10 psi.
4. If needed, adjust the pressure calibration value in field F6. (Note again that lower-
ing the number will increase the pressure.)
5. Repeat steps 4 & 5 above as many times as necessary to achieve the 200 psi specifi-
cation.
8.3.7 SIDE “A” 30 ML SYRINGE
1. Install the 30 mL syringe on side “A”.
NOTE: On the test display, the injector defaults to (0355).
2. With a 30 mL syringe installed, program the following injection: 30 mL, 4.0 mL/s,
200 psi.
8—CALIBRATION
5. Repeat steps 3 through 5 above as many times as necessary to achieve the 200 psi
specification.
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-3-6
8.3.8 SIDE “B” 50 ML SYRINGE

NOTE: A 30 mL syringe will be used on the B side to simulate a 50 mL syringe
for
calibration purposes.
1. Install the 30 mL syringe on side “B”.
2. On the main screen, program a 1 mL/s, 1 mL injection for A, and a 4 mL/s 30 mL
injection for the B side. Set the maximum pressure at 200 psi.
NOTE: On the test display, the default value is (0365).
5. Repeat steps 3 through 5 above as many times as necessary to achieve the 200 psi
specification.
NOTE: The pressure fixture on the A - side must be fully inserted into the A -
side nest. If not fully inserted, the injector will see “60 mL” and not allow you to
program 200 psi max. pressure limit on the A - side.
8—CALIBRATION
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-4-1
8.4 ADDITIONAL CHECKS (FACTORY ADJUSTED)

NOTE: The following items do not have to be performed as part of a regular
calibration process.
8.4.1 SYRINGE SIZE FACTOR CHECK, (POWER CONSUMPTION) :
The power consumption of the injector becomes higher at lower flow rates. To
compensate for this, different ‘power consumption’ values are in the software
depending on the size of the syringe installed. These default values are factory
adjusted and would not normally be changed.
1. Toggle the Test Display to mode 6 by pressing the “Mode” button on the Test Switch
Assembly.
2. Momentarily press a fill or expel button on the ‘A’ Ram on the powerhead to toggle
the Test Display to indicate the ‘A’ Ram information.
3. With no syringe adapters installed, (ready for a 60 mL syringe), the test display shall
indicate (493) for the A side.
4. Install a 30 mL syringe into the A side and confirm that the value on the Test Dis-
play changes to (470).
5. Repeat the above steps for the ‘B’ side.
125 mL syringe B side = 1012
8—CALIBRATION
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-4-2

8—CALIBRATION
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-5-1
8.5 EXIT CALIBRATION MODE:

Switch Console off first, then switch off Power Control.
Switch #3 of SW1 on the CPU board of the Power Control to OFF.
All calibrations are now saved and the system has exited the calibration mode.
NOTE: This order must always be followed when exiting Calibration Mode.
NOTE: Properly switching the system off anywhere during the calibration pro-
cess will allow the system to store the performed calibrations.
NOTE: All 4 switches on the Power Control CPU board shall be off.
8—CALIBRATION
818507-M 2020-05-05
8-5-2

8—CALIBRATION
818507-M 2020-05-05
9-1-1
9 SYSTEM
INFORMATION
This chapter describes System Information mode features. From the System
Information screen the following features are available:
• Set Display Brightness
• Change Pressure Units
• Set Beeper Volume
• Change Language
• Set Date and Time
• View Alarm History
• Enter Service Mode
• Phase Delay (refer to Operator Manual)
• Inject Delay (refer to Operator Manual)
• Scan Delay (refer to Operator Manual)
• Patency Check (refer to Operator Manual)
• View Software Version
9—SYSTEM
SETUP
818507-M 2020-05-05
9-1-2
9.1 ACTIVATING SYSTEM INFORMATION SCREEN

To activate the system information screen proceed as follows:
1. Turn on Console power.
2. Touch the System Info screen button.
3. The System Information Screen will be displayed. To exit this screen, simply touch
either the Memory, Main, or Results buttons.
System Information
Display Brightness Low High Pressure Units PSI
Beeper Volume Off Low Med High
Software Versions Console: V1.03 Power Control: V1.02
Language English German Spanish French
Italian Portuguese
Patency Check On
Change Date Change Time Service Mode Phase Delay On
Inject Delay On
NOV 04 2004 10:07
9—SYSTEM
Alarm History Scan Delay On

SETUP
Memory Main Results
818507-M 2020-05-05
9-1-3
9.1.1 SETTING DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

1. Activate System Information Screen as previously described.
2. Simply touch the appropriate screen button to adjust display brightness.
9.1.2 CHANGE PRESSURE UNITS
This feature will change MAIN screens to the pressure units selected.
2. Touch the Pressure Unit screen button. Pressure units will toggle between KPA and
PSI.
9.1.3 SET BEEPER VOLUME
2. Simply touch any one to the four Beeper Volume screen buttons. The beeper vol-
ume will change each time a button is touched.
9.1.4 CHANGING LANGUAGES
This feature will change display information to the language selected.
2. Simply touch the Language screen button. The language will change each time a
button is touched.
9.1.5 SET DATE AND TIME
9—SYSTEM
SETUP
2. Touch either the Change Date or Change Time screen button.
3. Touch the arrow buttons provide to increment or decrement units.
4. To exit either function (Date or Time), simply touch the Change Date or Change
Time buttons.
9.1.6 VIEW ALARM HISTORY
2. Simply touch the Alarm History screen button. The alarm history screen will be
displayed.
3. Touch the System button to return to the System Information screen.
818507-M 2020-05-05
9-1-4
9.2 SERVICE MODE

In Service Mode the following features are available:
• Screen Calibration
• Erase Alarms
To access this mode proceed as follows:
2. Press and hold the Hand button, then touch the Service Mode screen button.
9.2.1 SCREEN CALIBRATION
1. Activate service mode as previously described.
2. Touch the Screen Cal screen button.
3. Touch upper left corner red square.
4. Touch lower right corner red square.
5. Touch the center red square.
6. When screen calibration is complete, the System Information screen will be dis-
played.
NOTE: If the red touch targets continue to reappear, this means a touch target
was missed during the calibration process. Simply repeat the calibration pro-
cess until the System Information screen is displayed.
9—SYSTEM
NOTE: If one of the red touch targets does not appear, this means the touch
SETUP
screen is physically misaligned. Refer to 6.2 for console procedures.

9.2.2 ERASE ALARMS
1. Activate service mode as previously described.
2. Touch the Erase screen button.
3. All alarms are erased.
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-1-1
10 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
AND UPGRADE
10.1 OVERVIEW
The OptiStar Elite software resides in FLASH memory that can be repro-
grammed without chip removal and replacement. This configuration uses
a personal computer to download the code to the memory ICs via software
download adaptor cables.
The minimum requirements to perform the software download via a USB port
on a Windows 7 or later computer are as follows.
• 904250, USB-ML-UNIVERSAL-FX Programmer Kit, which includes:
- One (1) USB-ML-UNIVERSAL-FX Download Adapter
- One (1) USB High Speed Cable, Type A to Type B
- One (1) 10-pin 0.100” Pitch Ribbon Cable for Power Control
- One (1) 26-pin 0.100” Pitch Ribbon Cable for the Console
- One (1) “LF-FX-32-CF-CD” (CD-ROM) containing:
- PROG32Z.EXE to download the Power Control software
- PROGCFZ.EXE to download the console software.
10—SOFTWARE
• INJECTOR SOFTWARE (CD-ROM)
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
NOTE: Main injector software is composed of two software sub-versions.
Both major components, Power Control, and Console must have a compat-
ible combination of software sub-versions in order for the injector to function
properly.
To check compatibility, compare the software sub-versions on the SYSTEM
INFO SCREEN with the compatibility matrix file supplied with the software.
To select the SYSTEM INFO SCREEN proceed as follows:
1. Press the System Info button. The SYSTEM INFO SCREEN will be displayed.
2. Write down the software versions displayed.
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-1-2
10.1.1 SOFTWARE TRANSFER FROM CD

Open and view the contents of the CD.
Highlight the folder on the CD with the name OptiStar Elite. Then copy the
entire folder to the root directory on the C: drive by dragging the folder and
dropping it on the C: drive. (You may also use Copy and Paste.) When you are
finished with this copy, there should be a folder called “C:\OptiStar Elite” on
your hard drive.
• Open the new folder containing the new software in C: drive
(For example, C:\OptiStar Elite).
• Click Edit, then Select All from the Windows drop down menu.
Right click on one of the selected files and select Properties.
• Deselect the Read-only Box. Then click Apply, then OK.
10.1.2 PROG32Z AND PROGCFZ SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

PROGCFZ and PROG32Z software V5.10 are compatible with the new USB-
based download adapter (904250).
If the PROG32z.exe and PROGcfz.exe Version 5.10 programs are already in-
stalled on the computer, skip the installation. Otherwise, continue with the
following installation instructions.
If the previous version installed in the computer, uninstall it before installing
the new software.
1. Insert this CD into the computer. If the CD does not automatically run the Setup
10—SOFTWARE
Program, open the CD using Windows Explorer and run the “setup.exe” program by
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
double-clicking the file name. This will install the PROG32z and PROGcfz files on
the computer hard drive under C:\pemicro folder.
2. Remove the CD after the installation completed.
3. Run PROG322 software, a License Activation window will appear.
4. Enter the “Installation Code” as provided.
5. Enter email address.
6. Press the “Automatic Activation” button.
7. Close PROG32Z.
8. Run PROGCFZ and repeat the License Activation.
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-1
10.2 DOWNLOAD AND UPGRADE PROCEDURES

Procedures defined in this section will assume you have completed instructions
10.1.1 OPTISTAR ELITE SOFTWARE TRANSFER FROM CD PROCEDURE.
NOTE: Software updates to the Power Control could affect calibration param-
eters. Refer to Chapter 8 in this document for procedures.
WARNING!
Always remove Power Control and Powerhead assembly from magnet
room before disassembly and upgrading. Failure to follow this warning
10—SOFTWARE
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-2
10.2.1 INJECTOR PROTOCOL CHECKING PROCEDURE

The purpose of is procedure is to provide the reliability check of the current
protocol values stored in Injector memory. This procedure should only be used
if the new version of the console software updated in the existing hardware.
1. Before performing the software upgrade, turn on the injector, Press MEMORY but-
ton from the Console screen and record all protocols from the Memory screen. You
can either write it down or take the picture of the console screen and store it in a
safe place.
2. Perform the software upgrade as instructed in section 10.2.
3. Compare the protocols display on the memory screen before and after the up-
grade. If a protocol does not match, erase that protocol from the memory screen.
10—SOFTWARE
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-3
10.2.2 CONSOLE DOWNLOAD

1. Following INJECTOR PROTOCOL CHECKING PROCEDURE, Section 10.2.1, to record
injector protocols in the memory. Note: The Console must be connected to the
Power Control to complete this procedure.
2. Power off to the injector.
3. Remove the console back cover as described in Chapter 6.2.
4. Connect the Software Download Adapter cable to the Console CPU board as
shown in Figure 10-3-1. Be sure the cable red wire (pin 1) is correctly oriented to J4
pin 1 when making this connection.
Figure 10-2-2 Console Software Download Cable orientation

5. Turn on power to the PC and Power Supply, then to the Power Control, then Con-
sole. The Console screen will remain blank.
10—SOFTWARE
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-4
6. Run the progcfz.exe file from C:\PEmicro. May also be

found using the “Start”, then “Programs” be pull down RUN
menus. PROGCFZ.EXE
The “PEMICRO Connection Manager” will display.

Ensure the following settings are correct and click on
“Connect(/Reset)” button.
SELECT
“CHOOSE MODULE”
SELECT
“Console.cfp”
PRESS
ENTER
TYPE 0
10—SOFTWARE
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
PRESS
ENTER
7. As “Specify Programming Algorithm to Use!” pop-up
window is presented, select “Console.cfp” file from the
“C:\Optistar Elite folder”.
If you need to re-select CFP file, select “CM choose SELECT
module .CFP” and select the new 32P file and ERASE MODULE
press ENTER.
8. Type a 0 (zero) in the “Base Address” pop up window
and press enter.
PRESS
9. From the Choose Programming Function window, ENTER
select “EM ERASE MODULE” and press enter. The status
section at the “Status Window” will tell the user when
the task is complete.
CONTINUE
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-5
10. From “Choose Programming Function” window,

double click on “SS SPECIFY OBJECT FILE”. CONTINUE
11. Select the PowerControl.s19 file and press ENTER.
SPECIFY OBJECT FILE
PRESS
ENTER
SELECT
“Console.S19”
select “PM PROGRAM MODULE” and press ENTER.
The status section at the bottom of the screen will
display “Programed” when the task is completed. PRESS
ENTER
SELECT
PROGRAM MODULE
13. Select “QUIT” and press enter.

14. Remove power using the ON/OFF switch on the
PRESS
power supply. ENTER
10—SOFTWARE
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
15. When power control download is completed, re
move the PC data cable at the power control CPU
board.
“PROGRAMMED”
IS DISPLAYED
SELECT
“QUICK”
PRESS
ENTER
COMPLETED
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-6
10.2.3 POWER CONTROL DOWNLOAD

1. Ensure that the power to the injector is off.
2. Remove the Power Control front cover as described in Chapter 6.4.
3. Pull the Power Control CPU board outward to expose connector J4 as shown in
Figure 10-2-1. Connect USB-ML-UNIVERSAL-FX Programmer Kit to the J4 connector
via 10 pin ribbon cable, then slide the CPU board inward until it is fully seated.
Figure 10-2-1 Power Control cable location

10—SOFTWARE
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
4. Turn on power to the PC and Power Control.

5. Turn system power on using the console power ON/OFF button. Ignore any mes-
sages that appear on the console screen.
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-7
6. Run the progcfz.exe file from C:\PEmicro\PROGCFZ.

May also be found using the “Start”, then “Programs” RUN
be pull down menus. PROG32Z.EXE
The “PEMICRO Connection Manager” will display.

Ensure the following settings are correct and
click on “Connect(/Reset)” button.
SETUP COMM PARMS
AND CONNECT
SELECT
“PowerControl.32p”
PRESS
ENTER
TYPE 0
10—SOFTWARE
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
PRESS
ENTER
7. As “Specify Programming Algorithm to Use!” pop-up
window is presented, select PowerControl.32p file
from the “C:\Optistar Elite” folder.
If you need to re-select 32P file, select “CM choose SELECT
module .32p” and select the new 32P file and press ERASE MODULE
ENTER.
8. Type a 0 (zero) in the “Base Address” pop up window
and press enter.
PRESS
9. From the Choose Programming Function window, ENTER
select “EM ERASE MODULE” and press enter. The sta-
tus section at the “Status Window” will tell the user
when the task is complete.
CONTINUE
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-8

double click on “SS SPECIFY OBJECT FILE”. CONTINUE
11. Select the PowerControl.s19 file and press ENTER.
SPECIFY OBJECT FILE
PRESS
ENTER
SELECT
“PowerControl.S19”
select “PM PROGRAM MODULE” and press ENTER.
The status section at the bottom of the screen will
display “PROGRAMMED” when the task is complete. PRESS
ENTER
SELECT
PROGRAM MODULE

13. Using the arrow keys on the PC Keyboard select
“QUIT” and press enter. PRESS
ENTER
10—SOFTWARE
14. Remove power using the ON/OFF switch on the

AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
power supply.
15. When power control download is complete,
remove the PC data cable at the power control VERIFY
CPU board. RESULT
SELECT
QUIT
PRESS
ENTER
COMPLETED
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-9
IMPORTANT:
• If service repair requires replacement of the CPU board or any other major com-
ponent dealing with pressure, syringe size, or switch limit in the Power Control,
the full calibration is required. Following section 10.2.3.2 for Full Calibration
Procedure.
• If full calibration is not required, following the Calibration Checking Procedure
in section 10.2.3.1 to remove Alarm 23, Checksum error, and to retain the cali-
bration parameters.
• If the same software version download to the board, new software version is
the same old software version, no calibration is required.
10.2.3.1 CALIBRATION CHECKING PROCEDURE

1. Connect the Test Display and the Test Switch assembly to the Power Control CPU
board as described in Chapter 8, section 8.1.3.
2. Set SW3 to the ON position. SW3 ON position is toward the edge of the CPU board.
3. Turn on the power to the injector.
Note: The console will display Alarm 23 at power up. This is normal.
4. Using the Test Switch assembly as per section 8.1.7, go to mode 7 on the test dis-
play and note the value in the “TIME” window in the lower right section of the Test
Display. This is field F8. (Refer to figure 8-1-2 for field locations)
5. Press the “Enter” button on the Test Switch assembly while observing field F8,
“Time”, on the Test Display. The value in F8 will change after a few seconds.
10—SOFTWARE
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
6. After the value in F8 has changed, remove power from the injector by turning off
the Power Supply. Remove the Test Display and Test Switch assembly and return
SW3 to OFF.
7. Power on the injector. Check all calibration parameters. Refer to chapter 8.
10.2.3.2 FULL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

1. Perform the Initialization of the Power Control CPU Ram procedure as described in
section 8.1.4 in chapter 8.
2. Perform all calibration procedures as described in Chapter 8.
818507-M 2020-05-05
10-2-10

10—SOFTWARE
AND UPGRADE
DOWNLOAD
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-1-1
11 SCHEMATICS
OVERVIEW
Schematics presented in this chapter are divided into the following sections:
• Section 11-2 Power Control
• Section 11-3 Console
• Section 11-4 Powerhead
• Section 11-5 Power Supply
• Section 11-6 Hand Button
• Section 11-7 Cabling
11—OVERVIEW
SCHEMATICS
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-1-2

11—OVERVIEW
SCHEMATICS
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-1
+5V
+5V
R167
1
1
R155
4.7K 4.7K
1
C130 C142 C143 C134 C124 C123 C125 C126+ C141
2
2
TP14
0.1uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 10uF,25V
2
BA[0..18]
BA[0..18]
* TSC will be driven to 8.0v during testing to float '332.
1
+5V U10 +5V U11 +5V U12
P7[0..7] 20 20 20
P7[0..7] VCC 1 VCC 1 VCC 1
DIR DIR TP13 DIR
107
116
126
101
106
117
127
1
66
19
18
28
39
50
63
65
84
96
17
29
34
40
51
59
67
83
95
69
57
+ C119 C120 C128
1
7
2
8
CONSOLE COM C118 0.1uF 19 19 19
INTERFACE 10uF,25V OUTENA 0.01uF OUTENA 0.1uF OUTENA
VSTBY
CLKOUT
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
HALT
TSC
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
2
DRVR/RCVR 90 A0 10 10 10
+5V R161 A0 GND GND GND
1 2 128 20 A1
T2CLK A1 A0 18 2 BA0 A8 18 2 BA8 A16 18 2 BA16
+5V 4.7K 16 21 B0 A0 B0 A0 B0 A0
74HC245
74HC245
74HC245
TPU0 A2
U41 TC 428COA TPUCH0 A2 A1 17 3 BA1 A9 17 3 BA9 A17 17 3 BA17
6 TPU1 15 22 A3 B1 A1 B1 A1 B1 A1
+5V Vcc TPUCH1 A3 A2 16 4 BA2 A10 16 4 BA10 A18 16 4 BA18
1 TPU2 14 23 A4 B2 A2 B2 A2 B2 A2
NC C101 TPUCH2 A4 15 5 15 5 15 5
1
+ A3 BA3 A11 BA11 MR SYS_RESET
C98 TPU3 13 24 A5 B3 A3 B3 A3 B3 A3
8 TPUCH3 A5 14 6 14 6 14 6
2
A4 BA4 A12 BA12 TPU0 INIT_DONE

NC 0.1uF 10uF,25V P70 12 25 A6 B4 A4 B4 A4 B4 A4
2
R125
3 TPUCH4 A6 A5 13 7 BA5 A13 13 7 BA13 TPU1 13 7 BOOT_CRC

330
GND P71 11 26 A7 B5 A5 B5 A5 B5 A5
TPUCH5 A7 A6 12 8 BA6 A14 12 8 BA14 TPU2 12 8 SERIAL_OK
P72 10 27 A8 B6 A6 B6 A6 B6 A6
1
RXD-IN 2 7 RXD TPUCH6 A8 A7 11 9 BA7 A15 11 9 BA15 TPU3 11 9 TS_OK

RXD-IN IN_A OUT_A P73 9 30 A9 B7 A7 B7 A7 B7 A7
TPUCH7 A9
4 5 TXD P74 6 31 A10
IN_B OUT_B TXD TPUCH8 A10
P75
P76
5
4
TPUCH9
332 A11
32
33
A11
A12
HSMH C650
TPUCH10 A12 STATUS LED'S
3
CPU 35
2
P77 A13
TPUCH11 A13 FROM CPU
CPU-TXD 132 36 A14
TPUCH12 A14
131 37
DS3
DS2
DS1
A15
1
TPUCH13 A15
DS5
DS4
U42D 11 130 38 A16
SPKR 13 TPUCH14 A16
SPKR 12 SPEAKER_OUT 129 U13 41 A17
TPUCH15 A17
2 820 1
2 820 1
2 820 1
1 820 2
2 820 1
74HC02 +5V 42
2
A18
R85
R87
R94
R111
R116
MC68332 A18
S1
+5V
R193 R170 R194
27K 27K 27K
8 1 43
PQS0/MISO
2
1
S1A R131 R132 R133 R134 MOSI 44 +5V
27K 27K 27K 27K MOSI PQS1/MOSI
7 2 SCK 45 121 R\A\M\w\r\H\I\b\y\t\ CS6
SCK PQS2/SCK PC3/A19/CS6 CS6
S1B PCS0 46 122 R\A\M\o\u\t\E\N\A\ CS7
1
PQS3/PCS0/SS PC4/A20/CS7 CS7

6 3 PCS1 47 123 S\I\M\w\r\L\O\b\y\t\ CS8
PQS4/PCS1 PC5/A21/CS8 CS8
S1C PCS2 48 124 S\I\M\w\r\H\I\b\y\t\ CS9
PQS5/PCS2 PC6/A22/CS9 CS9
5 4 PCS3 49 125 S\I\M\o\u\t\E\N\A\ CS10
PQS6/PCS3 A23/CS10 CS10
S1D +5V 52 120 R\A\M\w\r\L\O\b\y\t\ CS5
PQS7/TXD PC2/FC2/CS5 CS5
2
Flash Pgm & Simulation

R152 53 119
P&E BDM Ser-Par I/F R147 27K RXD PC1/FC1/CS4
118 I\-\O\_\W\R\T\ CS3
27K PC0/FC0/CS3 CS3
BERR 70 115
1
BERR BERR BGACK/CS2

IPIPE 54 114 I\-\O\_\O\E\ CS1
IPIPE IPIPE/DSO BG/CS1 CS1
IFETCH 55 113 R\A\M\_\E\N\ CS0
IFETCH IFETCH/DSI BR/CS0 CS0
BKPT 56 112 R\O\M\b\o\o\t\ CSBOOT
BKPT BKPT/DSCLK CSBOOT CSBOOT
68
RESET
FREEZE 58 +5V +5V
FREEZE FREEZE/QUOT
PF0/MODCLK
85 82
PE1/DSACK1
PE0/DSACK0
A\d\r\S\t\r\b\ AS
PE5/DS PE4/AS AS
RN1 RN3
PE2/AVEC
60 79 10K 10K
1
PF7/IRQ7
PF6/IRQ6
PF5/IRQ5
PF4/IRQ4
PF3/IRQ3
PF2/IRQ2
PF1/IRQ1
PE3/RMC
+5V XTAL-IN W\r\i\t\e\S\t\r\b\ R/W
PE7/SIZ1
PE6/SIZ0
VDDSYN
+5V XTAL R/W R/W
E-XTAL-IN 62
EXTAL
XFC
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
R159
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R65 1 2
2
1
3
R62
D1 110 U14
1K
61
64
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
80
81
86
87
88
89
91
92
93
94
97
98
99
10
10
100
102
103
104
105
108
109
110
111
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10M +5V
BAS19 20
Power On XFC VCC 1 R/W
DIR
2 330K 1
BD10
BD11
BD12
BD13
BD14
BD15
Reset Det.
1
C152
BD0
BD1
BD2
BD3
BD4
BD5
BD6
BD7
BD8
BD9
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
+5V R171
1
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
+
R158
4.7K C151
MRINPUT 2 1 D[0..15] 19
IN RESET C135 10uF,25V 0.1uF OUTENA BD[0..15]
2
3 8 Y1 10 BD[0..15]
NC NC GND
IN_E7
IN_E6
IN_E1
IN_E0
0.1uF
1
1
C57 5 7 1 4
1
32KH1
NC NC C136 D0 18 2 BD0
0.1uF 4 6 B0 A0
74HC245
2
+5V
GND NC 0.01uF 17 3
1
C127 32.000KHZ D1 BD1

2
C132 B1 A1
U19
IN_E7
IN_E6
IN_E1
IN_E0
34064 D2 16 4 BD2
S2 27pF 27pF B2 A2
2
D3 15 5 BD3
B3 A3
2 1 D4 14 6 BD4
+5V R166 B4 A4
1 2 NMI D5 13 7 BD5
B5 A5
4.7K D6 12 8 BD6
B6 A6
MR D7 11 9 BD7
MR B7 A7
+5V
DS
DS
U15
11—POWER CONTROL
+5V
20
1
VCC 1 R/W
R5 R2 R162 R27 DIR
4.7K 4.7K 4.7K
1
4.7K
C159
19
2
0.1uF OUTENA
2
UPP-IRQ6 10
SCHEMATICS
UPP-IRQ6 GND
UPP-IRQ5
UPP-IRQ5 D8 18 2 BD8
RY/BY B0 A0
RY/BY D9 17 3 BD9
74ACT245
PROGRAM B1 A1
PROGRAM D10 16 4 BD10
MOT-IRQ2 B2 A2
MOT-IRQ2 D11 15 5 BD11
IO-IRQ1 B3 A3
IO-IRQ1 D12 14 6 BD12
B4 A4
D13 13 7 BD13
B5 A5
D14 12 8 BD14
B6 A6
D15 11 9 BD15
B7 A7
POWER CONTROL CPU SCHEMATIC 814201-2-C (1 OF 7)

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-2
80000 - 83FFF
16K - SY STEM NONVOLATILE SRAM 8400 - C3FFF
256K - SDS ROM-SIMULATION RAM
|VCAP
+5V +5V
U5 U3
STK12C68-S45 +5V HM628128 U8 HM628128
BA1 10 28 BA1 12 32 BA1 12 32
U2 A00 Vcc A0 VC C A0 VC C
STK12C68-S45 +5V BA2 9 1 BA2 11 30 BA2 11 30
10 28 A01 Vca p A1 CS2 A1 CS2
1
BA1 +
A00 Vcc 8 C63 C71 10 C54 C93 10
128K x8
C92
1
BA3 + BA3 BA3
BA2 9 1 A02 8K x8
100uF A2 128K x8 A2 SR AM
A01 Vca p 7
NV SR AM 0.01uF 9
SR AM 0.1uF 9 0.1uF
1
BA4 BA4 10uF,25V BA4
2
8 C25 C47 + C33 A03 14 16V A3 16 A3 16
1
BA3
2
A02 8K x8 + 100uF 0.1uF 10uF,25V BA5 6 Vss BA5 8 GND BA5 8 GND
NV SR AM A04 A4 A4
BA4 7 1 1
2
A03 14 16V 5 7 N/C 7 N/C
BA6 BA6 BA6
2
BA5 6 Vss A05 27 A5 29 CS8 A5 29 CS9
A04 BA7 4 R /W BA7 6 WE BA7 6 WE
BA6 5 A06 22 CS7 A6 24 CS10 A6 24 CS10
A05 27 CS5 BA8 3 G BA8 5 OE BA8 5 OE
BA7 4 R /W A07 A7 22 A7 22
A06 22 25 27 CS1 27 CS1
2
CS7 BA9 BA9 BA9

3 G A08 A8 A8
1
2
BA8
R29 A07 24 26 26
1
C111 R97
BA10
A09
BA10
A9
BA10
A9
0.1uF 4.7K BA9 25 C112 11 BD8 13 BD0 13 BD8
A08 0.1uF 4.7K BA11 21 D0 BA11 23 I/O0 BA11 23 I/O0
2
BA10 24 A10 12 BD9 A10 14 BD1 A10 14 BD9

1
2
A09 11 BD0 BA12 23 D1 BA12 25 I/O1 BA12 25 I/O1
1
BA11 21 D0 A11 13 BD10 A11 15 BD2 A11 15 BD10
A10 12 BD1 BA13 2 D2 BA13 4 I/O2 BA13 4 I/O2
BA12 23 D1 A12 15 BD11 A12 17 BD3 A12 17 BD11
A11 13 BD2 D3 BA14 28 I/O3 BA14 28 I/O3
BA13 2 D2 16 BD12 A13 18 BD4 A13 18 BD12
A12 15 BD3 D4 BA15 3 I/O4 BA15 3 I/O4
D3 20 17 BD13 A14 19 BD5 A14 19 BD13
16 BD4 EN A D5 BA16 31 I/O5 BA16 31 I/O5
D4 18 BD14 A15 20 BD6 A15 20 BD14
20 17 BD5 D6 BA17 2 I/O6 BA17 2 I/O6
EN A D5 26 19 BD15 A16 21 BD7 A16 21 BD15
18 BD6 BUSY D7 I/O7 I/O7
D6
26 19 BD7
BUSY D7
R \A\M\_\E\N\
CS5 R \A\M\w\r\L\O\b\y\t\
CS5
CS6 R \A\M\w\r\H\I\b\y\t\
CS6
CS7 R \A\M\o\u\t\E\N\A\
CS7
CS8 S \I\M\w\r\L\O\b\y\t\
CS8
CS9 S \I\M\w\r\H\I\b\y\t\
CS9
CS10 S \I\M\o\u\t\E\N\A\
CS1 0
BD[0..15] DATA DATA DATA

BD[0..1 5]
0 - 7FFFF
BA[0..18] ADDRESS ADDRESS 512 - PROGRAM FLASH EPROM
BA[0..1 8]
U9 29F400T +5V
BA1 11 23
A0 VC C
BA2 10 33
A1 BYTE
BA3 9 1
A2 NC C109
1
BA4 8 +
A3 10uF,25V
256K x16
BA5 7
2
A4 Flash ME M
1
BA6 6 C106
A5
11—POWER CONTROL
BA7 5 13 0.1uF
2
A6 VSS
BA8 4 32
A7 VSS
BA9 42
A8
SCHEMATICS
BA10 41 15 BD0
A9 DQ0
BA11 40 17 BD1
A10 DQ1
BA12 39 19 BD2
A11 DQ2
BA13 38 21 BD3
A12 DQ3
BA14 37 24 BD4
+5V A13 DQ4
BA15 36 26 BD5
A14 DQ5
BA16 35 28 BD6
A15 DQ6
1
R124 BA17 34 30 BD7
A16 DQ7
4.7K BA18 3 16 BD8
A17 DQ8
18 BD9
2
DQ9
P GM R DY /B\S \Y\ 2 20 BD10
RY/BY RY/BY DQ10
44 22 BD11
MR RESET DQ11
25 BD12
CSBOOT 12 DQ12
CSBOO T CE 27 BD13
R/W 43 DQ13
R /W WE 29 BD14
BOOT_PGM* 14 DQ14
OE 31 BD15
+5V DQ15/A- 1
U16
5
1
4
2 GT32
PROGRAM
3
R143
47K

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-3
+3.3V +5V
U25
TP10
TP15
TP16
1
+ +5V
BA[0..18] C18 4
BA[0..1 8] 6.8uF,16V 1 VC C
EN/D I
1
1
2
C22
FB-UPB
AUX0
AUX1
AUX2
BA10
BA9
BA8
BA7
BA6
BA5
BA4
BA3
BA2
BA1
BA0
0.1uF
2
3
CLK8 OUT 2 +5V
GND
BD[0..15]
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
BD[0..1 5]
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
84
85
86
87
88
93
94
95
96
97
98
8.0 MHz Osc.
2
BD15
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
1 IO
PH_B_B R21 R22 R164 R165
BD14 2 U1 PH_B_ B 2.2K 2.2K 47K 47K
IO
PH_B_A
BD13 PH_B_ A
1
3 IO IO 109
UPP
PH_A_B
BD12 4 110 AD_CS PH_A_ B IN_E1
IO IO
PH_A_A IN_E1
BD11 5 111 PH_A_ A IN_E0
IO IO
PH_C_A IN_E0
BD10 6 112 AD_A0 PH_C _A IN_E7
IO IO
PH_C_B IN_E7
BD9 7 113 PH_C _B IN_E6
IO IO
TEST-A IN_E6
BD8 8 114 AD_A1 TEST- A VCO-CLK
IO IO
TEST-B VCO-CL K
UPP-IRQ6 11 117 TEST- B nc ENSWD
UPP-IRQ 6 IO IO EN S W D J5A
12 2 1 118 AD_DATA7 CS0
IO IO CS0 J5B
CS1 +3.3V 74
0.1uF
C2
13 119
CS1 IO IO 74 J5C
NC142
14 IO IO 120 AD_DATA6
nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc
R/W 15 10 2 1 126 121 (Unuse d
R /W IO G NDIO VCCINT IO
Spare I/O)
129
130
131
132
133
135
136
137
138
139
140
157
156
155
154
153
159
160
161
162
163
164
166
167
142
141
144
145
146
AD_DATA5
73
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
C10
0.1uF
16 IO G NDIO 26 90 VCCINT IO 122
DS 21 47 56 123
DS IO G NDIO VCCINT IO
76
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
D1
D2
D3
D4
C1
C2
C3
C4
Q4
Q5
Q6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
G1
G5
G2
G3
G4
22 65 2 1 19 124 AD_DATA4 Q3 147 73
IO G NDIO VCCINT IO
77 F1 73 J5D
MR Q2 148 72
C5
0.1uF
23 83 9 125
MR F2 72
Open Drain Output

Open Drain Output
Open Drain Output

Open Drain Output
IO G NDIO VCCIO 1 IO
78 J5E +3.3V
24 99 25 127 AD_DATA3 Q1 149 71
EXI 7 F3 71 J5F
UPP-CS 27 115 2 1 116 129 EXI AA4 150 70
UPP- C S IO G NDIO VCCIO 2 IO
8 F4 70 J5G
1
EXWR
AD_DATA2 EX W R AA3 Motor Control, 151 69
C3
0.1uF
28 135 136 130
LCD 9 F5 69 J5H R121 R180
LC D AA2 I/O Decode &
UPP-RDY 29 17 82 131 54 56K 56K
UPP-RD Y IO G NDINT VCCIO 3 IO
SYNC 10 Cal Test Control T3 nc
2 1 AD_DATA1 SYNC AA1 55
2
30 54 100 132
IO G NDINT VCCIO 3 IO
LCD0 11 T2 nc
LCD 0 Z5 56 SAMP-B
C8
0.1uF
31 92 46 133
IO G NDINT VCCIO 4 IO
LCD2 12 T1 SAM P- B
32 128 64 134 AD_DATA0 LCD 2 Z4 57 SAMP-A
from JTAG device 1 IO G NDINT VCCIO 4 IO
LCD3 13 U30 S6 SAM P- A
JTAG-TDO1 34 2 1 137 LCD 3 Z3 58
JTAG-TDO1 TDI IO
LCD1 15 EPM3512A S5 nc
JTAG-TDO LCD 1 Z2 59
0.1uF
C9
36 138
JTAG-TDO TDO IO
16 S4 nc
nc Z1 60
9
JTAG-TCK-IN 35 139
JTAG-TCK-IN TCK IO
TP3 1 17 S3 nc
JTAG-TMS-IN 33 140 AD_RD pv3 Y6 61
JTAG-TM S-IN TMS IO
TP2 1 LATCH-BT1_3 18 +3.3V S2 nc
Y5 62 SPD-CNG 1 16 SPD_CNG
61 IO IO 141 pv2 19 S1 nc o.c. SPD_CN G
60 142 UPP-RD Y Y4 2 1 +3.3V
IO IO
20 6 79
1
nc Y3 GNDIO P1 nc R129
2
U43A
8
C131
0.1uF
91 IO IO 143
R163 21 14 80 20K
nc Y2 GNDIO P2 nc
2
89 144 AD_INT +5V MC1413
IO IO
4.7K 22 32 81 R130 R128
nc Y1 GNDIO 2 1 P3 nc
2
20 IO
24 40 5 86 47K 47K
1
510L0041
nc X5 GNDIO VCCI O P4 nc
2
CLK8
C144
0.1uF
18
CLK8 IO
25 50 23 87
1
+3.3V
R169 R1 X4 GNDIO VCCI O P5 U43E
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
IO
nc nc
2.2K 2.2K 26 51 41 88 MC1413
nc X3 GNDIO 2 1 VCCI O O1
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
48
49
50
51
52
53
55
57
58
59
62
63
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
27 72 63 89 A_MOT 5 12 A-MOT
1
nc X2 GNDIO VCCI O O2 o.c. A-M OT
C145
0.1uF
FB-UPA 28 84 85 90 B_MOT 3 14 B-MOT
FB-UPA X1 Open Drain Output GNDIO VCCI O O3 o.c. B-M OT
PH_B_A
PH_A_A
PH_B_B
PH_A_B
29 94 105 91 6 11 1 2
FB-UPA
FB-UPB SYS-GO SYS-GO SYS-GO-LED
UPP-IRQ5 FB-UPB W5 Open Drain Output GNDIO 2 1 VCCI O O4 o.c. SYS-GO-LED
UPP-IRQ 5
P70
P71
P72
P73
P74
P75
P76
P77
31 108 107 U43C R142

nc W4 GNDIO VCCI O MC1413 U43F 110
C140
0.1uF
AD_DAT A
33 116 125 92 MC1413
nc W3 GNDIO VCCI O O5 nc
RESV-O 34 134 143 93
RESV- O W2 GNDIO 2 1 VCCI O O6 nc
P7[0..7] QWKB 35 152 165 95
P7[0.. 7] QW K B W1 GNDIO VCCI O N1 nc
C122
0.1uF
SWC0 36 158 191 96
S WC0 V5 GNDIO VCCI O N2 nc
P70
P71
P72
P73
P74
P75
P76
P77
SWC1 37 174 207 97

UPP-IRQ6 S WC1 V4 GNDIO 2 1 VCCI O N3 nc
UPP-IRQ 6 SWC2 38 200 98
S WC2 V3 GNDIO N4 nc
C121
0.1uF
39 99 1
2
SIZ0
R3 R172 R82 R7 R14 R16 R119 R8 R34 SIZ 0 V2 N5 V4 9600 Hz Direction set for A to B.
R6 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K SIZ1 42 100 1
1K 1K 1K SIZ 1 V1 N6
2 1 V3 1200 Hz +3.3V U33 +5V
P ULL-U P S SIZ0B 43 101 1 +5V 20
SIZ0 B U6 M1 V2 4.7 Hz 1 VC C
1
+5V
C129
0.1uF
FOR OPE N DR AIN . DIR
56K
AD_DATA[0..7] SIZ1B 44 102 1
47K
47K
47K
20K
47K
SIZ1 B U5 M2 V1 75 Hz
+5VANA U45 QWKA 45 75 74 103
QW K A U4 GNDINT 2 1 VCCIN T M3 nc 19
+5V FOR-LIM-A 46 82 83 104 OUTEN A
FOR-LIM -A U3 GNDINT VCCIN T M4 nc 10
3
R181
26V-AMPS-FILT
R184
R185
R192
R137
0.1uF
C138
R183
1 24
D5 D2 AIN4 VDD
BAK-LIM-A 47 180 179 106 GND
BAK-LIM -A U2 GNDINT VCCIN T M5 nc
1
26V-FILT 2 23
AIN3 NC
C17 FOR-LIM-B 48 185 186 109 P_SIN 2 18 P-SIN
PRESR-B AD_A0 FOR-LIM -B U1 GNDINT VCCIN T L1 A0 B0 P-SI N
1
PRESR -B 3 AIN2 A0 22 0.1uF 49 110 3 17

BAK-LIM-B M_SIN M-SIN
2
BAK-LIM -B T6 L2 A1 B1 M-SIN
74ACT245
PRESR-A 4 21 AD_A1
PRESR -A AIN1 A1
52 111 P_COS 4 16 P-COS
5 20 AD_DATA7 nc T5 L3 A2 B2 P-CO S
NC DB7
53 112 M_COS 5 15 M-COS
nc T4 L4 A3 B3 M-COS
11—POWER CONTROL
AD_DATA0 6 DB0 DB6 19 AD_DATA6
+5VANA 208 113 P-SPD-CNG 6 14 P_SPD_CNG
AD_DATA1 7 18 AD_DATA5 nc BB5 L5 A4 B4 P_SPD_C NG
DB1 DB5
1 114 SSR_ON 7 13 SSR-ON
R138 nc BB4 L6 A5 B5 SSR-O N (Ena 24V DC-DC)
3
AD_DATA2 AD_DATA4
D31 D30 R139 1K
8 DB2 DB4 17
2 115 PD-OUT-A F-to-F 8 12
1K AD_DATA3 9 16 AD_CS nc BB3 K1 PD-OUT- A XVRT A6 B6
DB3 /CS
+5VANA 3 117 A_DRV_FQ 1 TP7 9 11 UPP-CS
AD_RD nc BB2 K2 A7 B7 UPP- C S
1
10 15
SCHEMATICS
/RD RDY
4 118 PRESS_LIMIT 1
nc BB1 K3 TP8
1
26V-AN4 AD_INT
26V-AN 4 11 /INT VREF+ 14
C14 198 119 UPP_CS
26VA-AN6 12 13 0.1uF DD 4 K4
26VA-AN 6 G ND VREF-
199 120
2
DD 3 K5 nc
2
201 121
1
A AS
AS DD 2 K6 nc
2
C114 R141 510L0043
INP UT /OE 2/G C LK 2

R140 IO-IRQ1 202 122
0.1uF 10.0K, 1% IO-IRQ1 DD 1Open Drain Output J1 nc
2
511K, 1% 203 123

MOT-IRQ2
1
INP UT /G C LR n
INP UT /G C LK 1
MOT-IRQ2 CC 4Open Drain Output J2 nc
204 124
INP UT /OE 1
CS0
1
+3.3V
+5V MC33269-3.3 +3.3V CS0 CC 3 J3 nc
205 126
3 2 nc CC 2 J4 nc
G ND
Vin Vou t 206 128
2
T DO
DD5
T MS
A
TCK
EE4
EE3
EE2
EE1
FF4
FF3
FF2
FF1
CC 1 J5
T DI
nc nc
1
C5
B1
B2
B3
B4
A1
A2
A3
A4
+ C4 R154 R173
U44 6.8uF,16V 1K 1K
1
187
188
190
192
193
194
195
196
197
168
169
170
171
172
173
175
177
178
181
182
183
184
30
127
176
189
out to 2nd Altera device
1
JTAG-TDO1
JTAG-TDO1
+5V JTAG-TDI
NC190
JTAG-TDI
BA13
BA14
BA11
BA12
BA15
BA2
BA3
BA0
BA1
BA4
BA5
D6
BD10
BD11
BD12
BD13
BD14
BD15
+5VANA +12V JTAG-TMS-IN
BD8
BD9
+3.3V 1 2 nc
S1G BA[0..18] JTAG-TCK-IN
1
U27
C LK OU T (9.830 M Hz)
DS6 R160
1
1 8 4.7K TP5 Y3
1
1
+ BD[0..15] +5V
Red LED C104 OUT IN 4
2 7 VC C R168
1
2
CS3
1
+ (I\-\O\_\W\R \T\)
10uF,25V NC NC C116 CS3 PHAI 3
2
3 6 OUT 1K
MR
GND NC 10uF,25V 9.8304MHZ
2
2
4 5 (I\-\O\_\O\E \) CS1 1
NC SHD N ENABL E
2
R13 2
1
A
.47 1W GND
470
R135 LT1121CS8-5
1

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-4
+5v to -5V (40mA)

Converter (to SH 3, zD4)
+5V
U28
1
5 to -5V Q1E C11 3
2
X
C
1 8
1
BOOST + R14 4 0.1u F
V V+ C11 7
1
D9
2
2 7 8 U29 A C10 8
6
CAP1_M5 R OSC 221 1%
CAP+ 10uF,2 5V - 1000p F
1
C10 7 LM385Z-2. 5
2
+ A
3 T 6 7
1
A
2
GND R LV
10uF,2 5V
CAP2-M5 4 5 6MA_REF 1
2
A
CAP- Vou t + LT101 3
E
1 Q1
2
+
TP1 1
AGN D
C11 0
10uF,2 5V 2 1 2 1 B PZT2907AT 1 +5V CONSTANT I = 11.4m a
2
A Q1B TP9
LTC 1046
3
R13 6
2
0.1u F A R14 5 D10
-5V 6.8 K
C10 5 1.00K, 1% BAS1 9 2V OUT C14 8 C14 9
1
-5V
T
10uF,2 5V
K_6MA @ 175 OHM LOAD 10uF,2 5V
3 C
1
1
K_6M A
+
1 2 1 2 2 1
A D23
BAS1 9 R18 7
+
39K C14 7
C14 6
1
C15 5 R18 2 10uF,2 5V
A
1 2
+5V
10.0K, 1% 10uF,2 5V Frequency -to-Voltage-to-Frequency
+
PLLOUT1 1 2 1 2 PLLCAPS 2 1
R17 7
0.1u F Converter
392K 1%
+
1 2 2 U32 A
8
PD-OUT-A PLLIN1
PD-OUT- A - U31
1 1 2 PLL-T-FLT 1 2 5 U32 B +5V
+ 16
1 2 PLL2P5REF 3 R17 5 R17 6 7 1 2 1 2 PLL-OUT2 9 Vcc
+5V + TLC 272 10.0K, 1% 6.19K 1% VCOin C15 6 C15 4
1
R17 8 6 R19 1 R19 0 6 0.1u F +
1
R18 6 10uF,2 5V
4
10.0K, 1% + - TLC 272 6.19K 1% + C15 7 C1 A
1
C15 0
5.62K, 1% 4.7uF 25V 22.1K, 1% C15 3 PLL
2
1 uF, 16 V 1200 pF 8
2
R17 9 7 GND
PLL-FD_BK PLL-CAP2
2
10.0K, 1% C1 B
12 15
R2 PC3ou t
1
1
+ C16 0 13
PC2ou t
4.7uF 25V 11 10
2
R1 DEM out
3 1
COM Pin PCPo ut
2
R18 9 14 2
R18 8 SIGin PC1ou t
3.57K 1%
1.00M 1% 5 4 VCO-CLK
INH VCOou t VCO-CL K
1
74HC404 6A
+5V
U34 C
5 12
+5VANA
R1 7 1 2
2
TEST-A 1 2 6 11 R9 8 1 2
TEST- A R11 2
820 A 301k 1% (G=501) C8 8 A 20.0K, 1%
Pressure PS2501L -4 0.1u F 1 2
+5VANA
AFLT- C8 7
1
Sense A 2 1 2
7
-INA -IN_A 0.1u F
-IN A - U24 R10 1 R10 0 1 2 TP4
1 INA11 8 49.9K, 1% 4 U22 B
V+
R10 7 Av 22.1K, 1% _OP
1.00K, 1% R10 8 6 1 2 4 U23 B 5 1 2 8 U22 A
A
6
ASAMPIN
REF
_OP Amp -OP R11 3
1
100, 1% 8 5 2 1 1 2 3 R9 9 7 1 2
ASAMPOUT ASAMPFILT AFLT+IN AFLTOUTOUT PRESR-A
Av Amp + LT101 3 20.0K, 1% Amp PRESR -A
R8 8
V-
2 1 3 1 2 3 R9 3 R9 1 1 1.00K, 1%
3
+INA +IN_A
5
+INA + + LT101 3 49.9K, 1% C7 9 100 K C7 8 1 2 + LT101 3 D3
15.0K, 1%
2
R9 5 C7 7
A
1000p F 1000p F R9 0 2 1 BAS1 9
1
2
1.00K, 1% C7 6 0.01u F 1 2
A
10.0K, 1%
1
0.01u F A A C7 2 A A
C5 2 C5 1 0.1u F
2
2
A C6 9
1 2 2 1 0.1u F -5V
A
33uF 16V 33uF 16V -5V
+
+5VANA
C6 5
0.1u F
1 2
U18 A
+5VANA +5V
4 5 2 U20 A
8
V+ VL -
OP 1
1
SAMPAIN-
C5 6 C5 5 Amp
0.1u F 3
7 3 0.1u F + LF412 C
2
-5V V- GND
4
A
2 1
2
11—POWER CONTROL
NC 1 SAMPLEA A
C5 3
SAMP-A 6 -5V 0.1u F
SAM P- A
8 ASAMP-OUT
SCHEMATICS
DG 418
+5V
U34 D
7 10
+5VANA
R1 9 2 1 1 2 1 2
2
TEST-B 1 2 8 9 R4 5 1 2
TEST- B 1 2 C16 1 R19 5 R12 6
820 A 110k 1% (G=501) C4 8 A .47uf , 25v 1K 20.0K, 1%
PS2501L -4 0.1u F R10 4 +5VANA
49.9K, 1% BFLT- C10 3
1
2 1 2
7
-INB -IN_B +5VANA 0.1u F

-IN B - U17 R10 3 1 2 TP6
1 INA11 8 4 U26 B
V+
R4 8 Av 22.1K, 1% _OP
1.00K, 1% R4 7 6 1 2 8 U23 A 5 1 2 8 U26 A
A
6
BSAMPIN
REF
-OP Amp -OP R12 7
1
100, 1% 8 7 2 1 1 2 3 R12 3 7 1 2
BSAMPOUT BSAMPFILT BFLT+IN BFLTOUTOUT PRESR-B
Av Amp + LT101 3 20.0K, 1% Amp PRESR -B
R9 2
V-
2 1 3 1 2 1 R11 4 R11 7 1 1.00K, 1%
3
+INB +IN_B
5
+INB + + LT101 3 49.9K, 1% C9 0 100 K C9 4 1 2 + LT101 3 D4

15.0K, 1%
4
2
R4 0 C3 6
A
2 1 1000p F 1000p F R11 8 2 1 BAS1 9
1
2
1.00K, 1% C3 5 0.01u F 1 2
A
10.0K, 1%
Pressure
1
0.01u F A A A C8 9 A A
C7 3 0.1u F
Sense B
2
A C3 0
0.1u F 0.1u F -5V
A -5V
-5V
C6 0 C5 9
1 2 2 1
33uF 16V 33uF 16V

+
U21
TP1 2+5VANA +5V
4 5 6 U20 B
V+ VL -
OP 7
1
SAMPBIN-
C6 2 C6 7 Amp
1
0.1u F 5
7 3 0.1u F + LF412 C
2
-5V V- GND A
2
NC 1 SAMPLEB
SAMP-B 6
SAM P- B
8 BSAMP-OUT
DG 418

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-5
C1 6
0.1u F
+12V
1 2
10K RN 5
1
+12V
+5V
3
D17
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
2
3
3
D15 R2 6 R3 2 R3 7 R3 9
1
10K 10K 10K 10K
D18 D16 +12V
1
SIZE0-A 2 1 U3 6
SIZE0 -A 1 16 SIZ0
R3 5 SIZ 0
1
2.2 K C2 0
0.1u F 2 15
2
3 14 SIZ1
SIZ 1
SIZE1-A 2 1 4 13
SIZE1 -A
R3 6 5 12 5
1
SIZ0B SCK
C2 7 SIZ0 B SC K 4 2 o.c. 15 H-CLK
2.2 K 0.1u F 6 H-CL K
6 11 U43 B
2
U42 B
7 10 SIZ1B 74HC0 2 MC141 3
SIZ1 B
SIZE0-B 2 1 (To Power Head)
SIZE0 -B 8 9
R3 8
1
+12V
2.2 K C3 4
0.1u F PS2501L -4
1
RN6 A MOSI 8
2
10K MOSI 10 4 o.c. 13 H-DATA
9 H-DAT A
U42 C U43 D
SIZE1-B 2 1
2
SIZE1 -B 74HC0 2 MC141 3
R4 1
1
2.2 K C4 2
0.1u F
2
+12V
3
D13 D11
+5V
2
3
3
D14 +12V R1 0 R1 2 R1 5 R1 8
D12 10K 10K 10K 10K
1
+5V FILSW0 2 1 U3 5
F ILSW 0 1 16 SWC0
R2 0 SWC0
1
+5V
1 2 2.2 K C7
0.1u F 2 15
2
2
SW-CODE0
R8 6
2
C6 6 R8 9 3 14
0.1u F SWC1
+12V +12V 10K 10K SWC1
2 1 4 13
1
FILSW1 SW-CODE1
1
1
U3 8 F ILSW 1
3
RN6G
1 7 R2 3 5 12
1
PH_A_A SWC2
10K D24 PH_A_ A C1 2 SWC2
2.2 K 0.1u F
SW-CODE2 6 11
8
2
MO TO R ENCO DER
PHA-A 2 1 2 PHASE O UTPUTS
PHA- A 7 10 QWKA
QW KA
1
R6 4
C6 8 FILSW2 2 1
2.2 K 1000p F 4 6 PH_A_B F ILSW 2 8 9
+12V PH_A_ B R2 4
1
2
2.2 K C1 5
0.1u F PS2501L -4
3
1
RN6F 3
1
2
D25 C8 0 C7 5
10K 100 pf 100 pf
HCPL-25 30
1
Q-SWA 2 1 QSWA
7
+5V
PHA-B 2 1 Q-SW A
PHA- B R2 5
1
C1 9
1
R6 3 C7 4 2.2 K 0.1u F
2
2.2 K
2
1000p F R9
2
10K
+12V
U34 A
1
1 16 QWKB
QW KB
3
+5V
D8
Q-SW-B 2 1 QSWB 2 15 +5V
Q-SW -B
1
R3 1
1
+5V
1 2 C6 PS2501L -4
2
2.2 K 0.1u F
2
R10 2 R10 9
2
+12V C8 2 R1 1
+12V 0.1u F 10K 10K
D26 10K
1
+12V
U3 9 U34 B UNUSED GATES
8
RN6 I
1
1 7 3 14
3
PH_B_A RESV-O
10K PH_B_ A RESV- O
11—POWER CONTROL
+5V
D7
10
MO TO R ENCO DER
PHB-A 2 1 PHBA 2 RESV 2 1 RESV-IN 4 13
1
PHASE O UTPUTS
PHB- A RESV
1
+5V
R2 8 C1 1
1
R6 8
14
C8 3 2.2 K 0.1u F PS2501L -4 U42 A
+12V 2.2 K 1000p F 4 6 PH_B_B 2
2
PH_B_ B 1 4 U29 B
2
SCHEMATICS
7 o.c. 10 3 _OP
5
3
1
3 74HC0 2 Amp
1
D27 U43G
RN6 H C9 1 C8 6 3
7
10K 100 pf 100 pf +12V MC141 3 + LT101 3
HCPL-25 30
1
2
9
2 1
3
PHB-B PHBB D22 D20
PHB- B
1
R6 7 C8 5 +12V
2.2 K
3
1
1
1000p F
1
2
RN6 B D21 D19
1
10K +5V
F-LIM-A 2 1
3
+5V
F-LIM -A
R4 6
1
2
+5V
1 2 2.2 K C4 9
+12V 0.1u F R5 0 R6 1 R6 6 R7 7
2
10K
2
C9 5 R12 0 R12 2 10K 10K 10K

1
0.1u F 10K 10K
1
+12V +12V
+12V RN6 C U3 7
1 16 FOR-LIM-A
1
U4 0 10K FOR-LIM -A
1
R9 6 1 7 PH_C_A BK-LIM-A 2 1
4
D28 PH_C _A BK-LIM -A 2 15

10K R4 9
1
C5 0 3 14 BAK-LIM-A
1
2 1 2 +12V 2.2 K BAK-LIM -A

PHC-A PHCA
2
PHC- A 0.1u F
2
R10 5 4 13
1
+12V
C9 7
2.2 K 4 6 RN6 D 5 12
1000p F PH_C_B FOR-LIM-B
PH_C _B FOR-LIM -B
2
10K
1
2 1 6 11
3
R11 0 F-LIM-B
5
3 F-LIM -B
1
10K C10 2 C10 0 R5 2 7 10

1
D29 BAK-LIM-B
100 pf 100 pf C5 8 BAK-LIM -B
HCPL-25 30 +12V 2.2 K
2
0.1u F 8 9
2
2 1
1
PHC-B PHCB
PHC- B
R11 5 RN6 E PS2501L -4
1
C9 9
2.2 K 10K
1000p F BK-LIM-B 2 1
2
BK-LIM -B
R5 9
1
2.2 K C6 1
0.1u F
2

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-6
U7 +5V +5V
20
1 VC C
DIR
2
C8 4 + C9 6 R15 6 R15 3 R15 1 R15 0 R14 9 R14 8
B_EXI 19 0.1u F R15 7 R14 6
OUTEN A 10uF,2 5V 56K 56K 56K 56K 56K 56K 56K 56K
2
BD[0..15] 10
BD[0..1 5] GND
1
BD8 2 18 EX-IN0
A0 B0 EX-IN0
BD9 3 17 EX-IN1
A1 B1 EX-IN1
BD10 4 16 EX-IN2
A2 B2 EX-IN2
BD11 5 15 EX-IN3
A3 B3 EX-IN3
BD12 6 14 UP
A4 B4 UP
BD13 7 13 DWN
A5 B5 DW N
BD14 8 12 MODE
A6 B6 MODE
BD15 9 11 ENTER
A7 B7 ENTER
74HC24 5
Direction set for A to B.

+5V U4 +5V
+5V 20
1 VC C +5V
DIR
C6 4
1
+ C4 1
R5 3 R10 6 R4 2 R5 4 R4 3 R5 5 R4 4 19
2
OUTEN A 0.1u F 10uF,2 5V
2
56K 56K 56K 56K 56K 56K 56K 10 R8 1 R8 4 R8 0 R8 3 R7 9 R7 8
GND
1
1
10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K
EXI 2 18 B_EXI
1
EXI A0 B0
EXWR 3 17 1 2 Test-Cal2
74AC T 245
EX W R A1 B1 Test-Cal2
LCD 4 16 B_LCD R5 6
LC D A2 B2
5 15 1 2 47
SYNC Test-Cal4
SYNC A3 B3 Test-Cal4
LCD0 6 14 1 2 R3 3 Test-Cal13
LCD 0 A4 B4 Test-Cal13
7 13 1 2 R5 8 47
LCD1 Test-Cal14
8 12 1 2 R6 0 47
LCD2 Test-Cal15
9 11 1 2 R5 7 47
LCD3 Test-Cal16
R5 1 47
1
47 C4 5 C4 6 C4 3 C4 4 C2 3 C2 1
100 pf 100 pf 100 pf 100 pf 100 pf 100 pf
2
+5V
RN 2
+5V U6
20 56K
1
VC C 1
DIR
1
C8 1
19 B_LCD
0.1u F OUTEN A
2
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
GND
BD8 18 2 1 2 TD8
B0 A0 TD8
74HC 245
BD9 17 3 1 2 R6 9 TD9
B1 A1 TD9
16 4 1 2 R7 0 47
BD10 TD10
B2 A2 TD1 0
15 5 1 2 R7 1 47
BD11 TD11
B3 A3 TD1 1
14 6 1 2 R7 2 47
BD12 TD12
B4 A4 TD1 2
13 7 1 2 R7 3 47
BD13 TD13
B5 A5 TD1 3
12 8 1 2 R7 4 47
BD14 TD14
B6 A6 TD1 4
11 9 1 2 R7 5 47
BD15 TD15
B7 A7 TD1 5
R7 6 47
11—POWER CONTROL
1
47 C3 2 C2 9
C3 9 C4 0 C3 7 C3 8 C3 1 C2 8
100 pf 100 pf 100 pf 100 pf 100 pf 100 pf 100 pf
100 pf
2
2
SCHEMATICS

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-7
+12V A32 B32 +12V
A31 B31
NC A30 B30 NC
A29 B29
FILSW0 FILSW1
F ILSW 0 A28 B28 F ILSW 1
CALIBRATI ON
FILSW2 Q-SWA SW ITCH BOX
F ILSW 2 A27 B27 Q-SW A
Q-SW-B RESV
Q-SW -B A26 B26 RESV 26
NC A25 B25 NC NC 25
SIZE1-B SIZE0-A
SIZE1 -B A24 B24 SIZE0 -A NC 24
SIZE1-A SIZE0-B
SIZE1 -A A23 B23 SIZE0 -B NC 23
SYS-GO-LED
NC A22 B22 SYS-GO-LED NC 22 TEST - CAL
DISPLAY I/F
F-LIM-A BK-LIM-A
F-LIM -A A21 B21 BK-LIM -A NC 21
F-LIM-B BK-LIM-B
F-LIM -B A20 B20 BK-LIM -B NC 20 NC 20
PHA-A PHA-B
PHA- A A19 B19 PHA- B NC 19 NC 19
PHB-A PHB-B
PHB- A A18 B18 PHB- B NC 18 18
H-DATA H-CLK
H-DAT A A17 B17 H-CL K NC 17 17
26V-AN4 26VA-AN6 Test-Cal16

NC A16 B16 NC 26V-AN 4 A16 B16 26VA-AN 6 NC 16 Test-Cal16 16
PHC-A +INB Test-Cal15

PHC- A A15 B15 +INB A15 B15 NC 15 Test-Cal15 15
PHC-B -INB Test-Cal14

PHC- B A14 B14 -IN B A14 B14 14 Test-Cal14 14
K_6MA +INA Test-Cal13

K_6M A A13 B13 +INA +5V A13 B13 +5V 13 Test-Cal13 13
-INA SPD_CNG P_SPD_CNG ENTER TD15

A12 B12 -IN A SPD_CN G A12 B12 P_SPD_C NG ENTER 12 TD1 5 12
3512A JTAG
TXD
TXD
A11 B11
RXD-IN
RXD-IN A11 B11
SPKR
SPKR Connecto r MODE
MODE
11 TD1 4
TD14
11
SSR-ON IPIPE DWN TD13

A10 B10 SSR-O N A10 B10 NC 10 IPI PE 10 DW N 10 TD1 3 10
A
JTAG-TDI UP TD12
A9 B9 A9 B9 JTAG-TDI 9 +5V 9 UP 9 TD1 2 9
IFETCH 69 TD11
NC A8 B8 NC A8 B8 NC 8 IFETC H 8 69 8 8 TD1 1 8
MR 70 TD10
A7 B7 A7 B7 NC 7 MR 7 70 7 7 TD1 0 7
FREEZE 71 EX-IN3 TD9

+5V A6 B6 +5V +12V A6 B6 +12V NC 6 FREEZ E 6 71 6 EX-IN3 6 TD9 6
JTAG-TMS-IN 72 EX-IN2 TD8

NC A5 B5 NC A5 B5 JTAG-TM S-IN 5 5 72 5 EX-IN2 5 TD8 5
BKPT 73 EX-IN1 Test-Cal4

NC A4 B4 NC +5V A4 B4 +5V +3.3V 4 BKPT 4 73 4 EX-IN1 4 Test-Cal4 4
JTAG-TDO 74 EX-IN0 1 R3 0 2
NC A3 B3 NC +5V A3 B3 +5V JTAG-TDO 3 3 74 3 EX-IN0 3 +5V 3
47
M-SIN M-COS BERR CS0 Test-Cal2
NC A2 B2 NC M-SIN A2 B2 M-COS 2 BER R 2 CS0 2 +5V 2 Test-Cal2 2
A-MOT B-MOT P-SIN P-COS JTAG-TCK-IN ENSWD

A-M OT A1 B1 B-M OT P-SI N A1 B1 P-CO S JTAG-TCK-IN 1 NC 1 EN S W D 1 +5V 1 +5V 1
P1 P2 J1 J4 J5 J6 J7
+5V
+12V +5V +3.3V
C115
1
C133 C137
+ C13
1
1
C70 + C139 0.1uF
0.1uF 100uF
100uF 0.1uF
2
0.01uF 16V
2
2
16V
(Gnd Plane)
11—POWER CONTROL
SCHEMATICS
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-8
TP1 TP2 +12V TP3 V_MOT TP4 26V_SW TP5 +26V_FUSED TP6 +26V TP7
+5VB
+26V_FUSED
1
FUSED +26
26V_SW
2
1 2 1 2 26V_SW_1 26_VOLTS (AN4)
R1 R2 R3 R4 R6 R7
680 1.8K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K R11 R16
.02 OHM 51.1K 1%
1
2 W
1
DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 U1 +5VB
Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED
3 4
Vin+ Vin-
2
U4
5
5 4
V+ -
1
C7 V+
1 26V_AMPS 26V_AMPS (AN6)
0.1uF
2
1 3 V-
OUT +
LT1783
2
2
GND
2
INA139 R17
49.9K,1%
P4
1
NC A1
NC A2
SSR-ON
A3
+5VB
A4
+12V
NC A5
NC A6
+26V_FUSED
A7
2
1 2
+26V +26V_FUSED R14 NC A8
R13 10K
47 NC A9
D
Q3
1
P3 F1 2N7002 NC A10
1 2 G
A1 NC A11
D
A2 6.3 A SLOW BLOW Q4 +12V
A12
S
FUSE BLOCK, 5X20MM 2N7002
1
+26 IN C4 G SSR-ON SSR-ON
A3 C1 A13
0.1uF 10uf
A4 A14
S
35V 1 2
A5 R15 A15
A6
100K A16
GND 26V_AMPS
A7 D1 B1
A C 26V_SW_1
A8 B2
A9 1N4001 NC B3
MOT V A10
+5VB
B4
(OUT) V_MOT
A11 NC B5
PS1 +5VB
A12
U3 NC B6
5 78ST105HC
MOT V RET A13 +OUT
+IN
1 1
IN OUT
3 +5VB +5V (VB) NC B7
6
A14 +SENSE
G_IN
2 NC B8
SPD_CNG SPDCNG 7
A15 TRIM NC B9
1
G_OUT
3 C8 C10
GND
1
1
A16 NC C2 + C3
8
-SENSE
4
C5 + C6 10uf 100uf NC B10
470uF,50V 0.1uF -IN 1uF 50V 470uF,50V 35V
2
B1
2
9
-OUT 16V NC B11
2
+12V
B2 B12
VI-2W3-CV
+26 IN B3 B13
B4 B14
B5 B15
B6 B16
GND
B7 240L3325
B8 GND
B9
U2 +12V
490l0108-1
11—POWER CONTROL
MOT V B10
1
IN OUT
3 +12V +12V
(OUT)
B11 JPR1
GND
1
1
B12 C9 + C11
FOR OPTIONAL 10uf
2
100uF,35V
SCHEMATICS
MOT V RET B13

GROUNDING
D
2
Q2 35V
B14 OF DC/DC
ALT_V_TRIM 1 2 G
2N7002 HEATSINK
ALT_V_TRIM B15
R8
B16 NC 47
1
240L3325 R5
100K
2
2
R9
100K
1
Q1
2N7002
1 2 G
R19
47
1
R18
100K
2
2
R20
1
82K
D2
MMBZ5V6ALT1
1
3
POWER SCHEMATIC 802202-2-F

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-9
TP1 5V_Out TP2 12V_Out TP3 Motor_Voltage TP5 Fused_Input TP6 Input_Power TP7
Sh1 Sh2 Sh3
1
2
2
R1 R2 R3 R6 R7
680 1.8K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K
Shield Shield Shield
1
Fused_Input Input_Voltage
1 2 1 2 Supply_Voltage
26_VOLTS (AN4)
1
DS1 DS2 DS3 DS5 DS6 R11 R16
.02 OHM 1W
Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED 51.1K 1%
2
Timing resistor for U3:
-- Per manufacturer reference design data in Table 1 on Page 14 of datasheet, U1 5V_Out
Rt should be open for a 5 volt output. This will result in a 500KHz switch frequency. 3 4
Vin+ Vin-
-- Resistor values for R9 and R10 selected per the same table.
U4
5
Input_Voltage 5 4
V+ -
1
C27 V+
26V_AMPS (AN6)
1
1 Supply_Current
0.1uF
P4 R12 1A =1V
2
5V_Out 1 3 V-
28
0 Ohm R13 OUT +
6
LT1783
A1 NC
2
12 1 2 2
Vout GND
Enable
Sync
Mode
RT
1
2
27 13
A2 NC R4 Vin Vout
C4 0 Ohm R17
1
14
Vout +5V (VB) INA139
1
1 2 Motor_Voltage_Enable C31 C3 15
A3 Vout
R9 47uF 10V D3 D7
9 16 49.9K, 1%
2.2uF, 100V 2.2uF, 100V VCC Vout
2
47 5V_Out 17 CZRB5339B 5V TVS
A4 Vout
2
29 U3 18 196K 1%
Reset Vout
EP3 5.6V
A5 NC Vout
2
25 MAXM17545A
Boost
1
5
A6 NC D5 CX5 3
Feedback
19 CX11
A7 is +26V_Fused / 5V TVS 10uF, 35V SoftStart LX
20 47uF, 10V
A7 NC LX
1
2
2
Do Not Install 21 Do Not Install
Unused C34 LX
2
4 22
A8 NC 0.1uF CF LX
LX
23 R10
2
24
SGND
PGND
PGND
A9 NC LX
43.2K, 1%
EP1
EP2
LX
A10 NC
1
11
EP1
10
26
A11 NC
12V_Out
A12
A13
A14
Input_Voltage R20
A15
1 2
1
A16
15.8K, 1%
Supply_Current R21 12V_Out
28
B1
0 Ohm R25
2
6
Supply_Voltage 12 1 2
B2 Vout
Enable
Sync
Mode
RT
2
27 13
Vin Vout
0 Ohm
1
14
B3 NC Vout C6 +12V
1
1
15
5V_Out
C30 C5 Vout
R18 10uF, 50V D4 D8 L1
9 16
B4 2.2uF, 100V 2.2uF, 100V VCC Vout
2
17 CZRB5350B-HF 12V TVS
Vout
2
29 U2 18 475K, 1%
B5 NC Reset Vout
Vout
EP3 13V
1
2
25 MAXM17545A
B6 NC Boost CX1 CX2 CX3 CX6 CX7 CX8 CX9
1
1
2
5 480nH
Feedback CX10 22uF, 35V 22uF, 35V 22uF, 35V 22uF, 35V 22uF, 35V 22uF, 35V 22uF, 35V
1
3 19
B7 NC CX4 SoftStart LX
10uF, 35V
2
LX
20 Do Not Install Do Not Install Do Not Install Do Not Install Do Not Install Do Not Install Do Not Install
10uF, 35V
1
2
21 Do Not Install
B8 NC C35 LX
2
2
Do Not Install 4
CF LX
22
R19
H10
H11
G10
G11
0.1uF
K10
K11
J10
J11
23
H4
H5
G4
G5
K4
K5
NC R26
J4
J5
B9 LX
2
24
SGND
PGND
PGND
LX
38.3K, 1% Input_Voltage
EP1
EP2 1 2 G1 G13
B10 NC LX Vin Vout
VS1
VS1
VS1
VS1
VS1
VS1
VS1
VS1
VS2
VS2
VS2
VS2
VS2
VS2
VS2
VS2
H1 H13
Vin Vout
0 Ohm C23
1
1
B11 NC J1
Vin Vout
J13
C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 +
11
EP1
10
26
K1 K13
Vin Vout
12V_Out G2 G14 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 100uF, 50V
B12 Vin Vout
2
H2 H14
+ C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 J2
Vin Vout
J14
B13 Vin Vout
100uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V 10uF, 50V K2 K14
Vin Vout
2
B14
1
Timing resistor for U2: 5V_Out
A5
Enable PwrGood
D1
R23
B15
-- Per manufacturer reference design data in Table 1 on Page 14 of datasheet, A6
Trk
13.3K, 1% Motor_Voltage
B16 Rt should be 15.8K for a 12 volt output. This will result in a 1200KHz switch frequency. D14
ISN
1
2
240L3325 -- Resistor values for R18 and R19 selected per the same table. R14
E14
ISP Imon
A14
L5 680nH, 4.1A
10K A9 R24 1 2 R27
GND VSN
0 Ohm
3
A10 A11 1 2
Q1B VSP PS1 VDiff Voltage at this node is 1.7V L3
1
C26 C33
2
2N7002D A12 20.0K, 1% 1 2
EAIn
L4 5 0.01uF 10uF, 50V A8 A13
Comp EAO
1
2
2
F1 680nH, 4.1A
Do Not Install C28 C29 C24 +
1
Input_Power 1 2 B1 C1
C14 SyncI SyncO
D6
6
0.1uF 0.1uF 100uF, 50V
4
Q1A 4.7nF
2
680nH, 4.1A A1 B2 26V TVS
ADR1 PGnd
2
6.3 A SLOW BLOW 2N7002D A2 C2
P3 L2 Motor_Voltage_Enable ADR0 PGnd
1 2 1 2
Fused_Input 2
C33 is reserved to extend soft-start. A4
A3
SDA PGnd
D2
E2
A1 Motor Voltage Enable Internal is 4.7uF giving 1.6ms soft-start. SCL PGnd
1
B3
PGnd
R15
1
1
1
FUSE BLOCK, 5X20MM 680nH, 4.1A A7 C3
A2
D9 C25 100K Add capacitance as needed to increase B10
SGnd PGnd
D3 R22
SGnd PGnd
1
+26 IN 30V TVS 0.1uF soft-start time based on output C10 E3 1.07K, 1%
A3
C1 + C2 SGnd PGnd
2
D10 B4
Do Not Install capacitance. SGnd PGnd
2
0.1uF 100uF, 50V E10 C4

A4 SGnd PGnd
2
2
B11 D4
11—POWER CONTROL
SGnd PGnd
C11 E4
A5 SGnd PGnd
SSR-ON input signal: D11
E11
SGnd PGnd
B5
C5
A6 SGnd PGnd
GND -- 0 volts, Q1A is off, Q1B is on, PS1 is disabled. B12
SGnd PGnd
D5
C12 E5
A7 -- >1.75 volts (typ), 2.4 volts (max), Q1A is on, Q1B is off, PS1 is D12
SGnd PGnd
B6
SGnd PGnd
enabled. E12 C6
SCHEMATICS
A8 SGnd PGnd
B13 D6
SGnd PGnd
Motor_Voltage 5V_Out B14 E6
A9 SGnd PGnd
E9 B7
MOT V
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd
PGnd PGnd
1
Motor_Voltage D9 C7
A10 PGnd PGnd
(OUT) R30
Motor_Voltage 10K
A11
VI3749
C9
B9
K8
F8
E8
C8
B8
K7
F7
E7
J8
H8
G8
D8
J7
H7
G7
D7
A12
2
5V_Out
MOT V RET A13

6
A14
Q2A 5V_Out R31 2 1
2N7002D 10.0K, 1%
SPD_CNG Motor_Voltage_Select 1 2 2 R28
A15
R33
1
1.00K, 1%
R8 C36
1
2
1 2
A16 NC R29
1
47 0.1uF
D2
1
1
2
10.0K, 1% 2.00K, 1%
B1
5V TVS R5 R32
1
100K 10.0K, 1%
B2 C37
2
0.1uF
3
+26 IN B3 Q2B
2
B4 2N7002D
5
B5
4
B6 Speed change input signal:

GND
B7 -- 0 volts, Q2A is off, PS1 output voltage is 24.05 volts.
-- >3.45 volts (typ), 5.0 volts (max), Q2A is on, PS1 output is 21.6V
B8
Motor_Voltage
B9
MOT V B10
Motor_Voltage
(OUT) Motor_Voltage
B11
B12
MOT V RET B13
B14
ALT_V_TRIM B15 NC
B16 NC
240L3325
REGULATOR SCHEMATIC 814202-2-A

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-10
TP2
TP4
+24V
L1
1
+24V +24_A1
L3
1
+5V +5V_DRVR
130uH
1
+ C4 40uH R23 R24 R26
1
+ + +24V 3.9K 3.9K R25 3.9K
470uF,50V C1 C3 C6 C7
2
3.9K
100uF 100uF
0.1uF 0.1uF
2
16V 16V
1
R21 R22
L2 +24_A2 3.9K 3.9K
130uH
1
2
2
+ C2 + C5
470uF,50V 470uF,50V DS2 DS3 U13
2
Red LED Red LED
14
2
2
1
DS1
L4 Red LED
2
U1 +5V_DRVR
6
2
Vcc BEAD Q1 6 L20
1 1 8
1
SIN_B1
NC C24
1
R13 IRLI530N
C8 C12 +24_A1 EMI
8 4.7K 0.01uF T1 SINA_1 PVX6012
2
3 10
NC 0.1uF 1000pF
3
3 U9
1
4
GND 14
5 11 2
2.0mH
3
L12
2 7 1 2 DT 00-0196
1
IN_A OUT_A 1 C20
1
R5 L5 IRLI530N C25
TP5 TP3 4 5 1 2 0.1uF PVX6012
47
2
IN_B OUT_B Q2 0.01uF 8
2
R6 BEAD 6 6 L21
2
8
2
47 SIN_A1
1
TC 427COA
1
R14 C13 EMI
2.7mH
P-SIN-A 4.7K PVX6012
L13
1000pF
2
M-SIN-A U15
1
2 14
14 2
2
R3 R4 U5
L8
10K 10K U3 +5V_DRVR
6
2
Vcc BEAD Q5 6 L24
1
1 1 8
1
SIN_B
NC C16 C28
1
R17 IRLI530N
C10 +24_A2 EMI
+5V B16 A16 +5V
8 4.7K 1000pF 0.01uF T3 SINA_2 PVX6012 COS_A
2
3 10
NC 0.1uF 14
3
3 U11
1
4
B15 A15 GND 14 COS_B
5 11 2 13
2.0mH
3
L16
B14 A14 1 TP1 2 7 1 2 DT 00-0196
1
IN_A OUT_A 1 C22 NC 12
1
R9 L9 IRLI530N C29
B13 A13
4 5 1 2 0.1uF PVX6012
P-COS-A 47
2
IN_B OUT_B Q6 0.01uF 8 11
2
M-COS-A B12 R10 BEAD 6 6 L25
2
A12 8
2
47 SIN_A
NC 10
1
TC 427COA R18 C17 EMI
2.7mH
+24V B11 A11 +24V 4.7K PVX6012 SIN_A1
L17
1000pF 9
2
U14
1
+24V B10 A10 +24V 2 14 SIN_B1
14 2 8
+24V B9 A9 +24V
+5V_DRVR
U7 SIN_B 7
P-SIN-A L6
B8 A8 NC U2 SIN_A
6 6
2
M-SIN-A Vcc BEAD Q3 6 L22
B7 A7 NC 1 1 8
1
COS_B1
NC C14 C26 NC 5
1
R15 IRLI530N
C9 EMI
NC B6 A6 NC 8 4.7K 1000pF
+24_A1
0.01uF T2 COSA_1 PVX6012
2
3 10
NC 0.1uF 4
3
P-COS-A 3 U10
NC
1
4
B5 A5 GND 14
5 11 2 NC 3
2.0mH
3
M-COS-A
NC
L14
B4 A4
2 7 1 2 DT 00-0196
1
COS_B1
IN_A OUT_A 1 C21 2
1
R7 L7 IRLI530N C27
SPD_CHG B3 A3 NC 4 5 47 1 2 0.1uF PVX6012
COS_A1
2
IN_B OUT_B Q4 0.01uF 8 1
2
A_MOT R8 BEAD 6 6 L23
NC
2
J1
B2 A2 8
2
47 COS_A1
1
TC 427COA R16
B_MOT C15 EMI
NC
2.7mH
B1 A1
TP7 TP6 4.7K PVX6012
L15
1000pF
2
P1
U16
1
2 14
14 2
1
P-COS-A
+5V_DRVR
U6
L10
M-COS-A U4
6
2
Vcc BEAD Q7 6 L26
1 1 8
1
COS_B
NC
11—POWER CONTROL
C18 C30
2
R19 IRLI530N +24_A2

R1 R2 C11 EMI
8 1000pF 0.01uF T4 COSA_2 PVX6012
4.7K
2
3 10
10K 10K NC 0.1uF
2
3
3 U12
1
4
GND 14
1
5 11 2
2.0mH
3
SCHEMATICS
L18
2 7 1 2 DT 00-0196
1
IN_A OUT_A 1 C23
1
R11 L11 IRLI530N C31
R12 0.1uF PVX6012
4 5 47 1 2
2
IN_B OUT_B Q8 0.01uF 8
2
47 BEAD 6 6 L27
2
HS1 8
2
COS_A
1
TC 427COA R20
C19 EMI
PVX6012
2.7mH
4.7K
L19
1000pF
2
1
+24V
2
14
D2 D3
3
U8
2
R29
10K
1
1
1
SPD_CHG
B_MOT B_MOT_BUFFERED
Not Used
D
+5V_DRVR Q9 A_MOT_BUFFERED
R27 2N7002
3 4 1 2 G
1
+5V_DRVR C32 U17B 100

S
0.1uF 74HC14
2
3
+5V_DRVR
D1 1K
1
R31 Q10
14
R28
1
A_MOT 1 2 1 2 G 2N7002
U17A 100
S
7
74HC14
DRIVER BOARD SCHEMATIC 802203-2-F

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-11
POWER SWITCH 3
+26V_SWITCHED
CONNECTOR 2
1
+26V
J1 NC A1
1
R6 NC A2
26 NC 330 NC A3
2
25 A4
24 NC A5
23 A6
22 A7
21 A8
20 A9
19 NC A10
18 NC A11
17 NC A12
16 NC A13
15 NC A14 P2
14 A15 TO INTERCONNECT
26V_RETURN
13 A16 BOARD
12 FL3
1 3 1 2 NC B1
11 U3 NC
CONSOLE/ POWER 10
DSS310 R3
47
6
Vcc
B2
NC
SUPPLY RS422RX+ 1 B3
GND
9 U2 NC
1
1 FIBER_+5V C5 B4
8
0.1uF 8
RS422TX- NC B5
2
7 3
1
C4 GND B6
6 FL1
1 3 1 2 0.1uF B7
2
5 4 7 2
DSS310 R1 OUT_A IN_A B8
4
47 5 TXD
RS422TX+ 3 TXD1 5 4 TXD B9
GND
3 6 OUT_B IN_B RESV2 B10
2 FL4
1 3 8 TC428CPA NC B11
2
1 2 422_RX NC
J2 7 B12
1
DSS310
RXD
2
R4 NC B13
GND
R5
4.7K NC B14
470 MAX488
TP3 TP4
2
RS-422 B15
1
TRANSCEIVER B16
+12V
FL2 U1 P2
1
RS422RX- 1 3 1 2 FIBER_+5V 3 1
OUT IN
DSS310 DO NOT INSTALL R2 MC7805
R5 4.7K
GND
GND
1
1
C2 + C1 + C3
0.1uF 22uF,16V 10 uF, 50 V
2
+12V
A1
FILLSW_0 A2
FILLSW_2 A3
Q-SW-B A4
SIZE1-B A5
SIZE1-A A6
40 +12V
F-LIM-A A7
39
F-LIM-B A8
38
RESV2 PHA-A A9
37
PHC-B PHA-B A10
36
PHC-A H-DATA A11
35
FILLSW_0 PHC-A A12
34
FILLSW_1 PHC-B A13
FILLSW_2 K6_MA
33 A14 P3
Q-SW-A RXD
32 A15 TO INTERCONNECT
Q-SW-B TXD
31 A16 BOARD
30
RESV
SIZE1-B +12V B1
29 FILLSW_1
SIZE0-A B2
28 Q-SW-A
11—POWER CONTROL
SIZE1-A B3
27 RESV
SIZE0-B B4
26 SIZE0-A
F-LIM-A B5
25 SIZE0-B
BK-LIM-A B6
SCHEMATICS
24 BK-LIM-A
TO HEAD BOARD F-LIM-B B7
23 BK-LIM-B
BK-LIM-B B8
22 PHB-A
PHA-A B9
21 PHB-B
PHB-A B10
20 H-CLK
PHA-B B11
19 +IN-B
PHB-B B12
18 -IN-B
H-DATA B13
17 +IN-A
+IN-B B14
16 -IN-A
H-CLK B15
15 ANA_GND
-IN-B B16
14
P3
13
+IN-A
12
K6_MA
11
-IN-A
10
ANA_GND
6 1 TP2
5
4 NC
3 NC
2 NC
1 NC
J3
COMMUNICATION BOARD SCHEMATIC 802204-2-B

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-12
MATES WITH
814201
PWR CTRL BOARD
+5V
A_MOT B_MOT
41 A1 B1 42
NC A2 B2 NC
NC A3 B3 NC
NC A4 B4 NC
NC A5 B5 NC
A6 B6
DGND
35 A7 B7
NC A8 B8
A9 B9
ANA_GND MATES WITH
A10 B10 37
802202 / 814202
TXD RXD-IN
39 A11 B11 32 SUPPLY BOARD
DGND -INA
40 A12 B12 34
K_6MA +INA
36 A13 B13 29
PHC-B -INB
31 A14 B14 33
PHC-A +IN-B
28 A15 B15 26
NC A16 B16 NC +26-IN
H-DATA H-CLK 43
23 A17 B17 25 A1 B1
PHA-B PHB-B 44
20 A18 B18 18 A2 B2
PHA-A PHB-A
16 A19 B19 17 A3 B3
F-LIM-B BK-LIM-B
14 A20 B20 15 A4 B4
Mounting Holes F-LIM-A BK-LIM-A
13 A21 B21 12 30 DGND A5 B5
MTG1 MTG2 MTG3 MTG4 MTG5 MTG6 NC A22 B22 NC A6 B6

SIZE1-A SIZE0-B 27
9 A23 B23 11 A7 B7
SIZE1-B SIZE0-A
6 A24 B24 10 A8 B8
NC A25 B25 NC 24 MOT_V A9 B9

Q-SW-B RESV
7 A26 B26 8 A10 B10
FILLSW_2 Q-SW-A 22
5 A27 B27 3 A11 B11
FILLSW_0 FILLSW_1
2 A28 B28 4 19 MOT-V-RET A12 B12
A29 B29 A13 B13

21
NC A30 B30 NC A14 B14
P_SPD_CNG
A31 B31 A15 B15 NC
+12V
1 A32 B32 NC A16 B16 NC
J1 J3
P-SIN P-COS 26VA-AN6

56 A1 B1 55 NC A1 B1
M-SIN M-COS 26V-AN4
54 A2 B2 53 NC A2 B2
+5V SSR-ON
A3 B3 A3 B3 NC
+5V +5V +5V
A4 B4 A4 B4
A5 B5 NC A5 B5 NC
+12V
A6 B6 NC A6 B6 NC
49
50
38
DGND +26_FUSED
46 A7 B7 A7 B7 NC
45 NC A8 B8 NC A8 B8 NC
Spare pads A9 B9 NC A9 B9 NC
SSR-ON
A10 B10 NC NC A10 B10 NC
RESV2
A11 B11 48 NC A11 B11 NC
SPD_CNG-DRV P_SPD_CNG +12V
47 A12 B12 A12 B12
+5V +5V
11—POWER CONTROL
52 A13 B13 A13 B13
A14 B14 A14 B14
A15 B15 A15 B15

26VA-AN6
A16 B16 A16 B16
J2 J4
SCHEMATICS
26V-AN4 26V-AN4
SSR-ON
+26_FUSED
51
NOTES:
1) THIS SYMBOL REPRESENTS ->

GROUND PLANE ATTACHMENT
XX
2) THIS SYMBOL REPRESENTS THE ->
FEED-THRU CONNECTOR HOLE
ASSOCIATED WITH THE .01UF PART
3) THIS SYMBOL REPRESENTS THE -> YY

ASSOCIATED WITH THE 1000PF PART
4) THIS SYMBOL REPRESENTS THE -> ZZ

ASSOCIATED WITH THE PI FILTER
INTERCONNECT CPU BOARD SCHEMATIC 802205-2-B

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-13
MATES WITH
802204
COMM BOARD
MATES WITH
802203
DRIVER BOARD NC A1 B1 NC
NC A2 B2 NC
B_MOT NC A3 B3 NC
NC A1 B1 42
A4 B4 43
A_MOT
NC A2 B2 41 +26_IN +26_IN
SPD_CHNG-DRV A5 B5 EXTERNAL +26V SUPPLY
NC A3 B3 47
A6 B6 44
M-COS
NC A4 B4 53
A7 B7 27
P-COS
NC A5 B5 55 +26_RTN +26_RTN
A8 B8 EXTERNAL SUPPLY RETURN
NC A6 B6 NC A9 B9 30
M-SIN
NC A7 B7 54
P-SIN NC A10 B10 NC
NC A8 B8 56 RESV2
A9 B9 22
NC A11 B11 48
IR_SW
MOT_V A10 B10
MOT_V NC A12 B12 50
26_FUSED
A11 B11 24
NC A13 B13 51
A12 B12 19
NC A14 B14 NC
A15 B15
MOT_V_RET A13 B13
MOT_V_RET
A16 B16
A14 B14 21 J2
A15 B15
+5V
A16 B16 52
J1
45
46 GNDS
35
40
COMM BOARD
+12V
1
A1 B1 NOTES:
FILSW_0 FILSW_1
2 A2 B2 4
FILSW_2 Q-SW-A 1) THIS SYMBOL REPRESENTS ->
5 A3 B3 3 GROUND PLANE ATTACHMENT
Q-SW-B RESV
7 A4 B4 8
SIZE1-B SIZE0-A
6 A5 B5 10 2) THIS SYMBOL REPRESENTS THE ->
SIZE1-A SIZE0-B XX
Mounting Holes 9 A6 B6 11 FEED-THRU CONNECTOR HOLE
F-LIM-A BK-LIM-A ASSOCIATED WITH THE .01UF PART
13 A7 B7 12
F-LIM-B BK-LIM-B
14 A8 B8 15
PHA-A PHB-A 3) THIS SYMBOL REPRESENTS THE -> YY
16 A9 B9 17
PHA-B PHB-B FEED-THRU CONNECTOR HOLE
20 A10 B10 18 ASSOCIATED WITH THE 1000PF PART
H-DATA H-CLK
23 A11 B11 25
PHC-A +IN-B
28 A12 B12 26
11—POWER CONTROL
4) THIS SYMBOL REPRESENTS THE -> ZZ
PHC-B -IN-B
31 A13 B13 33 FEED-THRU CONNECTOR HOLE
K_6MA +IN-A ASSOCIATED WITH THE PI FILTER
36 A14 B14 29
RXD -IN-A
32 A15 B15 34
SCHEMATICS
TXD ANA_GND
39 A16 B16 37
J3
SPARE FEED UNUSED GATES:

THRUS
49
38
INTERCONNECT DRIVER BOARD SCHEMATIC 802206-2-B

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-2-14

11—POWER CONTROL
SCHEMATICS
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-1
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS
CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 802101-2-M (1 OF 5)
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-2
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-3
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-4
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-5
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-6
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS
CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 846101-2-G (1 OF 5)

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-7
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-8
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-9
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-10
11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-11
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
JMP27
27
FGND
26
25
24
23 CONSOLE CPU CONNECTOR

22
21
20 34
19 33
+24V
18 L2 L7 32
17 BEAD BEAD 31
C3
1
16 + C15 30
1
C1 C2 220uF
+SRCV 0.1uF
2
15 0.1uF 0.1uF 50 V 29
2
14 28
13 27
GP1
12 26
GP2
11 25
10 24
DO NOT INSTALL R3
9 23
R3
1 2 DIAG1 DIAG1
8 22
R1 470
1 2 DIAG0 DIAG0
7 21
470
DO NOT INSTALL R1 CTS1
6 20
1
R14 2 TX+ RTS1
5 19
2
10 +5V
RX- +5V D1
4 18
R15 U1 AZ23C3V9
1
1
1 2 TX- C11
3 VCC C9 17
3
10 0.1uF
RX+ 0.1uF RXD1
2
2 16
1
C10
TXD1
1 4 0.1uF 15
2
1
R16 2 GND
J1 5 CTS0
220 3 14
6
RTS0
13
8
2 RXD0
7 12
START SW/SMART CAN PERIPHERAL
TXD0
11
MAX 488
CANH
10
+24V
10
FGND L1
CANL
9
BEAD
1
RXDR3
9 C4 8
0.1uF R2 TXDR3
2
1 2
7
8
390
2
X3EN
L8 R18
6
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
R11
1 2
R5
R7
R9
7
SYSPUP
BEAD 390 5
L3
1
R4
2
1 2 GP1
6 4
1
BEAD 390 C14
R13
4.7K
L4
1
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
R10
R12
R17 0.1uF C35 +
R6
R8
3
GP2
2
1 2
5
1 uF, 16 V
1
BEAD 390
2
L5 2
CANH
4
BEAD 1
11—CONSOLE
L6 J3
SCHEMATICS
CANL
3
BEAD
L9
2
BEAD
C8 C6
1
2
1 C13 C12 C5 C7
D2
J2 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.1uF AZ23C3V9
2
3
UNUSED GATES:
CONSOLE INTERFACE SCHEMATIC 802102-2-E (1 OF 1)

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-3-12

11—CONSOLE
SCHEMATICS
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-4-1
+5V
C13
0.1uF +5V
+12V
1 2
14
R15 R16 U12A
10K 10K TP4 2 U12D
1 11
3 13
12
1
U3A 74HC02
1
+12V
1 16 5 6
3
74HC02
7
D1
BAS19 U11C
TP5 1 2
H_DATA 1 2 2 15 74HC14
1
H_DATA U5 +5V
R18
R13 PS2501L-4 16 680
Vcc 4 13 1 2 2 1
1
2.2K
C7 U3B 9 A
1
1
3 14 3 4 CLOCK C12 U13D R19 DS1
0.1uF 1 680 Blue LED
2
+5V
U11B RESET 8 0.1uF MC1413
2
U4 GND
4 13 1 2
3
74HC14
D2 14 VCC
3 2 R20
PS2501L-4 QA 3
D0 Q0
1
BAS19 680
H_CLK 1 2 C11 4 5 5 12 1 2 2 1
1
H_CLK
0.1uF
QB 4
D1 Q1 B
R14 6 7 U13E R21 DS2
2
5
2.2K 7
QC D2 Q2 680 Purple LED
GND
11 10
1
6 MC1413
C8 QD D3 Q3
0.1uF 10 13 12
QE D4 Q4 6 11 INJ_RDY
2
1 A1
11 14 15 INJ_RDY
2
QF D5 Q5 U13F
A2
QG 12
+5V U12B 8 CLOCK
74HC174 MC1413
5 QH 13
4 9 RESET
6
JPR3
3
D4 74HC02 74HC164
R17
10K BAS19 BEEP JPR2
SPARES
1
14
C10 SPARE
1
0.1uF 1 2 8 U12C JPR1

10
2
9
1
U11A
C9
7
0.1uF 74HC14 74HC02
2
+5V
TP6
14
10
TP1 TP2 U18A U18B
4
+12V +5V
1
SD
SD
VC C
U9 2 5 12 9
1
3 VIN VOUT 2 1 D Q D Q
74HC74
74HC74
LM317D2T 3 11
CP CP
1
6 8
1
1
ADJ
+ C34 R40 + C35 Q Q

1 uF, 16 V 200 1% 22uF,16V
G ND
TP3
CD
CD
1
2
2
2
13
+5V +5V
UNUSED GATES:
1
2 1
11—POWERHEAD
2
R41 C49
SCHEMATICS
604 1% 0.1uF
9 8
U3C
1
U11D 5 12
74HC14 7 10
6 11 U13G
MC1413
PS2501L-4
MOUNTING HOLES
U3D
7 10
MTG1 MTG2 MTG3 MTG4 MTG5 MTG6 11 10
U11E
8 9
74HC14
PS2501L-4
CGND
POWERHEAD SCHEMATIC 814301-2-B (1 OF 4)

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-4-2
+5V +12V
U1
6
Vcc
1
NC
1
C1
2
8
R6 R5 NC 0.1uF
2
3.3K 3.3K 3
GND
1
J1A
ENC-A-A 1 2 2 7 1 2
J1B IN_A OUT_A
ENCODER A J1C
ENC-B-A R1 R2 R9
47 1 2 4 5 10 1 2
ENC-C-A IN_B OUT_B
J1D 47 R10
1
10
J1E C19 C16
1
TC 426COA
C45 C3 C4
J1F 0.1uF 100pf 100pf
2
0.01uF 0.01uF
2
+5V
+12V
U2
6
Vcc
1
NC
1
C2
2
8
R7 R8 NC 0.1uF
2
3.3K 3.3K 3
GND PHA-A
PHA-A
1
J2A
ENC-A-B 1 2 2 7 1 2 PHB-A
J2B IN_A OUT_A PHB-A
ENCODER B J2C
ENC-B-B R3 R4 R11
47 1 2 4 5 10 1 2
ENC-C-B IN_B OUT_B
J2D 47 R12
1
10
J2E C18 C17 TC 426COA
1
1
J2F C46 100pf 100pf C6 C5
2
0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF
2
2
+5V
+12V
U21 PHA-B
6 J8B
Vcc
1 PHB-B
NC J8A
1
C39
2
2
8
R50 R51 NC 0.1uF
2
3.3K 3.3K 3
GND
1
1
1 2 2 7 1 2 PHC-A
IN_A OUT_A J8D
R48 R53
47 1 2 4 5 10 1 2 PHC-B
IN_B OUT_B J8C
R49 R52 J8
1
1
47 10
C38 C40 TC 426COA TO/FROM
1
H_DATA
100pf 100pf C42 C41 H_DATA J8I POWER CONTROL
2
2
0.01uF 0.01uF H_CLK
2
+12V H_CLK J8H
SIZE0-B
SIZE0-B J8J
J3A SIZE1-B
SIZE1-B J8K
J3B FILLSW_0
FILLSW_0 J8N
J3C FILLSW_1
A LIMITS J3D
2 1 FILLSW_1 J8M
FILLSW_2
F-LIM-A FILLSW_2 J8L
11—POWERHEAD
C14 F-LIM-A
0.1uF BK-LIM-A J8O
BK-LIM-A
SCHEMATICS
F-LIM-B
J8G
BK-LIM-B
J4A J8F
J4B
J8E
B LIMITS J4C
2 1
J4D
C15 K_6MA
J9A
0.1uF +IN_A
J9F
J5A
K_6MA -IN_A
J9E
J9
J5D
+IN_A +IN_B
J9C
TO/ FROM
J5C
-IN_A -IN_B
J9B
POWER CONTROL
ANA-GND
A PRESS J5B J9D
J5E J9G
CGND
J9H
J6A
+IN_B
J6D
-IN_B
B PRESS J6C
ANA-GND
J6B
J6E

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-4-3
+5V
10K
2 1
R37
R34
START 1 2 3 4 5 6
START
1
47 C29 U15B U15C
.01uF 74HC14 74HC14
2
+5V
1 2
+5V
C32
14
1 2 0.1uF
1 2 +5V 1
C44 VCC
14
R30 U6
2 0.1uF
2
ENABLE 1 2 10K 1 16 U17A 6
ENABLE Vcc
1
R22 C22
4 74HC21
1
U14A
47 C20
7
1 5
.01uF 74HC14 A0
NC GND
2
0.1uF
2
2 A1 GND 8
9
3
7
3 A2 U8
+5V
1 2 +5V
15 10 16 9 8 1 16 FILLSW_0
R29 Y0 +5V 0 Vcc FILLSW_0
FORWARD_A 1 2 10K 3 4 14 11 U15D
FORWARD_A Y1 1
1
+5V
R23 C23 U14B C28 74HC14 U13A
8
Y2 13 12 2
47 0.1uF
.01uF 74HC14 MC1413
2
6 CS1 Y3 12 13 3
GND 8
4 CS2 Y4 11 1 4
+5V 5 CS3 Y5 10 2 5 A0 9
1 2
9 3 7 11 10 2 15 FILLSW_1
R28 Y6 6 A1 FILLSW_1
RETRACT_A 1 2 10K 5 6 7 4 6 U15E U13B
RETRACT_A Y7 7 A2
1
R24 C24 U14C 74HC14 MC1413
47 3 15
2 .01uF 74HC14 74HC138 EO
U16B
4
6 4 5 EI GS 14
74HC10 5 +5V U22 13 12 3 14 FILLSW_2

+5V +5V FILLSW_2
1 2 U7 5 3
74HC148
T08 U15F U13C
1
Vcc 16
R31 C54 74HC14 MC1413
1 2 10K 13 12
1
FORWARD_B
2
FORWARD_B C21 0.1uF
1
2
1 A0
R25 C25 U14F
47 0.1uF
2
2 8
.01uF 74HC14 A1 GND
2
3 A2
8
+5V
1 2 Y0 15 C33
+5V
R32 Y1 14 0.1uF
10K
RETRACT_B 1 2 11 10 13 1 2 74HC10
RETRACT_B Y2
1
+5V
R26 C26 U14E 6 CS1 Y3 12 U16C
47
.01uF
14
74HC14
2
4 CS2 Y4 11 9
10
11
13 VCC
5 CS3 Y5 10 10 U17B
8 1 U16A 12
9 12 74HC21 74HC10
Y6
2 PHA-A J7K
7 13 GND
Y7
NC
PHB-A J7L
7
11
74HC138
F-LIM-A J7B
+5V
1 2 BK-LIM-A J7A
+5V
1 2 C43
11—POWERHEAD
0.1uF SIZE0-A J7G
14
R33
STOP 1 2 10K 9 8 1 2
SCHEMATICS
STOP SIZE1-A J7F
1
R27 C27 U14D U15A

47
7
.01uF 74HC14 74HC14

+5V
J7D J7
2
TO/FROM
POWER CONTROL
1
R54
NC J7J
10K
2
+12V
KEYPAD_FAULT 13 12
KEYPAD_FAULT J7C
1
U11F SUPPLY FROM C47
74HC14 POWER CONTROL
0.1uF
2
J7E
Q-SW-A Q-SW-A
Q-SW-A J7H
1
C31
Q-SW-B
.01uF J7I
2
Q-SW-B
Q-SW-B
1
C30
.01uF
2

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-4-4
+5V
+5V
1
1 C37 2
+5V
C36
2
U10
R45 R44 R43 R42 0.1uF 1 2 ASIZE_0
14
4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 16
Vcc GND
8 0.1uF J12A 60
1 2 R46
U20 390
1
U19A 8 9
2 4 1 2 ASIZE_1
7
A0A Y0A 74HC14 J12C 10/15/20
3 5 1 16 R47
A1A Y1A U19B 22
6 3 4 2 15
1 Y2A 1 2 ASIZE_2
SELA
Y3A
7 5 6 74HC14 3 14 J12E 30
R55
U19C 4 13 390
D
14 12 74HC14 9 8 5 12 1 2 BSIZE_0
A0B Y0B J12G 125
13 11 11 10 6 11 R56
G A1B Y1B 270
Q1 10 U19D 7 10
15 Y2B U19E 74HC14 1 2 BSIZE_1
2N7002 SELB 9 13 12 74HC14 J12I 60
S
Y3B 1413 R57
D
390
74HC139 U19F
1 2 BSIZE_2
G 74HC14 J12K 50
Q2 R58
+12V 390
2N7002
D
1 2 1 2 1 2
J12AE
R60 R61 R62
G 3.9 3.9 3.9 J12AG
1
Q3 +5V C48
2W 2W 2W
2N7002 0.1uF
2
S
J12AF
2
J12AH
R59
G 4.7K
Q4
1
2N7002 INJ_RDY
S
INJ_RDY
Q-SW-A
Q-SW-A J12B
Q-SW-B
Q-SW-B J12D
START
START J12F
ENABLE
ENABLE J12H J12
Pulled up to 12V on CPU board
FORWARD_A
FORWARD_A
J12J
KEYPAD
SIZE0-A_In 1 2 SIZE0-A CONNECTOR
SIZE0-A J10A SIZE0-A
1
RETRACT_A
C50 R35 RETRACT_A J12L
(BARREL) J10B 47
.01uF FORWARD_B
2
FORWARD_B J12N
SIZE1-A_In 1 2 SIZE1-A
SIZE1-A J10C SIZE1-A
1
RETRACT_B
C51 R36 RETRACT_B J12P
(FLANGE) J10D 47
.01uF STOP
2
STOP J12R
SIZE0-B_In 1 2 SIZE0-B
SIZE0-B SIZE0-B
11—POWERHEAD
J11A
1
KEYPAD_FAULT
C52 R38 KEYPAD_FAULT J12T
(BARREL) J11B 47
SCHEMATICS
.01uF
2
SIZE1-B_In 1 2 SIZE1-B J12M

J11C SIZE1-B
SIZE1-B
1
C53 R39 J12O

(FLANGE) J11D 47
.01uF J12Q
2
1
2
D5 D3 J12S
MMBZ15VALT1 MMBZ15VALT1
J12U
3
3
J12V
NC J12W
J12X
"A" SIZE SWITCHES J12Y
"B" SIZE SWITCHES J12Z
J12AA
Sw itch Inputs Sw itch Inputs
J12AB
SIZE0-A SIZE1-A SIZE0-B SIZE1-B J12AC
(BARREL) (FLANGE) (BARREL) (FLANGE)
SYRINGE SYRINGE J12AD
OPEN OPEN N/A OPEN OPEN LF 125
OPEN CLOSED LF 10/15/20 OPEN CLOSED N/A
CLOSED OPEN Kendall 60 CLOSED OPEN Kendall 60
CLOSED CLOSED LF 30 CLOSED CLOSED LF 50
CLOSED = LOW

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-4-5
+12V
+12V
FRONT LIMIT
2
R3
1
10K C1
+12V
+12V
U1
3 0.1uF
1
2
+12V
1 2 1
OC 4
R1
470
2 5 1
F-LIM 2
H22LOI +12V
BK-LIM 3
4
BACK LIMIT J1
2
R4
+12V 10K
+12V
U2
3
1
1
1 2 1
OC 4
R2 2
470 3
2 5
4
H22LOI J2
TO 802301
BOARD
11—POWERHEAD
SCHEMATIC
END LIMIT SENSING SCHEMATIC 814302-2-B
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-4-6
ITT Tact
SW1
1 3 1
2 4
2
J1
11—POWERHEAD
SCHEMATIC
SYRINGE SIZE SENSING SCHEMATIC 802313-2-B
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-5-1
+26 V
NC 1 POWER
2 SUPPLY
3 CONNECTION +26V
OEM J4
4
LED
EXPANSION
1 5 1
SUPPLY
2 6 2
+26V R1
3 NC 7 3
2 1 1
4 NC 8 4
3.9K 2
R2 J6
5 26V_SW 9 2 1
6 10
3.9K
7
J5
8
10
POWER CONTROL 11
/CONSOLE 12 NC 1
13
RX+_FROM_PC 2
14
TX-_TO_PC 3 POWER SUPPLY +5 V
15
26V_SW RX-_FROM_PC 4 LINE FILTER POWER
C2 TX+_TO_PC
+26V
SUPPLY +5V
16 5 L1
1
NC
3 1 2 3 VR1
17 6 3 1
NC NC IN OUT
NOTE: DO NOT 2 2
2
18 0.1uF 7 4 3
19 NC 8 INSTALL J3 1
J7 J8
1
78L05
1
GND
CMR4R7MFB + +
C8 C9
20 NC 9
10uF, 35V 10uF, 35V
2
21 NC 10
2
22 NC 11
NC
23 12
OLD
NC
24 13
CONSOLE
25 NC 14
26 NC 15
27 NC 16
J1 NC 17
NC 18
NC 19
NC 20
NC 21
NC 22
NC 23
NC 24
+5V
NC 25
+5V
26
27 C6
R6
J3 2 1 1 2
R5
1 1 2 4.7K +26V
2
0.1uF
120K
15
3
1
+5V C4 +
4
CD
2
1.0uF,16V
2
5 13 9 R8
K Q
74HC109
6 1.5K
12 U4
7 CP
1
U2A 1
2
8 16 14 10 3 +DC
VCC J Q +
1
GND
C/R
26V_SW
9 R4
16
R3 C3 6 U1A
5
SD
10 470 2.2K Q
0.1uF 4
SD
VCC
2
11 8 U1B - 2
RST 74HC4538
2
11
GND 2 6 -DC
J Q
POWER CONTROL 12
4N35
74HC109
/CONSOLE 13 C11 1 6
Q
7 4
CP
CMX60D10
C
4
14 A
2
0.1uF R7 Q2
26V_SW 2 5 5 3 7 1 2 B R9 3.9K
15 B K Q
11—POWER SUPPLY
2N3904
1
GND
+ C7 4.7K 3.9K R10
16 3
CD
1
3
C1 4
1
17
1
1.0uF,16V
2
0.1uF C5
2
8
18
SCHEMATICS
+5V
U3 0.1uF
2
19
20
UNUSED GATES:
DS1
A
21
22
Red LED
C
23
24
15
14
25 U2B
26
GND
C/R
27 10
J2 Q
RST 74HC4538
+5V
9
12 Q
A
11
B
13
POWER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC 802451-2-C
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-5-2
11—POWER SUPPLY
SCHEMATICS
POWER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC 814460-2-A

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-6-1
SEE TABLE
HAND START SWITCH ASS'Y. LENGTH TABLE

PART NUMBER TITLE ASSEMBLED LENGTH REV.
802620 START SWITCH ASS'Y., HAND 2M 6.0' - 7.0" +2.0" A
802622 START SWITCH ASS'Y., HAND 2M 19.0' - 8.0" +4.0" A
WIRING DIAGRAM
Black
C 2
SW1 N.C. Red
6
N.O.
PINS
White
C 3
11—HAND BUTTON
SW2 N.C.
N.O. Green 1
PENDANT CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
CABLE SHIELD
NOTES: SEE NOTE 2
2. CABLE SHIELD TO BE TERMINATED TO MINI DIN CIRCULAR SHEEL.
HAND BUTTON 802620/802622

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-6-2

11—HAND BUTTON
818507-M 2020-05-05
11-7-1
Power Control Powerhead Board

P1 Connector Wire Color Connectors J7, J8, J9
P1:24 BLACK J7-11
P1:9 RED J7-12
P1:39 BROWN J7-2
P1:25 YELLOW J7-1
P1:30 WHITE J7-3
GND SCREW NONE J7-4
P1:20 GREEN J7-5
P1:26 ORANGE J7-6
P1:40 BLUE J7-7
P1:13 BROWN J7-8
P1:41 YELLOW J7-9
P1:27 PINK J7-10
TAN
P1:8 BLACK J8-9
P1:22 RED J8-8
P1:29 WHITE J8-4
P1:43 GREEN J8-3
P1:37 ORANGE J8-2
P1:23 BLUE J8-1
P1:14 PURPLE J8-14
P1:42 SLATE J8-13
P1:38 PURPLE J8-6
P1:10 GRAY J8-7
P1:28 PINK J8-12
GND SCREW NONE J8-15
P1:11 TAN J8-10
P1:12 RED/YELLOW J8-11
P1:5 RED/GREEN J8-5
RED/BLACK -
P1:21 BLACK J9-1
P1:7 RED J9-2
P1:36 WHITE J9-3
P1:6 GREEN J9-5
P1:35 ORANGE J9-6
P1:34 BLUE J9-4
J9-7
GND SCREW NONE J9-8
Pin 1
J8 Powerhead Board
J7 (P/N 802301-1)
Connectors
J9
P2 P1
Pin 1
JA
11—CABLES
JB Powerhead
Motor Connections
JB1
JA1
Power Control Powerhead

P2 Connector Wire Color Motor Connections
P2:18 BLUE JA-1
P2:23 YELLOW JA-3
P2:21 GREEN JA-4
GND SCREW NONE -
P2:17 WHITE/BLUE JB-1
P2:26 WHITE/YELLOW JB-3
P2:20 WHITE/GREEN JB-4
GND SCREW NONE -
P2:24 RED/BLUE JB1-1
P2:22 RED/YELLOW JB1-3
P2:27 RED/GREEN JB1-4
GND SCREW NONE -
P2:25 BLACK/BLUE JA1-1
P2:19 BLACK/YELLOW JA1-3
P2:28 BLACK/GREEN JA1-4
GND SCREW NONE -
POWERHEAD CABLE 802303SR-A

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-7-2
14 1 25 13
PINS P1 S1 SOCKET
25 13 14 1
P1 SEE CHART S1
P2 +/- 1.0 ft. S2
P3 S3
P4 PART NUMBER LENGTH REVISION S4
P5 801224-03 3 FT. A S5
P6 801224-07 7 FT. A S6
P7 801224-15 15 FT. A S7
P8 S8
801224-25 25 FT. B
P9 S9
P10 801224-50 50 FT. B S10
P11 801224-75 75 FT. A S11
P12 801224-100 100 FT. A S12
P13 801224-150 150 FT. A S13
P14 S14
P15 S15
P16 S16
P17 S17
P18 S18
11—CABLES
P19 S19
P20 S20
P21 S21
P22 S22
P23 S23
P24 S24
P25 S25
SHIELD SHIELD
DATA CABLE 801224

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-7-3
PINS PINS
25 15
SEE CHART
+/- 1.0 ft.
P2-1 P1-1
P2-2 P1-2
P2-3 P1-3
P2-4 PART NUMBER LENGTH REVISION P1-4
P2-5 814465-01 3.3 FT. B P1-5
P2-6 814465-02 6.6 FT. B P1-6
P2-7 814465-04 13.1 FT. B P1-7
P2-8 P1-8
814465-08 26.2 FT. B
P2-9 P1-9
P2-20 814465-15 49.2 FT. B P1-10
P2-21 814465-23 75.4 FT. B P1-11
P2-22 814465-30 98.4 FT. B P1-12
P2-23 814465-46 150.9 FT. B P1-13
P2-24 P1-14
P2-25 P1-15
Shell Shell
11—CABLES
CONSOLE CABLE 814465

818507-M 2020-05-05
11-7-4

11—CABLES
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-1
A INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
The purpose of this section is to provide procedures for installing the
WARNING!
The Operational Checkout procedures for the injector must take place outside
the magnet room prior to the installation of the components inside the room.
Refer to the Operational Checkout procedure chapter A-36.
WARNING!
Titanium tools must be use when performing any adjustment in the magnet
room. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to magnet equipment
or cause personnel injury.
WARNING!
Always remove Power Control and Power Head assembly from magnet room
before disassembly. Failure to follow this warning could result in personnel
WARNING!
OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System components must only be placed in
APPENDIX—A
the areas listed below. Failure to follow this warning may result in damage to
magnet equipment
CONTROL ROOM: Console, and Power Supply MR
EQUIPMENT ROOM: Filter, and Power Supply MR
MAGNET ROOM: Powerhead, Remote Stand, and Ceiling Suspension

MR

Power Control MR
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-2
WARNING!
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a
supply mains with protective earth.
CAUTION!
This installation must be performed by a Qualified Technician who is completely
familiar with the use and operation of the injector, and trained by a LF
instructor.
CAUTION!
Electronic components, contained within the injector, may be damaged by
impact. Exercise caution while handling the injector units; avoid dropping the
unit or subjecting it to other physical shock.
NOTE: Separate instructions for Accessories are supplied with each Accessory
shipment. Each kit lists hardware, tool requirements, includes drawings, and
includes drawings and instructions for installation.
APPENDIX—A
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-3
RECEIVING INSPECTION
The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System should be subjected to inspec-
tion immediately upon arrival at its shipping destination. You should have one
carton which contains individual packing cartons for each of the components.
Refer to Table 1 below, and Figure 1 for carton components. For part numbers,
Refer to Figures 9 and 10.
Carton
Component
Component
Description
Numbers
1 Power Control Assembly
2 Accessory Components
Filter
Stand Hanger
Power Supply Wall Mount Kit
Cable for Power Supply
Hand Switch
Data Cables
Manuals
3 Console Assembly
4 Powerhead Assembly and Syringe Adaptors
5 Power Supply Assembly
6 Power Control Stand
7 Stand Post
8 Wheel Base for Stand
9 Ceiling Suspension System
Table 1: Component List with Remote Stand
WARNING!
Suspension Arms are shipped with a Transit Locking Knob that is set to
APPENDIX—A
eliminate travel of the arm to the horizontal position. Always raise the arm to
the upward limit of travel before removing any equipment mounted to the
arm. THE ARM WILL SPRING UPWARD WITH CONSIDERABLE FORCE UNDER NO
LOAD CONDITIONS, AND MAY CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Additional information on the use of the Transit Locking Knob is provided in
the installation manual that accompanied the ceiling suspension system carton.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-4
NOTE: The suspension system is to only be used with LF injectors. The maximum
load capacity of the suspension spring arm should not exceed 32 lbs (14.5 kg) at
full extension. The use of accessories not complying with the equivalent safety
requirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced level of safety of the result-
ing system. Consideration relating to the choice shall include:
• use of the accessory in the patient vicinity
• evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been performed
in accordance to the appropriate EN 60601-1 harmonized national standard
BOX #1
BOX #2
(Under Box #8) BOX #6
BOX #7
BOX #5
A
B
A
BOX #8
B
(Placed on Top Box #2)

BOX #4
APPENDIX—A
7
BOX #3
1 6 5
3
2 8
Carton Assembly
Figure 1 Shipping Carton Contents with Remote Stand
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-5
BOX #1 BOX #6
Power Control Assy Kit, CPU Stand
BOX #5
BOX #2 Power Supply Assy
Accessories
BOX #3
Console Assy
Spacer Box Here

(Not Shown in Assy) BOX #4
1 6 5 Powerhead Assy
3
2 8
Carton Assembly
Figure 1b Shipping Contents with Ceiling Suspension System
APPENDIX—A
NOTE: Ceiling Suspension System not shown but will be banded to top of pack-
aged shipping contents.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-6
CONFIGURATION OF REMOTE STAND UNIT

The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System is specially designed to be
used in conjunction with MRI equipment. The unit consists of the components
shown in Figure 2a.
The console, filter, and the power supply are not designed to be placed in the
magnet room and must be set up in a separate viewing room. The power con-
trol, powerhead and remote stand have been specifically designed so that they
may remain in the magnet room throughout the procedure without interfer-
ence.
The console A contains a touch-sensitive display screen which provides the

ability to change the injection parameters, store protocols and retrieve pro-
tocols. Information about the console is found in Chapter 2—Console in the
Service Manual.
A hand start switch B , a remote control device which attaches to the rear
of the console, is included so that the injection process may be started and
stopped from outside the magnet room.
The powerhead C is specifically designed from materials which will not affect
nor be affected by the magnetic fields of the MR scanner. Note, however, the
Powerhead Cable Connector (connects into the Power Control) is MR condition-
al. Refer to Figure 8 and 9 for Cable connection Information.
The remote stand D allows easy placement of the powerhead for operator and
patient convenience.
The power system consists of one Power Control E 1 , one Power Supply (with
mounting bracket) E 2 and one EFI/RFI Filter E 3 . Both the Power Control and
the Communication Cable (from the filter to the Power Control) are MR Condi-
tional. More information about the power system is found in Chapter 3—Basic
Operations in the Service Manual.
APPENDIX—A
WARNING!
CONFIGURATION OF CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Refer To Section 1.3 Heading 1.3.2
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-7
MEANING OF MR SYMBOLS
OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System: The OptiStar Elite Contrast Delivery
System is to be used with magnet strengths of up to 3.0 T.
MR SAFE
Remote Stand or Ceiling Suspension with Powerhead (NOT including Pow-
MR
erhead Cable Connector): The Powerhead and Remote Stand are specifically
designed from materials which will not affect nor be affected by the magnetic
fields of the MR scanner. Note, however, the Powerhead Cable Connector (con-
nects into the Power Control) is MR conditional.
MR CONDITIONAL
Powerhead Cable Connector: The Powerhead Cable Connector is MR Condition-
MR al. During installation and removal, the Powerhead Cable Connector should be
carried with caution when within fields between 1,125 G and 2000 G. The Pow-
erhead Cable Connector should not be carried into fields higher than 2000G.
NOTE: During operation the Powerhead Cable Connector is securely connected
to the Power Control and is in an area less than or equal to 300G.
Power Control: The Power Control is MR Conditional. During installation and
MR removal, the Power Control should not be carried into fields higher than 2000G.
During injector operation, the Power Control must be located in an area with a
field less than or equal to 300G.
Communication Cable Connectors: The Communication Cable Connectors are
MR MR Conditional. During installation and removal, the communication cable
connectors should be carried with caution when within fields between 470 G
and 3,200 G. The Communication Cable Connectors should not be carried into
fields greater than 3,200 G. NOTE: During operation the Communication Cable
Connectors are securely connected to the Power Control and Filter.
MR UNSAFE
APPENDIX—A
Console, Power Supply and Mounting Bracket, Hand Start Switch, and Filter:
MR The console, Power Supply and mounting bracket, hand start switch, and the
Filter are not designed to be placed in the MRI area and must be set up in a
separate viewing room.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-8
MR MR
MR
Control and E 3
Equipment Rooms C
A
A
60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
E1
D
B
E2 Dividing
P/N 814600 Wall
E2
P/N 814450
Magnet Room
AC Outlet
Figure 2 Overview of System with Remote Stand
MR F
MR
Control and E 3
Equipment Rooms
A MR
E1 C
A 60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
APPENDIX—A
B
E2 Dividing
Réf. 814600 Wall
E2
Réf. 814450
Magnet Room
AC Outlet
Figure 2a Overview of System with Ceiling Suspension
WARNING!
Unplug power cord to disconnect the powerpack from supply mains.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-9
REMOTE STAND ASSEMBLY/POWERHEAD INSTALLATION

CAUTION!
Remote Stand assembly and Powerhead Installation should not be performed
in the magnet room. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to
magnetic equipment.
Refer to Figure 1 Shipping Carton Contents with Remote Stand.

1. Place Remote Stand wheelbase on the floor.
2. Insert stationary post assembly into base and using the thumb screw and washer
supplied with the stand, insert from the bottom and tighten until secured.
3. Install Cable Hanger by fastening to the stationary post using the supplied fasten-
ers.
4. The Remote Stand Assembly is now complete and ready for Powerhead installa-
tion.
Cable Hanger
Stationary Post
Washer Thumbscrew
Wheelbase
APPENDIX—A
Figure 3 Remote Stand Components
CEILING SUSPENSION INSTALLATION

For the ceiling suspension installation, instructions, and procedures refer to the
accompanying AADCO ceiling suspension installation manual, P/N 814844.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-10
POWERHEAD INSTALLATION FOR THE REMOTE STAND

Refer to Figure 4a.
1. Carefully lift Powerhead assembly and install on stand rod.
2. The Powerhead is secured to the stand's rod by one screw. Install and tighten screw
until seated. Swivel Powerhead to ensure there is rotation.
Screw
P
60 ml ml
B
ml
30 15/20
A
50 ml ml
10/
60 ml
125
Rod
Tension
Adjustment
Figure 4a Powerhead Installation/Adjustment with Remote Stand
POWERHEAD INSTALLATION FOR CEILING SUSPENSION

ATTACHMENT OF THE POWERHEAD TO THE CEILING SUSPENSION
NOTE: The Powerhead is supplied with the support arm attached. See Figure
4b. The support arm must be removed to install the Powerhead assembly onto
the suspension system.
P
APPENDIX—A
60 ml ml
B
ml
30 /15/20
A
50 ml ml
10
60 ml
125
Support Tension
Arm Adjustment
Figure 4b: OptiStar Elite Powerhead with Support Arm Attached.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-11
REMOVAL OF THE SUPPORT ARM

Remove the Support Arm shown in Figure 4b.
WARNING!
Do not use ferrous tools while in an active MRI environment.
REQUIRED TOOLS: Non-ferrous C-clip pliers.

1. Ensure the OptiStar Elite injector powerhead is not plugged in.
2. Remove the tension adjustment knob, thrust washer and pivot cap shown in Figure 4c.
3. Using C-clip pliers remove and discard the retaining ring shown in Figure 4c.
4. If there are not any non-ferrous C-clip pliers available, then this step must be per-
formed outside of the magnet room.
5. Loosen the set screw on the bottom of the support arm..
6. Grabbing powerhead near the pivot shaft pull powerhead straight out.
7. Discard the support arm.
Retaining Support
Thrust
Tension Ring Arm
Washer
Knob
Pivot
Shaft
Powerhead
Pivot
Cap
Outer Pivot
Washer
APPENDIX—A
Set Screw
Inner Pivot
Washer
Figure 4c: Removal of Support Arm from OptiStar Elite Powerhead
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-12
ATTACHMENT OF POWERHEAD TO J-BOW ARM

NOTE: The sleeve bushing was previously installed into the J-Bow Arm sleeve
at the factory.
The order of the mounting hardware for the OptiStar Elite Powerhead to the
AADCO Ceiling Suspension System is the same as for the Remote Stand, minus
the retaining ring, refer to Figure 4d.
1. Slide the inner pivot washer onto the pivot shaft and the Powerhead pivot assem-
bly into the sleeve bushing of the J-Bow. Refer to Figure 4d
NOTE: Be sure to install the Powerhead onto the correct side of the J-Bow. The
anti-rotation pin should go on the side of the J-Bow with the matching anti-
rotation pin slot.
2. Install on the other side of the J-Bow the following hardware in the following order:
outer pivot washer, pivot cap, thrust washer, and tension knob.
NOTE: The Retaining Ring or C-Clip is NOT installed.
3. Secure the Powerhead by rotating the Tension Knob clock wise.
Thrust Suspension
Washer System
Tension
Knob
Pivot
Shaft
Powerhead
APPENDIX—A
Pivot
Cap
Outer Pivot
Washer
Inner Pivot
Washer
Figure 4d: Mounting Hardware for the OptiStar Elite Powerhead to J-Bow Arm
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-13
CABLE ROUTING OF POWERHEAD CABLE TO CEILING SUSPENSION

This section describe various methods to route the powerhead cable to the
ceiling suspension system for both fixed column systems and track mount
assemblies. The AADCO Ceiling Suspension System is limited to 270 degree
rotation at two different pivot locations to reduce the strain placed on the pow-
erhead cable, see Figure 4e.
270 Degree
Rotation
270 Degree
Rotation
FIGURE 4e: Rotation Limits for the AADCO Ceiling Suspension System
APPENDIX—A
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-14
SECURING THE CABLE TO THE J-BOW ASSEMBLY
WARNING!
Ceiling Suspension Systems contain a high tension spring that will cause
the arm to swing upwards with high force if it is released before the system
installation is complete. In order to prevent this, do not release the transit
locking knob until the system installation is complete.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Failure to provide a service loop may result in damage to the cable.
REQUIRED TOOLS: Non-ferrous wire cutter.

NOTE: The Power Control must be installed no more than the length of the
Powerhead Cable, P/N 802303, which has a fixed length of 10 m (33 feet). See
Figure 4e.
A 60 ml
10/15/ 30 ml
20 ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
APPENDIX—A
Cable Length
10 m (33 ft) Max
Figure 4e: OptiStar Elite Powerhead to Power Supply Cable Length
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-15
1. Secure the powerhead cable to the J-Bow arm assembly using the tie cables, P/N
501609, provided with the Ceiling Suspension System.
2. Loosely place the first tie cable approximately where shown in Figure 4f.
3. Loosely place additional tie cables along the J-Bow arm with the Powerhead Cable
as needed.
4. Ensure there is enough cable between each loop to allow the powerhead and J-
Bow arm to move freely without creating a strain on the powerhead cable.
5. Begin tightening the tie cables so that they form a loop, but also so that they are
still loose.
6. Once the cable is appropriately positioned tighten each of the tie cables to secure
the powerhead cable.
7. Cut off excess material from each of the tie cables using a Non-ferrous wire cutter.
8. Check for free movement between the powerhead and J-Bow arm.
Tie-Wrap
J-Bow Arm
APPENDIX—A
B
60 ml ml 20 ml
30 15/
A
50 ml ml
10/
60 ml
125
Tension
Knob
Figure 4f: Location of the Initial Tie Cable, P/N 501609, Between the Powerhead
and the J-Bow Arm
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-16
SECURING THE CABLE TO THE SPRING ARM
WARNING!
Ceiling Suspension Systems contain a high tension spring that will cause
the arm to swing upwards with high force if it is released before the system
installation is complete. In order to prevent this, do not release the transit
locking knob until the system installation is complete.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Failure to provide a service loop may result in damage to the cable.
REQUIRED TOOLS: Non-ferrous wire cutter.

powerhead cable, P/N 802303, which has a fixed length of 10 m (33 feet). See
figure 4e.
1. Make sure to finish Sections A-8 through A-12 before proceeding to the following steps.
2. Secure the powerhead cable to the Spring Arm assembly using the tie cables, P/N
501609, provided with the Ceiling Suspension System.
3. Attach the powerhead cable to the spring arm at the approximate locations indicated
by the arrows in Figure 4g and loosely place the tie cables along the spring arm.
4. Provide a sufficient service loop between the powerhead cable, Spring Arm assem-
bly, and at each pivot of the ceiling suspension arm. This will allow full movement
without putting tension on the cable.
NOTE: Three tie cables per section of the spring arm assembly is recommended.
APPENDIX—A
still loose.
6. Ensure there is enough cable between each loop to allow the powerhead cable
and Spring Arm assembly to move freely without creating a strain on the power-
head cable.
7. Once the cable is appropriately positioned tighten each tie cable to secure the
powerhead cable.
8. Check that the powerhead cable drape around the junction of the J-Bow to the
suspension system is correct, allowing for up and down movement of the system
without creating a strain on the powerhead cable.
9. Cut off excess material from each cable using a Non-ferrous wire cutter
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-17
Cable
Tie
Cable
Ties
Cable
Ties
Figure 4g: EXAMPLE of Cable Routing with a Fixed Column
APPENDIX—A
SECURING THE CABLE TO A FIXED COLUMN CEILING SUSPENSION
NOTE: Ensure that the column covers have been installed before proceeding
1. An additional one to two tie cables are recommended for use on the suspension
fixed column. See Figure 4g.
2. The cable then goes to the Power Control.
powerhead cable, P/N 802303, which has a fixed length of 10 m (33 feet). See
Figure 4e.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-18
SECURING THE CABLE TO A TRACK ASSEMBLY SYSTEM

1. Attach the cable to the Spring Arm assembly as described in Sections A-13
through A-14.
2. An example of cable routing with a track assembly is shown in Figure 4h.
3. A Cable Drape Track is provided with each track assembly. See Figures 4j and 4k.
4. The Cable Drape Track has three Drape Trolleys for tie cable placement. See Figure 4k.
5. Place three tie cables onto the Drape Trolleys as shown in Figure 4m.
6. Secure the powerhead cable through each of the loops created by the tie cables
as shown in Figure 4n.
still loose as shown in Figure 4n.
8. Ensure there is a sufficient service loop between the Spring Arm Assembly and
Track Assembly to allow for free movement without creating a strain on the pow-
erhead cable.
9. Ensure there is enough of the powerhead cable to create a sufficient service loop
between each loop to allow the Carriage to move freely along the entire length of
the Track Assembly without creating a strain on the powerhead cable.
10. Once the powerhead cable is appropriately positioned tighten each tie cable to
secure the powerhead cable.
11. Cut off excess material from each cable using a Non-ferrous wire cutter.
12. Check again for free movement between the powerhead cable and the Track As-
sembly and the powerhead cable and the Trolley.
APPENDIX—A
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-19
Cable Ties
Cable
Ties
Cable
Ties
Figure 4h: EXAMPLE of Cable Routing with a Track Assembly
Cable
Track
APPENDIX—A
Cable
Figure 4j: Side View of the Cable Drape Track
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-20
Drape Track
Drape Trolley
Figure 4k: Front View of the Cable Drape Track with Three Drape Trolleys
Cable Tie
Figure 4m: Placement of the Three Tie Cables

APPENDIX—A
Cable Tie
Figure 4n: Loosely Attach Three Tie Cables to the Track Assembly
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-21
REMOVAL OF THE POWERHEAD CABLE

1. For removal of the powerhead cable for any service or repair related activities, sim-
ply cut-off the tie cables as needed.
2. For replacement of the powerhead cable following any service or repair related ac-
tivity simply repeat the cable installation instructions that apply to a fixed column
mount or track mount ceiling suspension starting from Section A-10.
FILTER LOCATION FOR CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
The Filter can be mounted on a shield wall or via a penetration panel. Direc-
tions for both methods are provided in Section A-24.
POWERHEAD SYRINGE ADAPTER INSTALLATION

Refer to Figure 4p.
DOTAclip syringe adapter DOTAclip syringe adapter
P/N 802880 P/N 802930
StarClip syringe adapter Syringe adapter

P/N 814735 P/N 802730
APPENDIX—A
Syringe adapter Bottom of Nest

Storage Location
Figure 4p Syringe Adapters
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-22
CONSOLE INSTALLATION
Refer to Figure 4r.
1. Place Console in the Control Room.
2. At the rear of the Console, connect communication cable to J1, and Handswitch
cable to the connection provided.
3. Secure cables with the ty-wrap provided.
Handswitch Connection
!
Communication
Connection J1
Console Cable
Ty-Wrap
Figure 4r Console Cable Connections

APPENDIX—A
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-23
POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION

• The DC Power Supply can either be located near the Console in the Control
room or in the Equipment Room. The preferred location is as close to the Filter
as possible.
NOTE: The total cumulative length of cable from the Power Supply to the Power
Control should not exceed 150 feet.
• The procedures below describe how to install Power Supply wall mount kit
(P/N 802617).
WARNING!
Do not install DC power supply in magnet room. Failure to follow this warning
WARNING!
Do not penetrate magnet room shield to install Wall Mount Bracket. Failure to
follow this warning could result in personnel injury or equipment damage.
WARNING!
Do not install Wall Mount power supply above 24" from the floor. Failure to
follow this warning could result in personnel injury or equipment damage.
Refer to Figure 5.
1. Select a wall mounting location for the power supply. Ensure wall mount bracket
mounting screws will not penetrate the magnet room shield.
Ensure the power supply mounting location allows good air circulation. Also, be
sure the rear of the power supply is accessible for cable installation.
APPENDIX—A
2. Mount kit wall bracket (P/N 802631) to either wood or metal wall stud using the
#10 flat fasteners supplied in the kit. Ensure the wide part of the bracket is facing
down.
3. Mount kit wall mount plate (P/N 802632), and wall mount retaining clip
(P/N 802630) to the bottom of the power supply using three (3) #M4 fasteners.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-24
WALL STUD
Wall Mount
Retaining Clip
(P/N 802630)
Wall Mount
Plate #10 Flat
M4 Fastener
(P/N 802632) Head
Wall Mount
Fastener
Bracket
(P/N 802631)
10" #10 Flat

Fastener
24” Maximum
M4 Fastener
Mounting
Height
Power Supply
Housing
10" 5" (P/N 802428)
Figure 5 Power Supply Wall Installation for models with 814450 Power Supply
WALL STUD
Wall Mount
Retaining Clip
Power Supply M4 Fastener (P/N 802630)
Housing
(P/N 844652) #10 Flat Wall Mount
Head Bracket
Wall Mount Fastener (P/N 802631)
Plate
(P/N 802632)
APPENDIX—A
M4 Fastener
9" #10 Flat
Fastener
10-1/2" 4-1/8"
Figure 6 Power Supply Wall Installation for models with 814600 Power Supply
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-25
FILTER INSTALLATION
NOTE: The Filter can be mounted on the shield wall by an Original Equipment
Manufacture (OEM) or third party, or the signals from the Filter can go through
the penetration panel.
Refer to Figures 6 for installation illustration, and 6a for filter dimensions. Also,
refer to Figures 9 and 10 for cable routing information.
CAUTION!
The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System will meet all injector
performance specifications without image artifacts, when filter cabling is not
in contact with other cables. If the filter cabling is in contact with other cables,
then the injector may experience alarms, rendering it inoperable or RF signals
may enter the magnet room, which may cause image artifacts.
FILTER MOUNTED TO SHIELDED WALL

NOTE: The following instructions must be completed by qualified personnel
specifically trained in the penetrating/sealing of MR shielding.
1. Select filter location inside equipment room.
2. Drill clearance hole for threaded pipe through shielded wall.
3. Remove 25 pin D-shell connector cover. Then slide 25 pin connector through
threaded pipe. Install threaded pipe into filter (select best threaded pipe length for
wall thickness, 3 inch or 6 inch).
4. Temporarily install filter to shielded wall, marking the 4 mounting hole locations.
5. Remove filter and then drill 4 pilot holes in shielded wall for mounting bolts.
6. Re-install filter and then secure with 4 mounting bolts.
7. In magnet room, install wire mesh washer, brass washer and nut to threaded pipe
APPENDIX—A
and then tighten by hand or with non-ferrous wrench. Re-install 25 pin D-shell con-
nector cover previously removed.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-26
FILTER MOUNTED VIA PENETRATION PANEL

1. Select filter location in equipment room, as close as practical to an available 25 pin
D-shell pass through connector on the penetration panel.
2. Install communication cable (3 ft or 7 ft) from the filter cable to the pass through
connector.
3. Install ground cable (short as possible, 1.5 ft to 15 ft) from filter mounting hole/bolt
to the ground strip of the penetration panel.
4. Neatly route communication and ground cables away from other cables.
Equipment Magnet
Room Wire Mesh Room
Washer Brass
Washer
Nut
3 or 6 Inch
Threaded Pipe
25 Pin D-shell
Filter Connector
APPENDIX—A
Figure 6 Filter Installation Components
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-27
FILTER DIMENSIONS
31.75mm
12.7mm 6.604mm (.260") (5 Places)
(1.25") 31.75mm Diameter
(.5")
(1.25")
76.2mm
(3")
(FRONT VIEW)
101.6mm
(4")
270.0mm (10.63")
285.75mm (11.25")
76.2mm
(3.0") (SIDE VIEW)
457.2mm (18.0")
APPENDIX—A
Figure 6a Filter Dimensions
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-28
POWER CONTROL
INSTALLATION OF COMMUNICATION CABLE BRACKETS
1. Remove the 2 -M5 10 mm screws located above the Communications Cable con-
nector. Retain screws.
2. Using the retained screws from step 1, install the upper bracket.
3. Using the supplied M5 16 mm screws, install the lower bracket as shown
in Figure 7a.
J3
Screw, M5 10 mm
(2 places)
Communication Cable
Screw, M5 16 mm (2 places)
APPENDIX—A
J3J
3
Figure 7a Installation of Communication Cable Brackets
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-29
MOUNTING TO STAND
1. Remove Power Control stand from box and plastic bag.
2. Turn stand upside down and loosen two (2) thumb adjustment nuts. Extend stand
to obtain proper fit for the Power Control. After proper adjustment is obtained,
tighten the two (2) thumb adjustment nuts.
3. Position stand, then set Power Control on stand.
Power Control
Power Control
Stand
Figure 7b Mounting Power Control to Stand
APPENDIX—A
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-30
POWER CONTROL PLACEMENT AND ORIENTATION GUIDELINES

Refer to Figure 7c for placement orientation and location.
MRI Room
Position 3
Position 2 Position 2
45o
(approximate)
TYPICAL
FULL BODY
SCANNER
CL
Position 1 Position 1
Position 4
Power Control Positions
1. Best Position 3. Acceptable Position

• Position on center with magnet, either side • Position as far away from the magnet as possible
• Orientation as shown • Any orientation
• Position as far away from the magnet as possible • Maximum gauss level <_300G
• Maximum gauss level <_ 300G • Route cables out of way
APPENDIX—A
• Route cables out of way

4. Acceptable Position
2. Good Position • Not recommended if it may hinder clinical access.
• Position within shaded areas, either side • Position as far away from the magnet as possible
• Any orientation • Any orientation
• Position as far away from the magnet as possible • Maximum gauss level <_ 300G
• Maximum gauss level <_300G • Route cables out of way
• Route cables out of way
Figure 7c Power Control Positions

NOTE:
• Do not run communication cables in front of magnet bore
• Do not coil cables
• Cable lengths should be as short as possible.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-31
POWER CONTROL PLACEMENT FOR CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

The ceiling suspension systems are intended for installation in new facilities. As
such the location of the Power Control should be coordinated with the facility,
OEM, and Guerbet Site Planner.
In most cases the OEM has a MRI safe closet or cabinet that the Power Control is
placed in, similar to as shown in Figure 7d
Power Control
Inside the Cabinet
Figure 7d: EXAMPLE of a Power Control placed in an OEM Cabinet
CAUTION!
The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System will meet all performance
APPENDIX—A
specifications when the power control is placed at any of the 4 specified power
control positions. If the power control is positioned within a magnetic field
higher than 300 gauss then the injector may encounter alarms, rendering the
injector inoperable.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-32
GAUSS MEASURING METHOD

WARNING!
Gauss meter may be MR conditional (see labeling on and with gauss meter). If
Gauss meter is MR conditional, then do not carry gauss meter into magnetic
fields higher than the stated condition and securely carry with caution in fields
lower than stated condition.
1. Only use gauss meter that has valid calibration date.

2. At the desired Power Control location, take measurements in eight different direc-
tions from the top of the Power Control approximately every 45 degrees, noting
reading at each position.
NOTE: If reading is higher than 300 gauss, reposition Power Control in Magnet room.
3. Record the highest gauss reading from step 2 on the installation checklist.
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

• Power Supply
Voltage 100-120/230 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Current 4 Amp
WARNING!
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a
supply mains with protective earth.
APPENDIX—A
POWER CABLES (POWER SUPPLY)

• 115 VAC (120 VAC), Length 8 ft (2.44 m), Part Number 800918
• 230 VAC, Length 8 ft, (2.44 m) Part Number 800935
WARNING!
If the supplied power cables cannot be used due to non compatibility with
country specific outlets, then the following power cable specifications must be
met. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to equipment or cause
personnel injury.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-33
POWER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS

In addition to meeting all applicable electrical codes, substitute power cables
must meet the following specifications:
115 VAC (120 VAC)
• 3 x 18 AWG Conductors
230 VAC
• 3 x 1.00 mm² Conductors
NOTE: Power cords for countries outside US, Canada, and EU may need to meet
other specific requirements.
CABLE CONNECTIONS
Refer to Figure 8, 9, and 10 for equipment connections.
NOTE: Ensure communication cables are routed away from other cables
NOTE: The total cumulative length of cable from the Power Supply to the Power
Control should not exceed 150 feet.
CAUTION!
During installation and removal, the communication cable connectors should

be carried with caution when within fields between 470G and 3,200 G. The
Communication cable connector should not be carried into fields higher than
3,200 G.
APPENDIX—A
CAUTION!
During installation and removal, the Powerhead cable connector should be
carried with caution when within fields between 1,125 G and 2000G. The
Powerhead cable connector should not be carried into fields higher than
2000G.
CAUTION!
When connecting Powerhead cable to the Power Control, ensure that
connector housing is correctly oriented (black arrows aligned) and fully seated
before attempting to tighten thumbscrews. Failure to follow this caution may
result in equipment failure, such as damaged pins.
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-34
25 Pin
Connector To
Console and Filter
Power Supply
On/Off
O I
Power Supply (Rear View)
Fuse Holder
4 Amp Slow Blow Power In
P/N 172E0061 115/230VAC ±10% Power Supply AC Cable Retainer (Rear View)
(Qty 2)
Figure 8 Power Supply Connections for models with 814450 Power Supply
Power Supply
On/Off
Power Supply (Rear View)

APPENDIX—A
apply
904509
Fuse Holder Power Supply AC 15 Pin 25 Pin

Power In Connector Connector
4 Amp Slow Blow Cable Retainer (Rear View)
115/230VAC ±10% To Console To Filter
P/N 172E0061
(Qty 2)
Figure 9 Power Supply Connections for models with 814600 Power Supply
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-35
CONTROL
ROOM
Handbutton
Connection J2
(P/N 802620 (2 m (6 ft)
(P/N 802622 (6 m (20 ft)
Console Console
Communication (P/N 814101 and 814400)
and Power (Rear View)
Connection J1 * NOTE: Do Not Exceed Cable Length,
(From Power Supply to Console) is 92 m (300 ft)

(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft) O I Power Supply
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 814450)
(Rear View)
EQUIPMENT
ROOM Fuse
Holder
cable end P/N 172L0078
Power In
Filter (Qty 2)
100-127 / 220-240 V~
(P/N 802600)

Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Power Control) * Comm. Cable and Power
is 46 m (150 ft) (P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
Powerhead
(P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft)
(P/N 814300)
Optional (P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft)
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B125 60 ml50 ml
ml
(P/N 241405 or 241413)
Optional
Remote Stand
P
A
60 ml ml
30
B
10/15/20
ml
(P/N 802850)
APPENDIX—A
50 ml ml
60 ml
125
Power Control
orientation is
Figure 10 Component and Cabling Overview

-Power Supply located in Equipment Room
-Filter permanently mounted on shielded wall option shown for models with
814450 Power Supply
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-36
Handbutton
Connection J2
Console (P/N 802620 (2 m (6 ft)
(P/N 814101 and 814400) (P/N 802622 (6 m (20 ft)
(Rear View)
Console
Communication
and Power
Connection J1
O I J2 J1
Power Supply
(P/N 814450)
(Rear View)
CONTROL Fuse
ROOM Holder
4 Amp Slow Blow
* NOTE: Do Not Exceed Cable Length, P/N 172L0078
(From Power Supply to Console) is 92 m (300 ft) Power In
(Qty 2) 100-127 / 220-240 V~
* Comm. Cable and Power

(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 801259-1 (.5 m (1.5 ft)
Socket (P/N 801259-3 (.9 m (3 ft)
Filter cable end
ROOM (P/N 801259-15 (5 m (15 ft)
(P/N 802600)
Ground Strip
or
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
* NOTE: Not To Exceed

MAGNET ROOM Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Power Control)
is 46 m (150 ft)
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
Powerhead (P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft)
(P/N 814300) (P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft)
A 60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B125 60 ml50 ml
ml
Optional
(P/N 241405 or 241413)

Optional
APPENDIX—A
Remote Stand
(P/N 802850)
Power Control
P
Note: Ensure
60 ml ml ml
30
A
50 ml ml
10/15/20
60 ml
125
(P/N 814200)
orientation is

-Power Supply mounted in Control Room Configuration
-Filter using the penetration panel pass-through option shown for models with
814450 Power Supply
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-37
CONTROL
ROOM
* Console Data and Power Cable
(P/N 814465-01 (1 m (3.5 ft)
(P/N 814465-02 (2 m (7 ft) Handbutton
(P/N 814465-04 (4 m (15 ft) Connection J2
(P/N 814465-08 (8 m (25 ft) (P/N 802620 (2 m (6 ft)
(P/N 814465-15 (15 m (50 ft) (P/N 802622 (6 m (20 ft)
(P/N 814465-23 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 814465-30 (30 m (100 ft) Console
(P/N 814465-46 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 814101 and 814400)
(Rear View)
Console Communication
and Power Connection J1 * NOTE: Do Not Exceed Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Console) is 92 m (300 ft)
For lengths greater than 46m, add an 801224 cable of the proper length.

(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft) Power Supply
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 814600)
(Rear View)
EQUIPMENT apply
ROOM
904509
Fuse Holder
cable end Power In
P/N 172L0078 100-127 / 220-240 V~
Filter (Qty 2)
(P/N 802600)

Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Power Control) * Power Control Data
is 46 m (150 ft) and Power Cable
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
Powerhead
(P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 814300)
Optional (P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft)
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft)
(P/N 241405 or 241413)
Optional
APPENDIX—A
Remote Stand
P
A
50 ml ml
60 ml
125
60 ml ml
30
B
10/15/20
ml
(P/N 802850)
Power Control
orientation is

-Power Supply located in Equipment Room
-Filter permanently mounted on shielded wall option shown for models with
814600 Power Supply
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-38
* Console Data and Power Cable Handbutton

(P/N 814465-01 (1 m (3.5 ft) Console Connection J2
(P/N 814465-02 (2 m (7 ft) (P/N 814101 and 814400) (P/N 802620 (2 m (6 ft)
(P/N 814465-04 (4 m (15 ft) (Rear View) (P/N 802622 (6 m (20 ft)
(P/N 814465-08 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 814465-15 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 814465-23 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 814465-30 (30 m (100 ft)
(P/N 814465-46 (46 m (150 ft)
Console
Communication
and Power Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC,
Connection J1
apply
904509
CONTROL
Power Supply
ROOM Fuse Holder (P/N 814600)
4 Amp Slow Blow (Rear View)
* NOTE: Do Not Exceed Cable Length, (From Power Supply to Console) is 92 m (300 ft) P/N 172L0078
(Qty 2) Power In
For lengths greater than 46m, add an 801224 cable of the proper length. 100-127 / 220-240 V~

(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft) (P/N 801259-1 (.5 m (1.5 ft)
Socket (P/N 801259-3 (.9 m (3 ft)
Filter cable end
ROOM (P/N 801259-15 (5 m (15 ft)
(P/N 802600)
Ground Strip
or
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
* NOTE: Not To Exceed Cable Length,

MAGNET ROOM (From Power Supply to Power Control)
is 46 m (150 ft)
* Power Control Data
and Power Cable
(P/N 801224-07 (2 m (7 ft)
(P/N 801224-15 (4 m (15 ft)
(P/N 801224-25 (8 m (25 ft)
(P/N 801224-50 (15 m (50 ft)
Powerhead (P/N 801224-75 (23 m (75 ft)
(P/N 814300) (P/N 801224-100 (30 m (100 ft)
A 60 ml
10/15/20 30 ml
ml
B 60 ml50 ml
125 ml
(P/N 801224-150 (46 m (150 ft)
APPENDIX—A
Optional
(P/N 241405 or 241413)

Optional
Remote Stand
(P/N 802850)
Power Control
P
Note: Ensure
60 ml ml ml
30
A
50 ml ml
10/15/20
60 ml
125
(P/N 814200)
orientation is

-Power Supply mounted in Control Room Configuration
-Filter using the penetration panel pass-through option shown for models with
814600 Power Supply
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-39
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT
To perform the operational checkout, perform the procedures in chapter 4 of
this manual and fill out checklist 814836.
CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

Refer to Section 4.6 for full information.
APPENDIX—A
818507-M 2020-05-05
A-40

APPENDIX—A
818507-M 2020-05-05
B-1
B SERVICE CHECKLIST
The following Service Checklist is the latest revision available at the publication
date of this document. For the most up to date Service Checklist revision,
contact your Guerbet distributor.
B—SERVICE
CHECKLIST
818507-M 2020-05-05
B-2

B—SERVICE
CHECKLIST
818507-M 2020-05-05
B-3
B—SERVICE
CHECKLIST
818507-M 2020-05-05
B-4
B—SERVICE
CHECKLIST
818507-M 2020-05-05
C-1
C ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY GUIDANCE
The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System meets EN 60601-1-2 for Class A
conducted and radiated emissions and EMI immunity.
WARNING!
The OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System should not be used adjacent to
or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the
system should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in
which it will be used.
WARNING!
Use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified or
provided by the manufacturer of this equipment could result in increased
electromagnetic emissions or decreased electromagnetic immunity of this
equipment and result in improper operation.
WARNING!
Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as
antenna cables and external antennas) should be used no closer than 30
cm (12 inches) to any part of the OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System,
including cables specified by the manufacturer. Otherwise, degradation of the
performance of this equipment could result.
CAUTION!
Portable and mobile RF communication equipment can affect operations of the
OptiStar Elite MR Contrast Delivery System . COMPATIBILITY GUIDANCE
A—ELECTROMAGNETIC
CAUTION!
Maintaining programmed flow rate (unless pressure limited) and delivered
volume are essential performance features of the OptiStar Elite MR Contrast
Delivery System. Interference from other equipment could cause degradation
of these functions, resulting in improper operation.
818507-M 2020-05-05
C-2
NOTE: The EMISSIONS characteristics of this equipment make it suitable for use
in industrial areas and hospitals (CISPR 11 class A). If it is used in a residential
environment (for which CISPR 11 class B is normally required) this equipment
might not offer adequate protection to radio-frequency communication
services. The user might need to take mitigation measures, such as relocating
or re-orienting the equipment.
NOTE: If any anomalies in the injector performance are noticed, identify devices
within the immediate area that are capable of producing electromagnetic
interference and call a qualified service representative.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY TABLES

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The OptiStar Elite is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the
OptiStar Elite should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The OptiStar Elite uses RF energy only for the internal function.
Therefore, the RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause
CISPR 11
any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class A The EMISSIONS characteristics of this equipment make it suitable
for use in industrial areas and hospitals (CISPR 11 class A). If it is used
CISPR 11
in a residential environment (for which CISPR 11 class B is normally
Harmonic emissions Class A required) this equipment might not offer adequate protection to
IEC 61000-3-2 radio-frequency communication services. The user might need to
take mitigation measures, such as relocating or re-orienting the
Voltage fluctuations/ Complies
equipment.
flicker emissions
Table 1
A—ELECTROMAGNETIC
818507-M 2020-05-05
C-3
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

Immunity Test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Electrostatic ± 2 kV, 4 kV and 8 kV ± 2 kV, 4 kV and 8 kV Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic
discharge (ESD) contact contact tile. If floors are covered with synthetic
material, the relative humidity should be
IEC 61000-4-2 ± 2 kV, 4 kV, 8kV and ± 2 kV, 4 kV, 8kV and
less than 30%.
15 kV air 15 kV air
Electrical Fast ± 2 kV @100 kHz for ± 2 kV @100 kHz for Mains power quality should be that
Transient / Burst power supply lines power supply lines of a typical commercial or hospital
environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ± 1 kV @ 100 kHz for ± 1 kV @ 100 kHz for
input / output lines input / output lines
Surge ± 0.5, 1 kV line to line ± 0.5, 1 kV line to line Mains power quality should be that
of a typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-5 ± 0.5, 1, 2 kV line to earth ± 0.5, 1, 2 kV line to earth
environment.
Voltage dips, short 100% dip @0.5 cycles at 100% dip @0.5 cycles at Mains power quality should be that
interruptions and 0, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, 0, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, of a typical commercial or hospital
voltage variations on 270, 315 degrees 270, 315 degrees environment. If the user of the OptiStar
power supply input Elite requires continued operation
100% dip @ 1 cycle 100% dip @ 1 cycle
lines during power mains interruptions, it is
30% dip @ 25/30 cycles, 30% dip @ 25/30 cycles, recommended that the OptiStar Elite be
IEC 61000-4-11
100% dip @ 5 seconds 100% dip @ 5 seconds powered from an uninterruptible power
supply or battery.
Power frequency 30 A/m 30 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should
(50/60 Hz) magnetic be at levels characteristic of a typical
field location in a typical commercial or hospital
environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
Table 2
A—ELECTROMAGNETIC
818507-M 2020-05-05
C-4
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

Immunity Test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms equipment should be used no closer to any part
0.15 to 80 MHz of the OptiStar Elite, including cables, than the
IEC 61000-4-6 recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency
6 Vrms in ISM bands 6 Vrms of the transmitter. Recommended separation
between distance
0.15 to 80 MHz
d = 1.2 √P
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m
d = 1.7 √P
RF Immunity
IEC 61000-4-3
(80Mhz-2.7GHz) d = 1.2 √P
(80 MHz to 800 MHz)
RF Proximity
(80MHz-2.7GHz, d = 2.3√P
3-6GHz) (800 MHz to 2.7 GHz)
Where P is the maximum output power rating
of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters as

determined by an electromagnetic site surveya
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency rangeb.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of

equipment marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radios (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM, FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess
the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If
the measured field strength in the location in which the OptiStar Elite is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level
above, the OptiStar Elite should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the OptiStar Elite.
A—ELECTROMAGNETIC
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
Table 3
818507-M 2020-05-05
C-5
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the OptiStar
Elite
The OptiStar Elite is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are
controlled. The customer or the user of the OptiStar Elite can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a
minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the OptiStar Elite as
recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)
power of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
(W)
d = 1.2√P d = 1.2√P d = 2.3√P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters (m)
can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
Table 4
A—ELECTROMAGNETIC
818507-M 2020-05-05
C-6

A—ELECTROMAGNETIC
818507-M 2020-05-05
NOTES
Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC
2111 E. GALBRAITH ROAD CINCINNATI, OHIO 45237-1624 USA

818507-M ELITE Service and Parts Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

818507-M ELITE Service and Parts Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MR CONTRAST DELIVERY SYSTEM

RECORDING REFERENCE NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBERS

Ref. No. ________________________________(located on Power control)

MEANINGS OF SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL

Hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death.

Hazards which could result in personal injury.

Hazards which could result in equipment or property damage.

MEANINGS OF SYMBOLS USED ON THE INJECTOR

Powerhead Connection identifier

Power Control identifier

Power Supply identifier (P/N 814600 / P/N 814450)

Hand start switch connection identifier

System OFF/ON (only for the Console)

Ram movement/injector status identifier:

Check to ensure air is removed from syringe and tubing

P Start Patency Check Injection

Pinch Point possible. Keep fingers away from this area.

Refer to instruction manual

Equipment sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge.

MR Unsafe--an item that is known to pose hazards in all

MR Conditional--an item that has been demonstrated to pose

MR Safe--an item that poses no known hazards in all

<300G Locate in an area with magneticfields less than or

! ATTENTION! Consult User's/Service Manual.

European Union’s Waste Electrical and

CAUTION! Risk of electrical shock. Do not remove cover.

T 4AH , 250 V Fuse Rating (Voltage, Amperage, Type)

S/N Serial Number

P/N Part Number

V/A Volts Amps

[Reverse] key. Retracts the Powerhead Ram.

[Accelerator] key. Increases the speed of the ram when held

[Forward] key. Advances the Powerhead Ram.

CLASSIFICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH EN60601

DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

Type CF applied part (Syringes and Tubing)

DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST INGRESS OF WATER

DEGREE OF SAFETY OF APPLICATION IN THE PRESENCE OF A FLAMMABLE

Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC, 2111 E. Galbraith Road, Cincinnati, OH 45237-1624 USA

1.5 SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................ 1-5-1

1.5.1 DIMENSIONS.......................................................................................................................... 1-5-1

OVERVIEW OF SYSTEM FEATURES.............................................................2-1-1

MAINTENANCE AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURES.......................................4-1-1

4.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE........................................................................................................... 4-1-2

FIELD REPLACEABLE PARTS.......................................................................6-1-1

6.3 POWERHEAD....................................................................................................................................... 6-3-1

6.3.1 POWERHEAD REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS........................................................... 6-3-2

6.4 POWER CONTROL............................................................................................................................. 6-4-1

6.9 CABLES.................................................................................................................................................. 6-9-1

6.10 SERVICE KIT PARTS.......................................................................................................................6-10-1

6.10.34 HARDWARE KIT, END OF EXTENSION ARM (P/N 241426S)........................ 6-10-12

8.2 LIMIT SWITCH CALIBRATION (MODE 0):................................................................................... 8-2-1

8.2.1 SETUP....................................................................................................................................... 8-2-1

SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD AND UPGRADE................................................10-1-1

POWERHEAD SCHEMATIC 814301-2-B (1 OF 4).........................................................................11-4-1

POWERHEAD SCHEMATIC 814301-2-B (2 OF 4).........................................................................11-4-2

POWERHEAD INSTALLATION FOR CEILING SUSPENSION......................................................... A-10

SERVICE CHECKLIST....................................................................................... B-1

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY GUIDANCE....................................... C-1

1.1 INDICATIONS FOR USE

This page intentionally left blank.

1.2 SERVICE TECHNICIAN QUALIFICATIONS

This page intentionally left blank.

1.3 CONFIGURATION OF UNIT